0% found this document useful (1 vote)

406 views

Inventory Management - People Soft

Inventory Management.

Uploaded by

Rajkumar6015

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (1 vote)

406 views

Inventory Management - People Soft

Inventory Management.

Uploaded by

Rajkumar6015

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 564

World A7.

3 Inventory Management PeopleBook

June 1996

J.D. Edwards World Source Company 7601 Technology Way Denver, CO 80237

The information in this guide is confidential and a proprietary trade secret of J.D. Edwards & Company. It may not be copied, distributed, or disclosed without prior written permission. This guide is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of J.D. Edwards & Company. The software described in this guide is furnished under a license agreement and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of the agreement. J.D. Edwards & Company uses an automatic software disabling routine to monitor the license agreement. For more details about this routine, please refer to the Technical Foundation Guide.

Where Do I Look?

Online Help
Program Form Field

CDROM Guides

Guides

Technical Foundation
System Administration and Environment Fundamentals Understanding Your Environment Creating and Maintaining Environments Setting Up Security Upgrading Your System

Common Foundation
Prerequisite J.D. Edwards Software Fundamentals Using Menus Getting Help Customizing Data Reporting

Important Note for Students in Training Classes

This guide is a source book for online helps, training classes, and user reference. Training classes may not cover all the topics contained here.

Welcome

About this Guide

This guide provides overviews, illustrations, procedures, and examples for release A7.3 of J.D. Edwards software. Forms (screens and windows) shown are only examples. If your company operates at a different software level, you might find discrepancies between what is shown in this guide and what you see on your screen. This guide includes examples to help you understand how to use the system. You can access all of the information about a task using either the guide or the online help. Before using this guide, you should have a fundamental understanding of the system, user defined codes, and category codes. You should also know how to: Use the menus Enter information in fields Add, change, and delete information Create and run report versions Access online documentation

Audience
This guide is intended primarily for the following audiences: Users Classroom instructors Client Services personnel Consultants and implementation team members

Organization
This guide is divided into sections for each major function. Sections contain chapters for each task or group of related tasks. Each chapter contains the information you need to accomplish the task, run the program, or print the report. Chapters normally include an overview, form or report samples, and procedures.

Section

Chapter 1 Overview Tasks What You Should Know About Field Descriptions Processing Options Test Yourself

When it is appropriate, chapters also might explain automatic accounting instructions, processing options, and warnings or error situations. Some chapters include self-tests for your use outside the classroom. This guide has a detailed table of contents and an index to help you locate information quickly.

Conventions Used in this Guide

The following terms have specific meanings when used in this guide: Form refers to a screen or a window. Table generally means file. We assume an implied completion at the end of a series of steps. That is, to complete the procedure described in the series of steps, either press Enter or click OK, except where noted.

Table of Contents

Inventory Management Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inventory Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bulk Stock Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purchase Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sales Order Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Integration with Manufacturing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bills of Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shop Floor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment/Plant Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MPS/MRP/DRP and ERP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stocking Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Item Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Item Numbering and Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Item Cross-Referencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location and Lot Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Item Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical and Logical Warehouses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Warehouses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logical Warehouses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Item Counts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Item Costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menu Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11 11 11 12 12 12 12 13 13 13 14 14 15 15 17 17 18 18 18 19 19 110 110 110 110 111 111 113

Daily Item Entry

About Item Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enter Item Master Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Item Master Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Basic Item Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Item Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Item Responsibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Item Classification Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 25 25 27 213 214 216

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

Entering Item Unit of Measure Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Item Manufacturing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Item Grade and Potency Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing Options for Item Master Information Revisions . . . . . . Enter Branch/Plant Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Branch/Plant Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning an Item to a Branch/Plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Item Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Item Tax Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Locating Item Sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Item Reorder Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Item Manufacturing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Item Information for Multiple Branch/Plants . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing Options for Item Branch Information Revisions . . . . . . Processing Options for Item/Branch Duplication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing Options for Item/Branch Duplication Batch Selection . Enter Item Cost Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Item Cost Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning a Cost Level to an Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning a Cost Method to an Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Item Costs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Manufacturing Setup Cost Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enter Sales Price Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Sales Price Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Price Levels to an Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Price Groups to an Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Item Prices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

221 226 232 235 237 237 240 240 245 245 246 248 251 253 253 254 255 255 256 258 259 261 263 263 264 265 267

Inventory Transactions
About Inventory Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Where Does the System Record Transactions? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Which Accounting Information Does the System Update? . . . . . . . . What Types of Accounting Information Can I Review? . . . . . . . . . . . Issue Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Issuing Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing Options for Inventory Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjust Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjusting Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing Options for Inventory Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transfer Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transferring Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: Transfer Transaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing Options for Inventory Transfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Yourself: Inventory Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 33 33 33 35 35 310 313 313 317 319 319 319 322 324

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Set Up Warehouse Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up Warehouse Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Up Automatic Accounting Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up Automatic Accounting Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Up Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Print Information for Messages and Item Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Documents on Which to Print Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Document Type Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing Options for Text Messages Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Up Default Location Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up Default Location Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining a Default Location and Approval Route Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Default Print Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Up Standard Units of Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up Standard Units of Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: Conversion Factors for Units of Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Up Item Cross-Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up Item Cross-References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Cross-References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reviewing Cross-References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Up Audit Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up Audit Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up IBM Information for the Audit Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Journal Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Journal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activating the Journal Physical File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Data Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Job Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a User Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up the Audit Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Audit Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Audit Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activating the Audit Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing Options for DDP/Audit Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Speed Location Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Speed Location Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Examples: Working with Speed Location Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . Example 1: Speed Location Maintenance Using Blank Limit Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example 2: Speed Location Maintenance Using Upper Limit Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example 3: Speed Location Maintenance Using Lower Limit Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example 4: Speed Location Maintenance Using No Limit Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test Yourself: Inventory System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1013 1013 1017 1017 1023 1023 1025 1027 1027 1028 1029 1031 1031 1032 1033 1035 1035 1036 1041 1041 1042 1045 1047 1047 1048 1049 1050 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1055 1057 1058 1059 1061 1061 1062 1064 1064 1065 1066 1067 1072

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

Lot Processing
About Lot Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enter Lot Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Lot Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Lot Information for Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Information for Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing Options for Lot Master Revisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work with Lot Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Lot Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Lot Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing Options for Lot Availability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Lot Quantities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Lot Activity Dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing Options for Speed Lot Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Lot Statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Lot Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Lot Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Print Trace and Track Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reviewing Trace and Track Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing Options for Lot Tracing Inquiry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Trace and Track Inclusion Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining a Trace and Track Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reclassify Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reclassifying Lots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: Types of Reclassifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing Options for Item/Lot Change Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . 111 113 113 114 119 1113 1115 1115 1115 1118 1118 1122 1126 1128 1131 1131 1133 1134 1136 1136 1137 1139 1139 1140 1144

Advanced & Technical System Updates

About System Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update Item Search Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating Item Search Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Update Item Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating Master Item Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating Item Master and Branch/Plant Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing Options for Item Master Global Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing Options for Item Branch Global Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating Category Codes and Item Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing Options for Global Reporting Code Update . . . . . . . . . . . Revise Location Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Revising Location Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Model Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Updating the Location Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing Options for Location Redefinition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 123 123 125 125 125 126 126 127 127 129 129 1210 1211 1212

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Table of Contents

Purges
About Purges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purge Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purging Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Before You Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Running the General Purge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing Options for Generic Purge Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Running the Special Purge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Running the Item Deletion Purge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Running the Item Master Purge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing Options for Item Master (F4101) Purge . . . . . . . . . . . . Running the Item Balance Purge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing Options for Item Location (F4102) Purge . . . . . . . . . . . 131 133 133 134 135 135 135 135 138 138 138 1310

Data Conversions
About Converting Data in Inventory Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convert Display Decimals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Converting Display Decimals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reviewing Data Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing Options for Data Item Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Convert Cost Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Converting Cost Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What Item Cost Level Conversion Does . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing Options for Item Cost Level Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 143 143 144 146 147 147 147 149

Appendices
Appendix AData Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B Answers to Test Yourself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Item Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inventory Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Item and Quantity Information and Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inventory System Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A1 B1 B1 B2 B2 B3 B4

Appendix C Container Management

About Container Management Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understand Container Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Container Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Container Life Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Recording the Receipt of the Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Filling the Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing Sales Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C1 C3 C3 C3 C5 C6 C7 C7

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

Business Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of Containers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deposit and Rental Fee Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deposit Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Billing Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transaction Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process Container Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing Container Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Running Container Management Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generating the Container Management Extraction Server Report . . . Data Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing Options for Container Management Extraction Server . . Processing Deposits, Rental Fees, and Refunds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Deposit, Rental Fee, and Refund Sales Order Lines . . . . . . Generating the Container Billing Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing Options for Container Deposit/Refund/Rental Billing . . . Processing Deposit, Rental Fee, and Refund Sales Order Lines . . . . Generating Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generating the Customer/Distributor Balance Statement . . . . . . . . . . Processing Options for Customer/Distributor Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . Generating the Container Reconciliations Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing Options for Container Reconcilations Report . . . . . . . . . . Reviewing Container Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reviewing Customer Container Deposits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reviewing Container Transactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Up Container Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up Container Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Do I Set Up Container Order Line Types? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Do I Set Up Container Order Activity Rules? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Do I Set Up Container Item Types? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Do I Set Up Container User Defined Codes? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Do I Set Up Container Print Messages? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How Do I Set Up Container Automatic Accounting Instructions? . . . How Do I Set Up Container Invoice Cycle Calculation? . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up Container Item Cross-References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Processing Options for Cross-Reference Type Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up Container Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Container Deposit/Rental Preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Invoice Cycle Preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Pricing Unit of Measure Preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Print Messages Preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Up Pricing Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix D Functional Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: Voucher Processing Functional Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C8 C8 C8 C9 C10 C10 C10 C13 C13 C13 C14 C15 C15 C16 C18 C18 C18 C19 C21 C21 C22 C22 C24 C24 C25 C25 C28 C31 C31 C31 C32 C33 C34 C35 C35 C36 C36 C38 C40 C42 C45 C48 C50 C52 D1 D2

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Table of Contents

Glossary Index

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management Overview

System Integration
J.D. Edwards Inventory Management system works with other distribution/logistics and manufacturing systems to ensure that the right item is in the right place, at the right time, to meet customer demand.
Address Book

Accounts Receivable

Accounts Payable

AAIs
Sales Order Management

AAIs
General Accounting

AAIs

Purchase Management

Inventory Management

The following provides information about how the Inventory Management system integrates with general accounting and other distribution systems. General Accounting J.D. Edwards General Accounting system allows you to track inventory accounting.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

Inventory Management The Inventory Management system stores item information for the Sales Order Management, Purchase Management, and manufacturing systems. It also stores sales and purchasing costs and quantities available by location and places holds on locations from which you do not sell items. You update the general ledger inventory account balances with any change in inventory valuation, count variances, or movement. Bulk Stock Control This system controls the storage, measurement, and movement of dynamic bulk inventory. You can use it to: Control the storage and movement of liquids from one container to another. Calculate the volume for each transaction for each product and for each container. Provide efficient inventory control, based on volumes at a standard temperature. Calculate product gain/loss accurately for each transaction Use international standard algorithms to perform volume and density conversions to any base temperature. Track inventory balances for each product in various units of measure and show the details of the transactions that created the balance. Track a product that has Commingled/Custody Stock in a tank and manage the transactions associated with that product on an owner byowner basis. Purchase Management The Purchase Management system retrieves item costs for purchase orders from the Inventory Management system. After you receive and create vouchers for purchased goods, the system updates the general ledger and creates accounts payable entries for payment. Sales Order Management The system retrieves item prices and costs from the Inventory Management system for sales orders. The system updates the general ledger and creates accounts receivable entries to record inventory, cost of goods sold, revenue, and tax transactions for cash receipts processing.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management Overview

Address Book The Inventory Management system works with the Address Book system to retrieve up-to-date customer, supplier, and warehouse address information.

Integration with Manufacturing Systems

AAIs

General Accounting

AAIs

Fixed Assets

Inventory Management Bills of Material Product Data Management

Payroll

Equipment Management

Shop Floor Control

MPS MRP DRP ERP Forecasting

The following information describes how the Inventory Management system integrates with manufacturing functions and systems. Bills of Material Both the Inventory Management and the Product Data Management system use bills of material. Bill of material allow you to: Define kits and the quantities of components you need to assemble or manufacture a parent item during sales order entry. Select components during purchase order entry.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

Inventory Management and Shop Floor Control transactions initiate the issue of bill of material components, creating general ledger entries and updating inventory on-hand quantities. The following allow flexibility for manufacturing planning and costing processes: Parent/component structures Quantities of components per kit Feature planning Costing percentages Date effectivity Product Data Management The Product Data Management (PDM) system provides the foundation on which you define manufacturing data, including: Bills of material Routing instructions Product cost rollups Engineering change management PDM is the repository for data that controls your material and product planning processes, including: Distribution Resource Planning Manufacturing Production Scheduling Material Requirements Planning Enterprise Resource Planning Shop Floor Control The Shop Floor Control system lets you transact product assembly and manufacturing activities through either work order or rate-based production processes. Shop floor transactions are the basis for: General ledger entries Updates to onhand inventory quantities Payroll time entries

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management Overview

These transactions: Issue material components Record hours of direct or setup labor Track machine activity hours Allow completion of finished or semifinished items into inventory Equipment/Plant Maintenance The Equipment/Plant Maintenance system lets you transact equipment and plant maintenance activities through work order activity processes. You use maintenance transactions to: Issue material components Record hours of direct or setup labor Track machine activity hours Track and record costs to the Fixed Asset and General Accounting systems These transactions also update on-hand inventory quantities. MPS/MRP/DRP and ERP These systems use information about on-hand inventory quantities, current and forecast demands for: Product sales or replacement parts Interbranch inventory needs Parts requirements for equipment/plant maintenance, Incoming item availability from purchase orders or shop floor production They perform planning activities that: recommend internal transfer orders suggest purchase orders or blanket/contract purchase order releases propose the release of shop floor work orders or changes to shop floor production rate schedules to meet inventory demands

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

Inventory Management System Integration

Purchase Management
SPurchase orders SSupplier information SSupplier performance SSupplier/item relationships SApproval SReceiving SAuthorization

Accounts Payable
SVoucher SReports

payments

S U P P L Y

System 43

System 04

Advanced Warehouse Mgmt

SPutaway fixed & random SReplenishments SPicking fixed & random SUtilization analysis SLocation specification

System 46

Defaults information to all systems in shaded areas

Inventory Management General Ledger

SInventory movement SVariances SSales SReturns SBreakage STaxes SItems SBranch/plants SStocking locations SCosts SPrices SCharacteristics SLot and serial information

Manufacturing
SShop Floor Control SWork order issues SSpecifications SCompletion SWork in process SMPS/MRP/DRP

System 41

System 09

Bulk Inventory
SGrade

Systems 30, 31, 32, and 34

and Potency System 4050

D E M A N D

Sales Order Management

SSales orders SReturns SCustomer information/instructions SShipment confirmation SInvoicing SPricing

Accounts Receivable
SInvoices SCash receipts SCredit/Collection SStatements

Mgmt

System 42 System 03

Advanced Price Adjustments

System 45

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management Overview

Features
This overview provides some of the business considerations related to inventory management and the features that you can use to help you fully utilize your Inventory Management system.

Stocking Considerations
Consider the types of inventory you have, what you use them for, and where and how you store them. Then consider your companys needs based on your business activities and your suppliers and customers requirements. Typically, your company carries one or both of the following types of inventory: Stock items Nonstock items Stock items are stored products or parts that are ready for sale. Non-stock items are typical items that are used by your company, such as office supplies. Non-stock items may also include: Kit components Consignment items Customer supplies Standingorder items If your company stores both stock and non-stock items, you must determine the most efficient method to identify, store, and track them. You must also decide how to use the Inventory Management system to determine: How should stock and nonstock items be identified and where should they be stored? How should the company account for stock and nonstock items? How should items that are priced in multiple currencies be identified and tracked? How should items that require special handling, such as refrigeration, be identified and stored? How should items that require quality analysis or testing be identified? How should obsolete items be identified? How should broken or defective parts be identified?

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

Item Identification
Item Numbering and Description J.D. Edwards provides multiple methods of identifying items within the software. You can use actual item numbers, numbers that you designate, or a combination of both. By using actual item numbers, you can identify pertinent information about an item such as: Material used Year produced Specific contract Special processes of manufacture Country of origin Tests or quality analyses performed Identify each item with up to three inventory item numbers: Primary number Secondary number (for vendor, manufacturing, or industry standards) Systemassigned number The Inventory Management systems cross-reference capabilities allow you to have unlimited item identifiers within the system. Besides identifying items numerically, you also can describe each item with additional information, such as: Standard description Technical description with specifications Warning messages Vendor information and availability You can use any of the item descriptions or numbers interchangeably on screens, reports, or in transaction processing. Item Cross-Referencing Typically, customers use several methods of identification when they order inventory. For example, assume that customers order inventory with their own part numbers, or that vendors require that you order items using their part numbers. Using the Inventory Management system, you can establish these numbers as cross-reference numbers that are interchangeable on forms, reports, or transaction processing.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management Overview

Cross-referencing is also useful if you have contracts that require parts or items from a specific customer. This is true of government contracts, in which items that are used in contracts must be kept separate in the storage, manufacturing, and accounting processes.

Location and Lot Considerations

After you determine how to store your inventory, you must set up physical locations to fully utilize the available storage space. A physical location, also known as an item location, is where you actually store an item. You must also determine how to identify item locations and lots in the system to allow you to locate items quickly and perform daily operations efficiently. Item Locations The Inventory Management system allows you to track your items through a vast number of item locations that you create in the system. The branch/plants, which are the actual item locations that you set up, can represent everything from warehouses to stores to trucks. Each branch/plant can define its own set of rules, which allow you to separate divisions of universal items for which you can implement unique rules, costs, prices, and so forth. Within each branch/plant, you can create locations online that closely resemble the structure of your physical locations (for example, aisles, bins, and shelves) within the branch/plant. For example, you can define locations by classifying them into groups that accommodate: Consignment items Items requiring rework or repair Returned items Special items belonging to a particular customer After you establish item locations, you can use the information to: Verify specific locations Display item descriptions Review available quantities Review lot statuses After you establish a branch/plant, you can further define it by identifying locations, which include zones, aisles, bins, lots, and so on.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

Lots You can identify and segregate inventory by lots within locations for special lot control or layered costing. These features allow you to provide unique descriptions, cost information, and expiration dates. You can: Assign a lot number to an item or have the system assign it upon receipt of the item Place a lot on hold when there's a problem within the lot Assign a status to a lot, such as one in quarantine or inspection Review transactions by lot Identify perishable lots so you utilize the oldest goods first Track items bought or produced at the same time in case you have to retrieve those goods from your customers

Physical and Logical Warehouses

If you typically receive large shipments of items that take up a lot of space, it will no longer be necessary to transfer or consolidate similar items to open up one large physical space. Instead, you can portion out the item into whatever appropriate space is available, and easily track each item using the Inventory Management system. Physical Warehouses Using the Inventory Management system, you can maximize the dimensions and layout of your physical warehouse to: Use overflow areas more efficiently Assign locations Track work in process Identify and track items in transit Identify similar items Logical Warehouses A logical warehouse is a location that does not actually exist. You designate a logical warehouse to resemble the actual physical warehouse, and can define your locations in whatever format is required to fit your needs. You can define: Pseudo locations, which represent a physical location, for products you sell but do not stock (such as products that are stocked at your supplier's facility and shipped from there) Locations for placement of damaged goods

110

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management Overview

Locations for demo inventory Consigned items Customer inventory Returns Rework Expensed inventory Item Counts You can use the Inventory Management system to identify discrepancies between your online amounts and cycle and tag counts. You can conduct as many cycle and/or tag counts as you need at any time. You can also: Print count sheets Enter and verify counts Review variances online or by report Update correct counts You can quickly access the following quantity information for inventory: Onhand Committed to orders On back order On purchase orders The Inventory Management system allows you to use its interactive and batch capabilities to compute reorder points and quantities. Item Costs Maintaining accurate and complete records on the value of inventory is one of the major concerns of most businesses today. With automatic unit cost computation, you can maintain an unlimited number of costs by item and location. The Inventory Management system can automatically compute weighted average and last-in costs after goods are received or adjusted.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

111

Inventory Management

The Inventory Management system, with its variety of cost bases, can also help you maintain appropriate valuation of your inventory. FIFO, LIFO, or other methods of valuation can help you take into account differences in value because of: Age Changing costs Design changes Technology changes With ABC analysis, you can identify the items in greatest demand and most profitable inventory. The ABC report details total sales, gross margin, or on-hand value for each item, for one or all locations.

112

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management Overview

Menu Overview

Inventory Management G41

Daily Processing
Inventory Master/ Transactions G4111 Item Revisions G4112

Lot Control G4113

Bulk Stock Control G4150

Bill of Materials G4114

Periodic Processing
Inventory Count Alternatives G4121 As Of Processing G4122

Inventory Price and Cost Updates G4123

Item Supplemental Data/CIF G4124

Reports and Inquiries

Inventory Reports G41111 Inventory Inquiries G41112

Inventory Advanced and Technical Operations

Inventory Advanced and Technical Operations G4131 Global Updates and Purges G41311

Inventory System Setup

Inventory System Setup G4141 Inventory User Defined Codes G41411 Bulk Stock Control Setup G415041

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

113

Inventory Management

114

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Daily

Inventory Management

116

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Item Entry
Objectives
To provide the system with details about the stock and nonstock items in inventory.

About Item Entry

Prior to working with your inventory, you must provide the system with information about the items you stock. When you enter each inventory item, you provide the system with details such as: Item identifiers Item descriptions (foreign and domestic) Item rules Item costs and prices Item weights and measures You must also provide the system with information about the location of each item, including: The branches or plants where each item resides The locations used within each branch or plant The system uses this information to help track and process each item through your distribution and manufacturing systems. Inventory Management

Purchase Orders

Sales Orders

Shipping

Item Information

Warehousing

Manufacturing

Bulk Products

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

Entering an item includes two steps: 1. Enter item master information, which includes basic information about an item. 2. Customize the item master information to suit each branch or plant that the item occupies.

F4101

Item Master
Primary Item Information

Item Branch Information

Warehouse A

Warehouse B

Warehouse C

When you enter item master information, the system creates a record in the Item Master table (F4101). When you enter branch/plant information for an item, the system creates records in the Item Branch Master table (F4102) and the Item Location Information table (F41021).
F4102 F41021

Item Item Branch Branch Master Master

Item Location

Item information that applies throughout the branch, such as

DCategory codes DPlanner/buyer numbers

Item information specific to certain locations, for example:

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

What You Should Know About

Setting up a template You might want to set up a template that contains common values for fields. You can enter new items by locating the template and specifying new item numbers.

Deleting item master information

You cannot delete master information for an item if any of the following exists:
Item branch records Bills of material Item cross-reference numbers Supplier relationships Sales prices

Displaying additional item information

You can set processing options to display additional item information subsequent to item master information (for example, item branch/plant information).

See Also
Entering Item Cost Information (P4105) for information about entering master information that pertains to item costs Entering Sales Price Information (P4106) for information about entering master information that pertains to item prices

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Item Master Information

Entering Basic Item Information

To enter basic item information, complete the following tasks: Enter item identifiers Enter item descriptions and search text Enter item processing information Each item can have up to three identifiers. You use the identifiers to locate the item. These identifiers can represent universal product codes (UPCs), bar codes, supplier numbers, or a user defined value. In Branch/Plant Constants, you must specify a primary item identifier. You must also enter an item description and the text on which a user is most likely to search when trying to locate the item. You can translate item descriptions and search text into multiple languages to accommodate those users who must locate items using alternate languages. After you enter identifiers, a description, and search text for an item, you enter the values that control how the system processes the item. These values pertain to stocking, packaging, accounting transactions, system interfaces, and so on.

What You Should Know About

Locating other identifiers To locate an item using an identifier other than the primary identifier, you can perform a wildcard search by typing a special symbol, such as an asterisk (*), before the identifier.

To enter item identifiers

On Item Master Information Complete the following fields: Item Number Short Product No (Product Number) Catalog No (Catalog Number)

See Also
Defining Branch/Plant Constants (P41204) for more information about specifying the primary item identifier

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

To enter item descriptions and search text

On Item Master Information 1. To enter descriptions and search text in your native language, complete the following fields: Desc (Description) Srch (Search) 2. To enter descriptions and search text in alternate languages, access Item Alternative Description.

3. On Item Alternative Description, complete the following fields: LP (Language Preference) Description Search Text To enter item processing information

On Item Master Information Complete the following fields: Stocking Type G/L Class Line Type Bulk/Packed Flag Backorders Allowed

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Item Master Information

Unit of Measure Check Availability Y/N ABC Codes

Field Item Number Short

Explanation An identifier for an item. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The first of three identifiers you can assign to an item. The system assigns this number if you activate the Next Number program. This field is numeric only. If you leave the other two item identifier fields blank, the system copies this number to those fields.

Product No

An identifier for an item. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The second of three identifiers that you can assign to an item. This field is alphanumeric. If you leave the third identifier field blank, the system copies this number to that field.

Catalog No

An identifier for an item. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The third of three identifiers you can assign to an item. This field is alphanumeric. If you leave the second identifier field blank, the system copies that number to this field.

Desc Srch

A brief description of an item, a remark, or an explanation. A field that lets you specify how the system searches for an item. Your entry should be specific and descriptive of the item. Type the words in the order a user is likely to enter them. In single-byte environments, where computer storage space can hold only Latin-based language character sets, the system inserts the first 30 characters from the items description if you do not enter search text. In double-byte environments, where computer storage space can hold more complex language character sets (in languages such as Japanese, Chinese, and Korean), you must complete this field. It is a single-byte field that you complete with single-byte characters to phonetically represent the item description (which can be single-byte, double-byte, or both).

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

Field Description

Explanation A brief description of an item, a remark, or an explanation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This text should correspond with the language you specify in the Language Preference field.

Description Line 2

A second, 30-character description, remark, or explanation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This text should correspond with the language you specify in the Language Preference field.

Search Text

A field that lets you specify how the system searches for an item. Your entry should be specific and descriptive of the item. Type the words in the order a user is likely to enter them. In single-byte environments, where computer storage space can hold only Latin-based language character sets, the system inserts the first 30 characters from the items description if you do not enter search text. In double-byte environments, where computer storage space can hold more complex language character sets (in languages such as Japanese, Chinese, and Korean), you must complete this field. It is a single-byte field that you complete with single-byte characters to phonetically represent the item description (which can be single-byte, double-byte, or both). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This text should correspond with the language you specify in the Language Preference field.

Stocking Type

A user defined code (system 41/type I) that indicates how you stock an item(for example, as finished goods, or as raw materials). The following stocking types are hard coded and you should not change them: B Bulk Floor Stock C Configured item F Feature K Kit parent item N Non-stock A user defined code (system 41/type 9) that controls which general ledger accounts receive the dollar amount of inventory transactions for this item.

G/L Class

210

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Item Master Information

Field Line Type

Explanation A code that controls how the system treats lines on a transaction. It controls the systems with which the transaction interfaces (General Ledger, Job Cost, Accounts Payable, Accounts Receivable, and Inventory Management). It also specifies the conditions under which a line prints on reports and is included in calculations. For example: S Stock item J Job cost N Non-stock item F Freight T Text information M Miscellaneous charges and credits A user defined code (system 00, type UM), that identifies the unit of measure that the system uses to express the quantity of an item, for example, EA (each) or KG (kilogram). Indicates if the item is a bulk liquid product. If it is a bulk product, you must perform temperature and density/gravity conversions. To record the movement of bulk products, you must use forms designed specifically for bulk products. If you try to record movement using standard inventory forms, the system prevents the movement. Valid values are: P Packaged B Bulk Liquid If you leave this field blank, the system uses P.

Unit of Measure

Bulk/Packed Flag

Backorders Allowed

A code that indicates whether you allow backorders for this item. You can allow backorders by item (through Item Master or Item Branch/Plant), or by customer (through Billing Instructions). Y Yes, allow backorders for this item N No, do not allow backorders for this item, regardless of the backorders code assigned to the customer NOTE: The system does not use this information if you have set the option on Branch/Plant Constants to indicate that you do not allow backorders in your operating environment.

Check Availability Y/N

This field controls whether availability checking is performed throughout the Sales Order Processing system. You might want to check availability for some items. For other items you might want to assume that an adequate supply is available. Valid values are: Y Check Availability N Do Not Check Availability

Assigning Item Responsibility

When you enter master information for an item, you can specify those persons or businesses that are responsible for the item, including the buyer, planner, and preferred carriers. Before you can assign a responsible person or business to an item, each must have an address book number in the Address Book system.

214

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Item Master Information

To assign item responsibility

On Item Master Information 1. Complete the following fields: Planner Number Buyer Number 2. Access Classification Codes from Item Master Information.

3. On Classification Codes, complete the following fields: Sales: Preferred Carrier Purchasing: Preferred Carrier

Field Planner Number Buyer Number Sales: Preferred Carrier

Explanation The address number of the material planner for this item. The address number of the person responsible for setting up and maintaining the correct stocking levels for the item. The address number for the preferred carrier of the item. The customer or your organization might prefer a certain carrier due to route or special handling requirements. This value serves as the carrier default when you enter a sales order for the item.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

215

Inventory Management

Field

Explanation

Purchasing: Preferred Carrier The address number for the preferred carrier of the item. The supplier or your organization may prefer a certain carrier due to route or special handling requirements. This value serves as the carrier default when you enter a purchase order for the item.

See Also
Working with Basic Address Book Information (P01051) in the Address Book system for more information about adding address numbers

Entering Item Classification Codes

You might want to group items with similar characteristics so that you can work with the entire group at the same time. For example, you can group items that are fragile so that the system prints special shipping conditions on invoices for items from the group. To group items, you assign classification codes to them. You can assign classification codes to items when you enter item master information or when you enter item branch/plant information. There are several categories of classification codes. Each category represents a different item classification or property type, such as shipping conditions. From the shipping conditions category, you can select a code that indicates the condition under which you ship an item, such as fragile. You can assign one of four groups of classification codes. Each group relates to one of the following J.D. Edwards systems: Sales Order Management Purchase Management Inventory Management Advanced Warehouse Management Complete the following optional tasks: Enter sales classification codes Enter purchasing classification codes Enter inventory classification codes Enter warehouse classification codes

216

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Item Master Information

To enter sales classification codes

On Item Master Information 1. Access Classification Codes.

2. On Classification Codes, complete the following fields: Sales Catalog Section Sub Section Sales Category Code 3 Sales Category Code 4 Sales Category Code 5 Preferred Carrier Category Code 6 Category Code 7 Category Code 8 Category Code 9 Category Code 10

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

217

Inventory Management

To enter purchasing classification codes

On Item Master Information 1. Access Classification Codes. 2. On Classification Codes, enter a classification code for each of the following fields: Commodity Class Commodity Sub Class Supplier Rebate Code Master Planning Family Landed Cost Rule To enter inventory classification codes

On Item Master Information 1. Access Classification Codes. 2. On Classification Codes, enter a classification code for each of the following fields: Shipping Conditions Code Shipping Commodity Class Cycle Count Category To enter warehouse classification codes

On Item Master Information 1. Access Classification Codes. 2. On Classification Codes, enter a classification code for each of the following fields: Item Dimension Group Warehouse Process Group 1 Warehouse Process Group 2 Warehouse Process Group 3

218

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Item Master Information

Field Sales Catalog Section

Explanation One of ten category codes to be used for sales coding purposes. These codes can represent such things as color, material content, or use. One of ten category codes to be used for sales coding purposes. These codes can represent such things as color, material content, or use. This field represents one of ten property type categories available for sales purposes.

Sub Section

Sales Category Code 3

One of ten category codes to be used for sales coding purposes. These codes can represent such things as color, material content, or use. The address number for the preferred carrier of the item. The customer or your organization might prefer a certain carrier due to route or special handling requirements. One of ten category codes to be used for sales coding purposes. These can represent such things as color, material content, or use. A code (table 41/P1) that represents an item property type or classification, such as commodity type, planning family, or so forth. The system uses this code to sort and process like items. This field is one of six classification categories available primarily for purchasing purposes.

Carrier Number

Category Code 6

Commodity Class

Commodity Sub Class

A code (table 41/P2) that represents an item property type or classification, such as commodity type, planning family, or so forth. The system uses this code to sort and process like items. This field is one of six classification categories available primarily for purchasing purposes.

Supplier Rebate Code

A code (UDC table 41/P3) that represents an item property type or classification, such as commodity type, planning family, or so forth. The system uses this code to sort and process like items. This field is one of six classification categories available primarily for purchasing purposes.

Master Planning Family

A code (table 41/P4) that represents an item property type or classification, such as commodity type, planning family, or so forth. The system uses this code to sort and process like items. This field is one of six classification categories available primarily for purchasing purposes.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

219

Inventory Management

Field Landed Cost Rule

Explanation A code (table 41/P5) that indicates the landed cost rule for an item, which defines purchasing costs that exceed the actual price of the item. These costs might be for broker fees, commissions, and so forth. You set up landed cost rules on Landed Cost Revisions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . When you enter a purchase order for the item, this is the default landed cost rule. If you enter a landed cost rule for the entire purchase order, it overrides the landed cost rule for the item. This is the only purchasing classification category that is hard coded. You can use it for landed cost rules only. This field corresponds to purchasing reporting code 5.

Shipping Conditions Code

A code (table 41/C) that represents an item property type or classification, such as special shipping conditions. The system uses this code to sort and process like items. This field is one of three classification categories available primarily for inventory and shipping purposes.

Shipping Commodity Class

A user defined code (system 41/type E) that represents an item property type or classification, such as international shipment handling. The system uses this code to sort and process like items. This field is one of three classification categories available primarily for inventory and shipping purposes.

Cycle Count Category

A code (table 41/8) that represents the family or cycle in which an item is counted. Cycle counting means that you count different inventory items at different times. Cycle codes commonly represent item values, item locations, time frames, or product groups. A code (system 41/type 01) that identifies a group of items that share the same dimensions. An item dimension group defines the dimensions for all items that belong to the group. After you set up an item dimension group, you can assign items to the group through Classification Codes (41011). A code (system 41/type 02) that identifies a group of items that you want to move the same way. An items process group determines the movement instructions the system uses to put away, pick, and replenish the item. You assign items to process groups using Classification Codes (P41011).

Item Dimension Group

Process Group 1

220

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Item Master Information

Entering Item Unit of Measure Information

You must provide the system with the item units of measure that are most common to each of your distribution processes, such as sales, purchasing, and so on. For example, you might purchase an item in pallets, stock it in boxes, and ship it in individual containers. If you work with an item in multiple units of measure, you must specify how to convert one unit of measure to another. For example, if you stock items in boxes and crates, you must specify the number of individual items in a box and the number of boxes in a crate.

1 box 1 crate

2 eaches 2 boxes

In some instances, the system must work with an item in its smallest (primary) unit of measure. The item conversions you specify must enable the system to trace all units of measure back to the primary unit of measure. You can set up unit of measure conversions that are specific to an item or to an item and branch/plant combination. You specify whether item conversions are specific to a branch/plant in System Constants. You can also set up units of measure that are standard for all items. You must set up all units of measure for an item in the Unit of Measure Conversion table (F41002) or the Standard Unit of Measure Conversion table (F41003). The system verifies the item unit of measure conversions before using standard unit of measure conversions. Complete the following tasks: Enter default units of measure for items Define item unit of measure conversions

See Also
Setting Up Standard Units of Measure (P41003)

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

221

Inventory Management

To enter default units of measure for items

On Item Master Information 1. Access Default Units of Measure.

2. On Default Units of Measure, complete the following field to locate the item: Item Number 3. Complete the following fields: Primary Secondary Purchasing Pricing Shipping Production Component Weight Volume

222

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Item Master Information

To define item unit of measure conversions

On Item Master Information 1. Access Default Units of Measure. 2. On Default Units of Measure, access Item Units of Measure.

3. On Item Units of Measure, complete the following fields: Branch Structured Only Item Number Primary UOM The Branch field displays only if item unit of measure conversions are specific to branch/plants. 4. For each unit of measure that the system must convert for the item, complete the following fields: UM (Unit of Measure To) Quantity UM (Unit of Measure From)

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

223

Inventory Management

Field Primary

Explanation A code (table 00/UM) that indicates the primary unit of measure for the item. The primary unit of measure should also be the smallest unit of measure in which you handle the item. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This is the primary stock accounting unit (PSAU) of measure that the system uses to store all inventory. If you change the primary unit of measure, the conversion factors in the item-level conversion table will no longer be valid. The default for this field is the unit of measure you specify for the item on Item Master Information.

Secondary

A code (table 00/UM) that indicates an alternate unit of measure for the item. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The default for this field is the primary unit of measure that you specify in processing options for Item Master Information.

Purchasing

A code (table 00/UM) that identifies the unit of measure in which you usually purchase the item. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The default for this field is the primary unit of measure that you specify in processing options for Item Master Information.

Pricing

A code (system 00/type UM) that indicates the unit of measure in which you usually price the item. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The default for this field is the primary unit of measure that you specify in processing options for Item Master Information.

Shipping

A code (table 00/UM) that indicates the unit of measure in which you usually ship the item. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The default for this field is the primary unit of measure that you specify in processing options for Item Master Information.

Production

A code (table 00/UM) that indicates the unit of measure in which you produce the item. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The default for this field is the primary unit of measure that you specify in processing options for Item Master Information. This code serves as the default for: The order quantity when you create a work order The batch quantity when you create a new bill of material or routing The rate schedule quantity in Rate Schedule Revision

224

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Item Master Information

Field Component

Explanation A code (table 00/UM) that indicates the unit of measure for an item when it serves as a component. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The default for this field is the primary unit of measure that you specify in processing options for Item Master Information. This code serves as the default value for: The quantity per parent when adding the component item to a bill of material or work order parts list The quantity in the assembly inclusion rules in Configuration Management

Weight

A user defined code (system 00/type UM) that identifies the unit of measure that the system uses to display weight for this item. You can specify ounces, grams, kilograms, and so on, as weight standards. The system uses this unit of measure for the item or overrides it for an individual item or container. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The default for this field is the weight unit of measure you specify in processing options for Item Master Information.

Volume

A code (system 00/table UM) that indicates the volumetric unit of measure for ambient volume, for example, gallon (GL) or liter (LT). A code that determines whether the system displays all units of measure for an item and branch/plant or only the structured units of measure set up for the Advanced Warehouse Management system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you use the Advanced Warehouse Management system, you must structure conversions from large to small. For example: 1 Pallet (24 Cases ) Structure Code 1 1 Case (36 Boxes ) Structure Code 2 1 Box (6 Eaches) Structure Code 3 You assign structure code 1 to the largest unit of measure and codes 2, 3, and so on, to the smaller units of measure. NOTE: You do not have to define the primary unit of measure within a structure. This value is always the default for the lowest level.

Structured Only

A user defined code (system 00/type UM) that identifies the unit of measure for an item. For example, it can be eaches, cases, boxes, and so on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This unit of measure to which you are converting.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

225

Inventory Management

Field Quantity

Explanation The factor that the system uses to convert one unit of measure to another unit of measure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The quantity and the unit of measure from which you are converting equal the unit of measure to which you are converting.

A code (UDC table 00/UM) that indicates a secondary unit of measure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The unit of measure you are converting from. This unit of measure in conjunction with the quantity equals the unit of measure to which you are converting.

Entering Item Manufacturing Information

You can define manufacturing information about an item when you enter item master information. This information includes:

Requirements planning information

You enter requirements planning information to develop a planning forecast for the items that you use to run your distribution and manufacturing operations. You enter leadtime information to calculate the time frames that are necessary to assemble or manufacture an item. You enter reference information about the drawing plans for an item, so that you can refer back to the plans as necessary.

Leadtime information

Engineering information

Complete the following tasks: Enter requirements planning information Enter leadtime information Enter engineering information

226

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Item Master Information

To enter requirements planning information

On Item Master Information 1. Access Manufacturing Values Entry. 2. On Manufacturing Values Entry, complete the following fields: Value Order Policy Planning Code Planning Fence Rule Accounting Cost Qty Round to Whole Number Planning Fence Freeze Fence Message Display Fence

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

227

Inventory Management

To enter leadtime information

On Item Master Information 1. Access Manufacturing Values Entry. 2. On Manufacturing Values Entry, complete the following fields: MFG Leadtime Quantity Fixed/Variable Leadtime Level Leadtime Manufacturing Leadtime Cumulative Leadtime Per Unit Issue Type Code To enter engineering information

On Item Master Information 1. Access Manufacturing Values Entry. 2. On Manufacturing Values Entry, complete the following fields: Drawing Size Last Revision No Drawing Number

Field Value Order Policy

Explanation A field that the system uses in conjunction with the order policy code. It can show three types of data: The value of the fixed order quantity when order policy code 2 (fixed order quantity) is selected. The number of additional days of supply after demand is encountered when you select order policy code 4 (periods of supply). The desired inventory level when you select order policy code 5 (rate scheduled item). If the ending available quantity is below or above the desired inventory level, then MPS/MRP/DRP generation issues an increase rate to or a decrease rate to message.

228

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Item Master Information

Field Planning Code

Explanation A code that indicates how Master Production Schedule (MPS), Material Requirements Planning (MRP), or Distribution Requirements Planning (DRP) processes this item. Valid codes are: 0 Not Planned by MPS, MRP, or DRP 1 Planned by MPS or DRP 2 Planned by MRP 3 Planned by MRP with additional independent forecast 4 Planned by MPS, Parent in Planning Bill 5 Planned by MPS, Component in Planning Bill These codes are hard coded.

Planning Fence Rule

A code (system 34, table TF) that the system uses in conjunction with the Planning Time Fence Days field to determine how forecast demand or actual customer demand is used. For example: S tells the system to plan using customer demand before the time fence and forecast after the time fence F tells the system to plan using forecast before the time fence and forecast plus customer demand after the time fence If you enter 5 in the Planning Time Fence Days field and S in this field, then the system uses only customer demand for the regeneration for the first 5 days. After 5 days, the system uses the forecast for the regeneration. Valid codes are: C Customer demand before, greater of forecast or customer demand after F Forecast before, forecast plus customer demand after G Greater of forecast or customer demand before, forecast after S Customer demand before, forecast after 1 Zero before, forecast after 3 Zero before, forecast plus customer demand after

Accounting Cost Quantity

An amount the system uses in the cost rollup program to determine the allocation of setup costs. The system totals the setup costs and divides the sum by this quantity to determine a unit setup cost. The default is 1.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

229

Inventory Management

Field Round to Whole Number

Explanation A code that determines if an item should be rounded to the closest whole number for planning purposes. Valid codes are: R Round to the closest whole number Blank Do not round For example, if the calculated requirements for an item are 4.6 and this field has an R, the system rounds the quantity required to 5. If the calculated requirements are 4.4, the system rounds to 4.

Planning Fence

The number of days that the system uses in conjunction with the time fence rule to determine how the forecast is used. Enter the number of days from the start date, after which the time fence rule changes from the first rule to the second rule. For example, if the time fence rule is S (customer demand before the time fence, forecast after the time fence), and the planning time fence is 5 days, the system plans for the first 5 days using customer demand. After the fifth day, the system plans using the forecast.

Freeze Fence

The number of days from the generation start date within which the system should not generate order messages. For example, if the generation start date is 01/01/99, and the freeze time fence is 6 days, the planning system does not issue messages with dates less than or equal to 01/07/99.

Message Display Fence

The number of days after the generation start date that the system should not generate order messages. For example, if the generation start date is 01/01/99, and the message time fence is 60 days, the system does not issue messages with dates greater than or equal to 03/01/99. However, the planning horizon for orders continues past this date and is reflected in available to promise totals.

MFG Leadtime Quantity

The quantity that determines the leadtime level for a manufactured item. Each of the routing steps for the item are extended by this quantity. For the system to calculate the leadtime level, the quantity in this field must be a value other than zero. A code that determines whether the system uses fixed or variable leadtimes. This code works in conjunction with the value from either the Level Leadtime field or the Leadtime Per Unit field. Valid codes are: F Fixed leadtime The system calculates work order start dates using the value from the Leadtime Level field. V Variable leadtime The system calculates work order start dates using the value from the Leadtime Per Unit field.

Fixed/Variable

230

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Item Master Information

Field Leadtime Level

Explanation The leadtime for an item at its assigned level in the production process as defined on Plant Manufacturing Data. The system uses this value to calculate the start dates for work orders using fixed leadtimes. Level leadtime is different for purchased and manufactured items: Purchased The number of calendar days required for the item to arrive at your branch/plant after the supplier receives your purchase order. Manufactured The number of workdays required to complete the fabrication or assembly of an item once all the components are available. You can enter level leadtime manually on Manufacturing Values Entry, or you can let the Leadtime Rollup program calculate it. To calculate level leadtime using the Leadtime Rollup program, you must first enter a quantity in the Manufacturing Leadtime Quantity field in the Item Branch table (F4102).

Leadtime Manufacturing

The total number of days required to build an item from its lowest level components to the final assembly. This value is the total of the level leadtimes for all manufactured items, plus the highest manufacturing leadtime for all its components. If all components are purchased, the manufacturing leadtime equals the items level leadtime. Purchased item leadtimes are not included in the calculation of manufacturing leadtimes. You can enter the manufacturing leadtime manually or you can have the system calculate it when you run the Leadtime Rollup program.

Leadtime Cumulative

The total number of days required to build an item from its lowest level components to the final assembly. The system calculates the value differently for manufactured and purchased items. Manufactured The total of all level leadtimes for all manufactured items, plus the highest cumulative leadtime of all its components. Purchased The items level leadtime. Purchased item leadtimes are included in the calculation of cumulative leadtimes. You can enter this value manually or you can have the system calculate it when you run the Leadtime Rollup program.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

231

Inventory Management

Field Leadtime Per Unit

Explanation The total number of hours required to build one unit as specified on the routing. This value is factored by the time basis code. You can enter this value manually, or you can have the system calculate it when you run the Leadtime Rollup program. The system overwrites this value when you run the Leadtime Rollup program. The system uses this field to calculate start dates for work orders when you use variable leadtimes.

Issue Type Code

A code that defines how each component in the bill of material is issued from stock. In shop floor control, it indicates how a part is issued to a work order. Valid codes are: I Manual issue (default) F Floor stock (no issue) B Backflush (when part is reported as complete) P Preflush (when parts list is generated) U Super backflush (at pay-point operation) S Sub-contract item (send to supplier) Blank Shippable end item You can issue a component in more than one way within a specific branch/plant by using a different code on the bill of material and work order parts list. The bill of material code overrides the branch/plant value.

Drawing Size

A code that represents the engineering drawing size. For example: A A-size drawing D D-size drawing This number is a subset to the drawing number. It provides an additional description of the drawing and is useful should the system use an engineering drawing as a reference for this item. An engineering drawing number that might be the same as the part or item number.

Last Revision No.

Drawing Number

Entering Item Grade and Potency Information

After you enter item master information or item branch/plant information, you specify whether grade or potency applies to an item. Grades enable you to classify items (for example, grade A eggs and grade B eggs). Potency allows you to specify the active ingredient in a product (for example, the percentage of alcohol in liquor). When you activate grade or potency control for an item, you can enter a standard grade or potency for the item and a range of acceptable values. If you receive or issue items that are not within the range, the system provides a warning message. You cannot perform sales on items that are not within the range.

232

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Item Master Information

Item grade and potency are applicable only to items that are produced in lots. You cannot use both grade control and potency control for the same item. To enter item grade and potency information

On Item Master Information 1. Access Manufacturing Values Entry. 2. On Manufacturing Values Entry, complete the following fields: Grade/Potency Pricing Potency Control Standard Potency From Potency Thru Potency Grade Control Standard Grade From Grade Thru Grade

Field Grade/Potency Pricing

Explanation A code that indicates if you price the item by grade or potency range. You must control the item by grade to price it by grade. Likewise, you must control the item by potency to price it by potency. Valid values are: Blank No potency or grade pricing 1 Potency pricing 2 Grade pricing A code that indicates whether you control the item by potency. The percentage of active ingredients normally found in an item. A number that indicates the minimum potency, or percentage of active ingredients, acceptable for an item. The system displays a warning message if you try to purchase or issue items that fall below the minimum acceptable potency. The system does not allow you to sell items that fall below the minimum acceptable potency.

Potency Control Standard Potency From Potency

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

233

Inventory Management

Field Thru Potency

Explanation A number that indicates the maximum potency, or percentage of active ingredients, acceptable for an item. The system displays a warning message if you try to purchase or issue items that have a potency above the maximum potency acceptable. The system does not allow you to sell items that have a potency above the maximum potency acceptable.

Grade Control Standard Grade From Grade

A code that indicates whether you control the item by grade. A code (table 40/LG) that represents the normal grade for an item. A code (system 40, type LG) that indicates the minimum grade acceptable for an item. The system displays a warning message if you try to purchase or issue items that have a grade below the minimum grade acceptable. The system does not allow you to sell items that have a grade below the minimum acceptable level.

Thru Grade

A code (system 40, type LG) that indicates the maximum grade acceptable for an item. The system displays a warning message if you try to purchase or issue items that have a grade above the maximum grade acceptable. The system does not allow you to sell items that have a grade above the maximum grade acceptable.

What You Should Know About

Lots You can specify the grade or potency of all items in a specific lot on Lot Master Revisions. If you do not specify a grade or potency, the system uses the standard grade or potency from Item Master or Item Branch Information. You can specify an acceptable grade or potency range for each of your customers using preference profiles. For more information, see Setting Up Preference Profiles in the Sales Order Management Guide.

Grade and potency ranges for sales purposes

See Also
Enter Information for Lots (P4108) for information about specifying grade and potency values for lots

234

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Item Master Information

Processing Options for Item Master Information Revisions

Default Values : 1. Primary Unit of Measure (Blanks=EA) 2. Weight Unit of Measure (Blanks=LB) Process Control : 3. Specify the from and thru dates to be used for effective dates in the Item Notes File : From Date (Blank = System date) Thru Date (Blank = 12/31 with the year = to the default value for the data dictionary item Century Change Year (#CYR)) 4. Enter a 1 for each additional Item Master information screen to display when performing an add or change. If blank, the screen will not display. Classification Codes. . . . . . Cost Revisions (Conditional). . Price Revisions (Conditional) . Units & Measures. . . . . . . . Manufacturing Values. . . . . . Bulk Product Information. . . . 5. Enter a 1 to use the window version of the screens selected above. If left blank, the full screen versions will be displayed. 6. Enter a 1 to automatically call the Item Branch Program (P41026) when adding a new item number and return to the Item Master Screen. Enter a 2 to call the Item Branch program automatically and remain on the Item Branch Screen. If left blank, the Item Branch Program will not be called. Global Update: 7. Enter a 1 to transfer changes made to the 2nd (LITM) and the 3rd (AITM) item numbers to the Item Branch (F4102) item records. (F19 from Item Master Revisions allows you to update other files). or Enter a 2 to transfer changes to records in the selected files (see User Defined Codes 40/IC). Press F1 to display the selected files. ____________ ____________

____________ ____________

____________

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

235

Inventory Management

Dream Writer Versions: Enter the version to be used for each program. If left blank, ZJDE0001 is used. 8. Item Availability (P41202) 9. Item Branch (P41026)

____________ ____________

236

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Branch/Plant Information

G41

Inventory Management Choose Inventory Master/ Transactions

G4111

Inventory Master/Transactions Choose Item Branch/Plant Information

Entering Branch/Plant Information

Information about an item might differ from warehouse to warehouse. For example, taxes might be applicable to an item in one warehouse, but not in another. You might also have different quantity requirements for each item based on the warehouse. After you enter master information for an item, you can assign the item to different warehouses or branch/plants. You can then customize the item master information for each branch/plant. You can also specify the locations in the branch/plant in which the item is stored. Item A Item A Master Informatio n Item A Information for Branch 20 Information for Branch 10

Every J.D. Edwards system that retrieves item information searches for an items branch/plant information before using an items master information.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

237

Inventory Management

You can enter item information for a single branch/plant or copy existing item information and duplicate it for multiple branch/plants.

Item A Information Branch 10

Branch 20

Branch 30

Branch 40

To enter item branch/plant information, complete the following tasks: - Assign an item to a branch/plant - Work with item locations - Enter item tax information (optional) - Locate item sources (optional) - Enter item reorder quantities (optional) - Enter item manufacturing information (optional) - Duplicate item information for multiple branch/plants (optional) After you enter item information for a specific branch/plant, the system creates a record in the Item Branch table (F4102).

238

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Branch/Plant Information

What You Should Know About

Default values Most fields on Item Branch/Plant Information are identical to those on Item Master Information. The system uses the default values from Item Master Information. The only fields that do not exist on Item Master Information are: Branch/Plant Sales Taxable Purchasing Taxable Country of Origin Supplier Margin Maintenance (%) Accessing other branch/plant information Use processing options to specify that other item information displays subsequent to item branch/plant information, such as item unit of measure defaults.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

239

Inventory Management

Assigning an Item to a Branch/Plant

After you enter master information for an item, you must assign the item to a specific branch/plant. After assigning the branch/plant, you can locate the item and branch/plant to customize the master information. To assign an item to a branch/plant

On Item Branch/Plant Information Complete the following fields: Branch/Plant Item Number

Field Branch/Plant

Explanation A code that identifies a separate entity within a business for which you want to track items and costs. This entity might be a warehouse location, job, project, work center, or branch/plant. The Business Unit field is alphanumeric. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This is the branch/plant or warehouse to which this item information is applicable.

Working with Item Locations

After you assign an item to a branch/plant, you can indicate multiple locations in which the item resides. For each branch/plant, you can assign: A primary location Multiple secondary locations The system usually processes an item through its primary location. For example, when you receive an item, the system assigns the item to its primary location, unless you specify a secondary location. The system prompts you for the primary location immediately after you assign an item to a branch/plant. You can assign secondary locations to an item when you enter branch/plant information. The system automatically assigns a secondary location if you enter a location other than the primary location for an item when you receive it.

240

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Branch/Plant Information

If you specify location control on System Constants, you can assign an item to only those locations set up on Branch/Plant Location Master. If you do not specify location control, you can assign an item to any location. Each time you enter a location for an item, the system creates a record in the Item Location table (F41021). In addition to assigning locations to an item and branch/plant, you can assign multiple lot numbers to each location. You can enter lot numbers manually when you enter item locations or when you receive the items. Complete the following tasks: Assign a primary location to an item Change the primary location for an item Assign secondary locations to items

See Also
Entering Information for Lots (P4108) for information about defining lot details Working with Lot Statuses (P00051) for information about putting lots and locations on hold To assign a primary location to an item

On Item Branch/Plant Information 1. Assign a branch/plant to an item.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

241

Inventory Management

2. On Primary Location, complete the following fields: Location Lot To change the primary location for an item

On Item Branch/Plant Information 1. Access Item/Location Information.

2. On Item/Location Information, enter P in the following field to identify the primary (P) location for the item: P/S (Primary/Secondary Location) 3. Access Primary Location. 4. On Primary Location, complete the following fields: Location Lot 5. Return to Item/Location Information. 6. On Item/Location Information, complete the following field: P/S (Primary/Secondary Location)

242

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Branch/Plant Information

To assign secondary locations to an item

On Item Branch/Plant Information 1. Access Item/Location Information.

1. On Item/Location Information, enter S in the following field to identify the secondary (S) locations for an item: P/S (Primary/Secondary Location) 2. Complete the following fields for each secondary location and lot: Location Lot Lot Status

Field Location

Explanation A code that identifies inventory locations in a branch/plant. You define the format of the location identifier by branch/plant (P410012). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you do not specify a location in this field, the system uses the blank location set up for the branch/plant in Branch/Plant Location Master.

Lot

A number that identifies a lot or a serial number. A lot is a group of items with similar characteristics.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

243

Inventory Management

Field Primary Location (P/S)

Explanation A value that indicates if this is the primary or secondary location for this item within this stocking location. Valid values are: P Primary storage location S Secondary storage location NOTE: You can only have one storage are within each branch or warehouse marked as primary. In some cases, the system uses the primary storage area as the default.

Lot Status

A user defined code (table 41/L) that indicates the status of the lot. If this field is blank, it indicates that the lot is approved. All other codes indicate that the lot is on hold. You can assign a different status code to each location in which a lot resides on Item/Location Information or Location Lot Status Change.

What You Should Know About

Changing a primary location If you change an items primary location and any of the following quantities exist, the quantities transfer to the new primary location: Quantity on backorder Quantity on purchase order Quantity on work order Other purchasing 1 Quantity on soft commit After you change the primary location for an item, the previous primary location becomes a secondary location. Deleting a primary location To delete a primary location you must first change it to a secondary location. No quantities can exist in the locations that you delete.

244

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Branch/Plant Information

Entering Item Tax Information

You must specify whether an item is subject to tax to have the system calculate taxes for purchases and sales. You specify tax information for an item when you enter branch/plant information. To enter tax information

On Item Branch/Plant Information Complete the following fields: Sales Taxable Purchasing Taxable

Field Sales Taxable

Explanation A code that indicates whether the item is subject to sales tax when you sell it. The system calculates tax on the item only if the customer is also taxable. A code that indicates whether the item is subject to sales tax when you purchase it. The system calculates tax on the item only if the supplier is also taxable.

Purchasing Taxable

Locating Item Sources

You can locate the country in which an item originates and the preferred supplier for an item. Locating these sources allows you to distinguish items based on a country or supplier. You specify this information when you enter branch/plant information for an item. To locate item sources

On Item Branch/Plant Information Complete the following fields: Country of Origin Supplier

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

245

Inventory Management

Field Country of Origin

Explanation A code (system 00/type CN) that identifies the country in which the item originates. This is useful for organizations who must periodically separate their inventory by source. The address book number of the preferred provider of this item. You can enter the number for the supplier or you can have the system enter it each time that you receive the item from a supplier. You specify whether the system enters the supplier using processing options for Enter Receipts.

Supplier

Entering Item Reorder Quantities

You can specify the minimum, maximum, and normal reorder quantities for an item during your entry of branch/plant information. You can also specify the level of stock at which reordering takes place. The system uses these values for the Enterprise Requirements Planning and Execution system. To enter reorder quantities

On Item Branch/Plant Information 1. Access Item Branch Quantities.

246

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Branch/Plant Information

2. On Item Branch Quantities, complete the following fields: Reorder Quantity Maximum Reorder Qty Minimum Reorder Qty Reorder Point Multiple Order Qty Units Per Container Safety Stock

Field Reorder Quantity

Explanation The estimated reorder quantity for an item. You can enter this quantity if there is not enough sales history available for the system to accurately calculate a reorder quantity. The maximum order quantity for an item. You can base the quantity on factors other than usage, such as perishability, storage capacity, and so forth. The minimum order quantity for an item. You can base the quantity on factors other than usage, such as perishability, storage capacity, and so forth. A quantity for an item that specifies when replenishment occurs. Typically, this occurs when the total quantity on hand plus the quantity on order fall to, or below a specified quantity. You can enter this quantity or the system can calculate it if there is sufficient sales history. If there is no safety stock quantity defined, the system first calculates the safety stock by multiplying the square root of the average leadtime quantity. Then, the system adds the calculated safety stock quantity to the average leadtime quantity to determine the reorder point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Define the quantity that specifies when replenishment occurs. If this field is left blank, the system calculates the replenishment quantity by adding the safety stock quantity (defined in the Item Location table (F41021) to the average leadtime quantity.

Maximum Reorder Quantity

Minimum Reorder Quantity

Reorder Point

Multiple Order Quantity

A multiple for rounding up planned order quantities in MPS/MRP. The system rounds up the planned order quantity to the nearest multiple you enter in this field.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

247

Inventory Management

Field

Explanation

Shipping Units Per Container The standard quantity of containers that move through the manufacturing process (typically used in a repetitive manufacturing environment). The quantity you enter determines the number of bar code labels that you need for shipping and it will also modify order release quantities. Safety Stock The quantity of stock kept on hand to cover high-side variations in demand.

Entering Item Manufacturing Information

You can define manufacturing information for an item that is specific to each branch/plant. This information includes:

Requirements planning information Leadtime information

You enter information about inventory shrinkage for the item to plan for the quantity you need to replace due to shrinkage. You enter leadtime information to calculate the time frames that are necessary to assemble or manufacture an item. You enter reference information about the drawing plans for an item, so that you can refer back to the plans.

Engineering information

Complete the following tasks: Enter requirements planning information Enter leadtime information Enter engineering information

What You Should Know About

Default values Most of the items on Plant Manufacturing Data are identical to those on Manufacturing Values Entry. The system uses the default values from Manufacturing Values Entry.

248

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Branch/Plant Information

To enter requirements planning information

On Item Branch/Plant Information 1. Access Plant Manufacturing Data. 2. On Plant Manufacturing Data, complete the following fields: Shrink Factor Shrink Factor Method To enter leadtime information

On Item Branch/Plant Information 1. Access Plant Manufacturing Data. 2. On Plant Manufacturing Data, complete the following fields: Time Basis Queue Hours Standard Setup Hours

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

249

Inventory Management

To enter engineering information

On Item Branch/Plant Information 1. Access Plant Manufacturing Data. 2. On Plant Manufacturing Data, complete the following fields: ECO Reason ECO Number ECO Date Item Revision Level

Field Shrink Factor

Explanation A fixed quantity or percentage that the system uses to determine inventory shrinkage for an item. The system increases the planned order quantity by this amount in MPS/MRP/DRP generation. The shrink factor method you specify for the item determines whether the shrink factor is a percentage or a fixed quantity. If you are entering a percentage, enter 5% as 5.00 and 50% as 50.00.

Shrink Factor Method

A value that determines whether the shrink factor you enter for this item is a percentage or a fixed quantity. Valid values are: % Percentage of order or requested quantity F Fixed amount to be added to quantity A user defined code (system 30, type TB) that identifies the time basis or rate to be used for machine or labor hours entered for any routing step. You can set rates per unit, per 10, per 1000, and so on. The system uses the values in the Description-2 field on the User Defined Codes form for costing and scheduling calculations. The Description field is a description of what the code represents, but is not used in calculations.

Time Basis Code

Queue Hours

The time (in hours) that an order is expected to be in the queue while waiting to be processed through the work center. The system stores this value in the Item Branch table (F4102). This value is calculated by the Leadtime Rollup program (P30822) or you can enter it manually. When you run the Leadtime Rollup program, the system overrides manual entries with calculated values.

Standard Setup Hours

The standard setup hours you expect to incur in the normal completion of this item.

250

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Branch/Plant Information

Field ECO Reason ECO Number ECO Date Item Revision Level

Explanation A code (table 40/CR) that identifies the reason for the engineering change order. The number assigned to an engineering change order. The date of the engineering change order. The revision level for an item. If you enter a revision level in this field, verify that the revision level of the routing for an item matches the revision level on the bill of material for the item.

Duplicating Item Information for Multiple Branch/Plants

G41 Inventory Management Enter 27

G4131

Inventory Advanced & Technical Operations Choose Item/Branch Duplication

You might have items for which the same information applies across multiple branch/plants. You can enter item information for one branch/plant and then duplicate that information for up to ten other branch/plants by doing the following: Use Item Branch Duplication to select individual items for duplication Use the Item Branch Duplication DREAM Writer program to define criteria for items that you want to duplicate For both batch procedures, you use processing options to specify the branches for which you are duplicating information. You can also specify additional information to duplicate, such as costs, prices, units of measure, and so on. If you use Item Branch Duplication to select individual items for duplication, you can set processing options to display up to four search fields that allow you to locate items for a particular branch/plant.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

251

Inventory Management

To duplicate item information for multiple branch/plants

On Item/Branch Duplication

1. To specify the branch/plant from which you are duplicating information, complete the following field: Branch Plant 2. Enter search criteria to locate the appropriate items. 3. Select the appropriate items to duplicate. 4. Exit the screen to activate the batch job.

What You Should Know About

Primary locations The system does not duplicate the primary location for an item. The system uses the blank location that you have set up for the branch/plant to which you are duplicating information. For information about blank locations for branch/plants, see Setting Up Warehouse Locations.

252

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Branch/Plant Information

Processing Options for Item Branch Information Revisions

Process Control: 1. Enter a 1 to select the Item Balance information screens to automatically call when performing an add or a change. If left blank, screen will not display. Classification Codes. . . . . . Cost Revisions (conditional). . Price Revisions (conditional) . Unit of Measure . . . . . . . . Quantities. . . . . . . . . . . Manufacturing Values. . . . . . Item Profile. . . . . . . . . . Bulk Product Information. . . . 2. Enter a 1 to use the window version of the screens selected above. If left blank, the full screen versions will be displayed. Dream Writer Versions: 3. Summary Availability (P41202) 4. Item / Location Information (P41024) 5. Test / Specification Revisions (P3710)

Processing Options for Item/Branch Duplication

Default Values: 1. Enter the branch/plants to which you want to duplicate the items: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) Screen Defaults: 2. Enter the data selection fields you want displayed on the video (Enter the data dictionary field name.): Data Data Data Data 3. Item Item Item Item One Two Three Four ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________

____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________

Enter a 1 to pre-load all selection options with a 1 to duplicate those lines.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

253

Inventory Management

File Updates: 4. Enter a 1 next to each file to duplicate. If left blank, the file will not be duplicated: Cost Ledger File Base Price File UOM Conversion Factors Bulk Depot/Product Info. Warehouse Item Profile Warehouse Item UOM/Profile (F4105) (F4106) (F41002) (F41022) (F46010) (F46011) ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________

Processing Options for Item/Branch Duplication Batch Selection

Update Options: 1. Enter the branch/plants to which you want to duplicate the items: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 2. Enter a 1 next to each file to duplicate. If left blank, the file will not be duplicated. Cost Ledger File Base Price File UOM Conversion Factors Bulk Depot/Product Info. Warehouse Item Profile Warehouse Item/UOM Profile (F4105) (F4106) (F41002) (F41022) (F46010) (F46011) ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________

____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________

254

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Item Cost Information

G41

Inventory Management Choose Inventory Master/ Transactions

G4111

Inventory Master/Transactions Choose Item Master Information

Entering Item Cost Information

You must provide item cost information for the system to track inventory costs. This information determines: Whether the system maintains one overall cost for the item or a different cost for each branch/plant Which cost method the system uses to track inventory costs Which cost method the system uses for purchase orders You can also add prorated setup costs for manufacturing. For each cost method you assign to an item, you must also specify a cost. For example, to use the last-in, first-out (LIFO) cost method for an item, you must enter an initial cost for that cost method. The system updates the LIFO cost based on the cost of the item as of the last receipt date. Complete the following tasks: - Assign a cost level to an item - Assign a cost method to an item - Enter item costs - Enter manufacturing setup cost information

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

255

Inventory Management

The system stores inventory cost records in the Cost Ledger table (F4105).

See Also
Updating Costs for an Item Across Multiple Branch/Plants (P4105) Updating Costs for Multiple Items Across Multiple Branch/Plants (P41802) Updating Weighted Average Costs for Items (P41051) Updating Current Item Costs to Future Costs (P41052)

Assigning a Cost Level to an Item

You determine whether the system maintains one overall cost for an item or a different cost for each branch/plant. The system can also maintain a different cost for each location and lot within a branch/plant. The cost level that you assign to an item indicates the level at which the system maintains costs. You can also indicate from which table the system is to retrieve a cost for an item when you enter a purchase order. The purchase price level you specify for an item indicates which of the following costs to use: The inventory cost for the item, which the system stores in the Cost Ledger table (F4105) The supplier's cost for the item, if supplier costs are set up in the Purchase Price table (F41061) To assign item cost levels

On Item Master Information Complete the following fields: Inventory Cost Level Purchase Price Level

256

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Item Cost Information

Field Inventory Cost Level

Explanation A code that indicates whether the system maintains one overall inventory cost for the item, a different cost for each branch/plant, or a different cost for each location and lot within a branch/plant. The system maintains inventory costs in the Inventory Cost table (F4105). Valid codes are: 1 Item level 2 Item/Branch level 3 Item/Branch/Location level

Purchase Price Level

A code that indicates where to retrieve the purchase price for an item when you enter a purchase order. Valid codes are: 1 Use the supplier/item price from the Purchase Price table (F41061). 2 Use the supplier/item/branch price from the Purchase Price table (F41061). 3 Use the inventory cost from the Inventory Cost table (F4105). This cost is based on the inventory cost level and the purchasing cost method you specify for the item. The first two codes are applicable only if you set up supplier costs in the Purchase Order Management system. If you do not set up supplier costs, the system uses the inventory cost as the default for the purchase order.

What You Should Know About

Changing an items cost level To change an items cost level after you have entered costs, you must use Item Cost Level Conversion. For more information, see Converting Cost Levels. Locating an item to assign cost methods and costs The cost level you enter for an item determines how you locate the item to assign cost methods and enter item costs. For example, you locate the item based on: The item The item and branch/plant The item, branch/plant, and location

See Also
Defining Supplier Prices and Pricing Structures (P41061) in the Purchase Management Guide

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

257

Inventory Management

Assigning a Cost Method to an Item

You must specify the cost method that the system uses to determine an items cost for: Sales and costs of goods sold Purchase orders For example, you can use the weighted average cost method to determine the cost of goods sold for an item, and the LIFO cost method to determine the items unit cost for purchase orders. The system provides eight predefined cost methods. You can define your own cost methods with user defined codes. You can enter cost methods for items when you enter either item master information or item branch information. To assign cost methods to an item

On Item Master Information 1. Access Cost Revisions.

2. On Cost Revisions, complete the following fields: Sales/Inventory Purchasing

258

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Item Cost Information

Field

Explanation

Sales/Inventory Cost Method A code (table 40/CM) that indicates the cost method the system uses to calculate the cost of goods sold for the item. Cost methods 01-08 are hard-coded. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you maintain costs at the item level, the system retrieves the default for this field from the data dictionary. If you maintain costs at the item and branch/plant level, the system retrieves the default from Branch/Plant Constants. Purchasing Cost Method A code (table 40/CM) that indicates the cost method the system uses to determine the cost of the item for purchase orders. Cost methods 01-08 are hard coded. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you maintain costs at the item level, the system retrieves the default for this field from the data dictionary. If you maintain costs at the item and branch/plant level, the system retrieves the default from Branch/Plant Constants.

What You Should Know About

Assigning a cost method without specifying a cost If you do not enter an item cost for the cost methods you assign to sales, inventory, or purchasing, the system displays a warning message. If you ignore the warning, the system assigns a zero cost for the cost method. J.D. Edwards reserves cost methods 01 19. For more information, see Setting Up Item Costs in Product Costing and Manufacturing Accounting.

Reserved cost methods

Entering Item Costs

You establish costs for an item by entering an amount for each cost method. When you review costs for the item, the system displays only those methods for which you entered an amount.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

259

Inventory Management

To enter item costs

On Item Master Information 1. Access Cost Revisions. 2. On Cost Revisions, complete the following field for each applicable cost method: Unit Cost

Field Unit Cost

Explanation The amount per unit (the total cost divided by the unit quantity). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The cost for one unit of this item, based on the corresponding cost method.

What You Should Know About

Changing unit costs You can change the amount for any cost method at any time. For example, if you change the amount for the cost method that you use to track costs of goods sold, the system applies the new amount to your on-hand quantity of the item. It also creates journal entries to record the difference between the old and the new amounts. Certain programs update the amount for cost methods 01-08. For example, the system updates last-in and weighted average amounts as follows: Last-in The system interactively updates this amount based on the last cost of the item at the time of receipt or after an inventory adjustment. Weighted Average The system calculates and updates this amount by adding transaction quantities together, adding transaction costs together, and dividing the total cost by the total quantity. Also, the system updates the following costs: Last-in, Purchasing, and Lot the Receipts program updates these costs. Purchasing the Voucher Match program updates this cost. If you create additional cost methods, you must update their amounts manually.

Updating unit costs

260

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Item Cost Information

Deleting a cost method

You can delete a cost method for an item if it is no longer applicable. If you try to delete your sales, inventory, or purchasing cost method, the system displays a warning message. The system does not delete the cost method, but updates it to a zero cost.

Entering Manufacturing Setup Cost Information

If you use J.D. Edwards Manufacturing systems, you can prorate setup costs for an item based on the quantity of the item that you plan to produce. To enter manufacturing setup cost information

On Item Master Information 1. Access Manufacturing Values Entry. 2. On Manufacturing Values Entry, complete the following field: Accounting Cost Qty

Field Accounting Cost Quantity

Explanation An amount the system uses in the cost rollup program to determine the allocation of setup costs. The system totals the setup costs and divides the sum by this quantity to determine a unit setup cost. The default is 1.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

261

Inventory Management

262

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Sales Price Information

G41

Inventory Management Choose Inventory Master/ Transactions

G4111

Inventory Master/Transactions Choose Item Master Information

Entering Sales Price Information

If you use the Sales Order Management system in conjunction with the Inventory Management system, you must provide sales price information for each of your items. You can have a different sales price for each unit of measure and currency in which you sell an item. You can also specify the effective dates for each sales price. During your entry of sales price information, you can specify that the system maintain overall prices for an item or different prices for each branch/plant. You can also assign items to price groups to which the system applies discounts. Complete the following tasks: - Assign price levels to an item - Assign price groups to an item - Enter item prices The system stores sales prices in the Price table (F4106).

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

263

Inventory Management

Assigning Price Levels to an Item

You determine whether the system maintains overall sales prices for an item, or different prices for each branch/plant. The system can also maintain different prices for each location and lot within a branch/plant. The sales price level that you assign to an item indicates the level at which the system maintains prices. You can also specify how the system calculates the sales price for a kit item. You can have the system add prices for all components that make up the kit, or you can use one price for the entire kit. To assign price levels to an item

On Item Master Information Complete the following fields: Sales Price Level Kit Pricing Method

Field Sales Price Level

Explanation A code that indicates whether the system maintains standard sales prices for an item, different sales prices for each branch/plant, or different sales prices for each location and lot within a branch/plant. The system maintains sales prices in the Base Price file (F4106). Valid codes are: 1 Item level 2 Item/Branch level 3 Item/Branch/Location level A code that indicates how the system determines the sales price of a kit or configured item. Valid codes are: 1 The system totals list prices of components to determine the kit or product family price. 2 The list price of the final kit. This is the kit or product family price from the Base Price file (F4106). 3 The price inclusion rules for the product family determine the product family price (for configured items only). 4 The kit or product family price is the sum of the components discounted prices. There is no discount on the parent.

Kit Pricing Method

264

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Sales Price Information

What You Should Know About

Changing price levels To change an items price level after you have entered prices, you must use Sales Price Level Conversion. For more information, see Converting Sales Price Levels in the Sales Order Management Guide. Locating an item to enter prices The cost level that you enter for an item determines how you locate the item to assign cost methods and enter item costs. For example, you locate the item based on: The item The item and branch/plant The item, branch/plant, and location

See Also
Entering Bills of Material (P3002) for information about setting up kits

Assigning Price Groups to an Item

You can assign items with similar characteristics to a price group. After you assign an item to a price group, the price discounts and markups that you have defined for the group in the Sales Order Management system apply to the item. You can assign price groups to items on Item Master Information or Item Branch/Plant Information. To assign price groups

On Item Master Information Complete the following fields: Item Price Group Basket Reprice Group Order Reprice Group

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

265

Inventory Management

Field Item Price Group

Explanation A user defined code (system 40/type PI) that identifies an inventory price group for an item. Inventory price groups have unique pricing structures that direct the system to incorporate discounts or markups on items on sales and purchase orders. The discounts or markups are based on the quantity, dollar amount, or weight of the item ordered. When you assign a price group to an item, the item takes on the same pricing structure defined for the inventory price group. You must assign an inventory price group to the supplier or customer, as well as to the item, for the system to interactively calculate discounts and markups on sales orders and purchase orders.

Basket Reprice Group

A code (table 40/PI) that identifies a price group for an item. Basket reprice groups have unique pricing structures that direct the system to incorporate discounts or markups for items on sales orders. The discounts or markups are based on the quantity, dollar amount, or weight of the item ordered. When you run the Standard Order/Basket Reprice program, the system identifies ordered items that belong to a common basket reprice group and implements the appropriate discounts or markups to the cost of each item.

Order Reprice Group

A code (table 40/PI) that identifies a price group for an item. Order reprice groups have unique pricing structures that direct the system to incorporate discounts or markups for items on sales orders. The discounts or markups are based on the item quantity, dollar amount, or weight on the sales order as a whole. When you run the Standard Order/Basket Reprice procedure, the system identifies ordered items that belong to a common order reprice group and implements the appropriate discount as a flat dollar amount in a new discount line for the order.

See Also
Defining Price Groups (P4271) in the Sales Order Management Guide for more information about item price groups

266

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Sales Price Information

Entering Item Prices

You enter sales prices for an item by entering an amount for the unit of measure, currency, and effective dates for which the price is applicable. To enter item prices

On Item Master Information 1. Access Base Price Revisions.

2. On Base Price Revisions, complete the following fields: UM Unit Price Effective From Effective Thru

Field Unit Price Effective From

Explanation The price that the system charges for one unit of this item. The date that a transaction, text message, contract, obligation, or preference becomes effective. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The date that this price becomes effective.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

267

Inventory Management

Field Effective Thru

Explanation The date that a transaction, text message, agreement, obligation, or preference has expired or been completed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The date that this price expires.

What You Should Know About

Specifying prices by currency You can enter a currency code for a price if you use multi-currency.

268

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Sales Price Information

Test Yourself: Item Entry

The answers to this Test Yourself exercise are in Appendix B. 1. What is the number of the Item Master Information table? ____________________________________________________________

2. How many methods does J.D. Edwards provide to identify a single item? ____________________________________________________________

3. Identify two methods for setting up unit of measure designations for items. ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

4. In which four locations can you specify whether backorders are allowed? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

5. Identify three methods for setting up your cost and price information. ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

6. Identify two methods for setting up conversion information for units of measure. ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

269

Inventory Management

7. What are the numbers for the following tables? Branch/Plant Information Location Balances Cost table Price table ________ ________ ________ ________

8. How many cost methods can you set up? ____________________________________________________________

9. How many secondary locations can you set up for an item? ____________________________________________________________

10. How can you duplicate the items and locations for a branch/plant to other branch/plants? ____________________________________________________________

270

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Transactions
Objectives
To recognize each of the transactions that you use to move and track inventory To perform inventory transactions To review transaction records

About Inventory Transactions

Inventory transactions help you manage the complex recording and accounting functions that are involved in moving inventory into and out of locations. For example, you can use the issue transaction to remove damaged or obsolete goods from your inventory. Or, you might use the transfer transaction to move inventory from one branch/plant to another. After you move inventory by issuing, adjusting, or transferring it, the system adjusts the quantity balance for the item and creates the appropriate general ledger entries for the transaction. You can move inventory using the following programs: Issues Adjustments Transfers When you issue inventory, you remove it from a location. When you transfer inventory, you move it from one location to another. When you adjust inventory, you move it from one location to another to reconcile a discrepancy between the number of items that are recorded at a location and the actual count.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

Issue

WAREHOUSE A
Transfer

WAREHOUSE B

How you enter transaction information depends on the item and your specific business environment. For example, you can issue, adjust, or transfer items by entering quantity, cost amount, or quantity and cost amount information. Performing transactions by the cost amount helps you accommodate variances that are due to different costing methods that are used in different branch/plants. Complete the following tasks: - Issue inventory - Adjust inventory - Transfer inventory

Adjust

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Where Does the System Record Transactions?

The system records each transaction in the Item Ledger table (F4111) and updates information in the following tables:
F4111 F4102 F41021 F0911

Item Ledger Updates transaction entries to the Cardex

Item Branch and Item Location Updates quantities at the branch, location, and lot levels

Account Ledger Updates general ledger accounts

F4108

Transaction Information File Updates

Lot Master Updates potency, grade, expiration dates, and status

Which Accounting Information Does the System Update?

The system updates the general ledger with all of the accounting information that is related to transactions using automatic accounting instructions (AAIs). AAIs direct inventory transactions to a specific account in the general ledger. AAIs are composed of a combination of values, including document type, company number, and G/L class.

What Types of Accounting Information Can I Review?

From any transaction, you can access three programs:

G/L Journal Review

Provides information on two levels: Summary or detailed batch level The summary level displays batch information by user, status, number, and entry date. The detailed level shows batch information by journal entry, such as the transaction type for the document. Individual document level The individual document level displays information for each journal entry, such as the updated account and the amount posted to the journal entry.

Journal Entries

Displays the general ledger accounts that a transaction is written to before it is posted.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

Item Ledger Inquiry

Displays all of the transactions for an item.

Before You Begin

- Verify that the following information is set up: Item and branch/plant information in the Item Branch table (F4102) and the Item Location table (F41021) General ledger accounts in the Account Master table (F0901) AAIs for distribution transactions

See Also
Setting Up Automatic Accounting Instructions for more information about the AAIs used in the Inventory Management system

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Issue Inventory

G41

Inventory Management Choose Inventory Master/ Transactions

G4111

Inventory Master/Transactions Choose Issues

Issuing Inventory
Typically, an inventory issue involves removing items from a branch/plant or location, adjusting the inventory balance, and recording the transaction in the general ledger. Occasionally, an issue involves removing the cost amounts only from an inventory record, which occurs when you devalue items. You can perform a variety of tasks that relate to issuing inventory items: Record the use of inventory items by an operating department in your company Remove obsolete or damaged goods Issue inventory to a job Charge inventory that is used in the repair or maintenance of equipment Copy a bill of materials list for an issue To issue inventory, you must enter transaction, item, and accounting information. You can also enter issue-related information for each branch/plant in which an item is stored.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

You can choose from several online formats to record and track different types of issues:

Standard format Equipment format

Issue inventory items from a branch/plant. Record inventory that is issued to a specific piece of equipment. Debit a specific general ledger account for an issue. Record the specific piece of equipment that was issued to a job and debit a specific general ledger account for an issue.

Subledger format Equipment and subledger format

You can choose alternate formats and default values in the processing options. Cost and lot information might not display, depending on how you have set up the processing options. If lot information displays, the format depends on how you have set up duplicate lot processing in System Constants. To issue inventory

On Issues

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Issue Inventory

1. To enter transaction information, complete the following fields: Branch/Plant (Business Unit) Trans. Date (Date - Order Transaction) Document Number (Document) Document Type Explanation (Explanation - Transaction) 2. To enter issue information for each branch/plant in which the item is stored, access the fold area.

3. Complete the following fields: Item Number Quantity UM Location Lot Reason Code Unit Cost (Amount - Unit Cost) Extended (Amount - Extended Cost) Equipment

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

4. To enter accounting information, complete the following fields: Account No. (Account Number - Input) G/L Date (Date - For G/L) Subledger (Subledger - G/L) Type (Subledger Type) Phase The system processes the transaction and displays a document number, document type, and the batch number for the transaction.

Field Date Order/Transaction Document (Order No., Invoice, and so on) Document Type

Explanation The date that an order was entered into the system. This date determines which effective level is used for inventory pricing. The number that identifies an original document. This can be a voucher, an invoice, unapplied cash, a journal entry number, and so on. A user defined code (system 00/type DT) that identifies the origin and purpose of the transaction. J.D. Edwards reserves several prefixes for document types, such as vouchers, invoices, receipts, and time sheets. The reserved document type prefixes for codes are: P Accounts payable documents R Accounts receivable documents T Payroll documents I Inventory documents O Order processing documents J General ledger/joint interest billing documents The system creates offsetting entries as appropriate for these document types when you post batches.

Explanation Transaction

This text identifies the reason that a transaction occurred. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A specific explanation for a particular issue. If you leave this field blank, the system automatically supplies this explanation from the descriptions associated with the document type you specified.

Reason Code

A user defined code (system 42/type RC) that explains the purpose for a transaction. For example, you can use a code to indicate a transaction that involves returned items, such as goods that were damaged in shipment or the overshipment of goods. The amount per unit (the total cost divided by the unit quantity).

Amount Unit Cost

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Issue Inventory

Field Amount Extended Cost

Explanation For accounts receivable and accounts payable, this is the invoice (gross) amount. For sales orders and purchase orders, this is the unit cost times the number of units. A field that identifies an account in the general ledger. You can use one of the following formats for account numbers: Structured account (business unit.object.subsidiary) 25-digit unstructured number 8-digit short account ID number Speed code The first character of the account indicates the format of the account number. You define the account format in the General Accounting Constants program (P000909).

Account Number

Equipment

An identification code for an asset that you can enter in one of the following formats: 1 Item number (a computer-assigned, 8-digit, numeric control number) 2 Unit number (a 12-character alphanumeric field) 3 Serial number (a 25-character alphanumeric field) Every asset has an item number. You can use unit number and serial number to further identify assets as needed. If this is a data entry field, the first character you enter indicates whether you are entering the primary, or default, format that is defined for your system, or one of the other two formats. A special character (such as / or *) in the first position of this field indicates which asset number format you are using. You assign special characters to asset number formats on the system constants form.

Date For G/L (and Voucher)

A date that identifies the financial period that the transaction is to be posted to. The general accounting constants specify the date range for each financial period. You can have up to 14 periods. Generally, period 14 is for audit adjustments. The system edits this field for PBCO (posted before cutoff), PYEB (prior year ending balance), and so on.

Subledger G/L

A code that identifies a detailed auxiliary account within a general ledger account. A subledger can be an equipment item number, an address book number, and so forth. If you enter a subledger, you must also specify the subledger type. A user defined code (00/ST) that is used with the Subledger field to identify the subledger type and subledger editing. On the User Defined Codes form, the second line of the description controls how the system performs editing. This is either hard-coded (as shown in the second line of description) or can be user defined. For example: A Alphanumeric field, do not edit N Numeric field, right justify and zero fill C Alphanumeric field, right justify and blank fill

Subledger Type

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

Field Phase

Explanation A user defined code (system 00, type W1) that indicates the current stage or phase of development for a work order. You can assign a work order to only one phase code at a time. NOTE: A processing option for some forms lets you enter a default value for this field, which the system displays in the appropriate fields on any work orders you create on those forms and on the Project Setup form. (You can either accept or override the default value.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In this case, the field allows you to charge inventory costs to a particular phase of a project.

What You Should Know About

Correcting errors You can correct an issue made in error by entering a reversing entry. Because records of each inventory transaction are kept for accounting purposes, you cannot delete the record. A reversal enters a positive quantity and cost amount back into the item information. In addition to a document type and batch number, the system displays a document number when you enter a transaction. Record this document number so you can locate the transaction later.

Recording document numbers

Processing Options for Inventory Issues

Default Values : 1. Document Type 2. Enter a 1 to default the Location and Lot from the Primary Location. Screen Control : 3. Enter a 1 for Equipment Based Issues, a 2 for Subledger Based Issues, or a 3 for Equipment and Subledger Issues. If left blank, the screen will default to Standard Issues. 4. Enter 1 to require an account number when Subledger Based issues are selected. Dream Writer Versions : Enter the version for each program to be used. If left blank, version ZJDE0001 will be used. ____________ ____________

Adjust Inventory

3. Complete the following fields: Item Number Quantity UM Location Reason Code Unit Cost (Amount - Unit Cost) Extended (Amount - Extended Cost) 4. To enter lot information, complete the following fields: Lot Grade (Lot Grade) Potency (Lot Potency) Lot Description (Description - Lot) Lot Exp Date (Date - Layer Expiration) Lot Status Code The system processes the transaction and displays a document number, document type, and the batch number for the transaction.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

315

Inventory Management

Field Lot Grade

Explanation This field contains the grade of a lot expressed as an alphanumeric code. The grade is used to indicate the quality of the lot. For example: A1 premium grade A2 secondary grade The grade for a lot is stored in Lot Master table (F4108).

Lot Potency

A code that indicates the potency of the lot expressed as a percentage of active or useful material (for example, the percentage of alcohol in a solution). The actual potency of a lot is defined in the Lot Master table (F4108). A brief description of a specific lot. The date that a lot of items expires. The system enters this date for you if you have specified the shelf life days for the item on Item Master Information or Item Branch/Plant Information. The system calculates the expiration date by adding the number of shelf life days to the date that you receive the item. You can commit inventory based on the lot expiration date for items. You choose how the system commits inventory for an item on Item Master Information or Item Branch/Plant Information.

Lot Description Lot Expiration

316

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Adjust Inventory

What You Should Know About

Correcting errors You can correct an adjustment that was made in error by entering a reversing entry. Because the system records each inventory transaction for accounting purposes, you cannot delete the record. A reversal enters a negative quantity and cost amount back into the item information. In addition to a document type and batch number, the system displays a document number when you enter a transaction. Record this document number so that you can locate the transaction later.

Recording document numbers

Processing Options for Inventory Adjustments

Default Values : 1. Document Type 2. Enter a 1 to default the Location and Lot from the Primary Location. When using blank secondary locations, this processing option is invalid. Dream Writer Versions : Enter the version for each program to be used. If left blank, ZJDE0001 is used. 3. Journal Entries (P09101) 4. G/L Functional Server (XT0911Z1) 5. Item Search (P41200) 6. Item Ledger (P4111) 7. Warehouse Requests (P46100) Processing Control : 8. Enter a 1 to protect costs or a 2 to make costs non-display. If left blank, the update of costs is allowed. 9. Enter a 1 to run in summary mode. G/L accounts will be summarized within each document number. If run in detail, G/L accounts will be produced for each line. 10. Enter a 1 to turn on Lot/Layering information. 11. Enter a 1 to allow adjustments to held lots. 12. Enter a 1 to allow adjustments greater than quantity available. ____________ ____________

____________

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

317

Inventory Management

13. Enter which Item Search screen is to be used to return items : 1 = Item Search window allowing the return of multiple items. 2 = Full Item Search screen with Query capabilities. (If left blank, the Item Search window allowing the return of a single item will be used.)

____________

318

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Transfer Inventory

G41

Inventory Management Choose Inventory Master/ Transactions

G4111

Inventory Master/Transactions Choose Transfers

Transferring Inventory
You can use transfer transactions to record two types of inventory movement: Between different locations in the same branch/plant Between different branch/plants An inventory transfer creates two journal entries in the general ledger. The first journal entry decreases inventory at the original location. The second entry increases inventory at the destination location. To transfer inventory, you must enter transaction and item information for both the original and destination locations. You can set up processing options to provide default values and to display cost information.

Example: Transfer Transaction

If you transfer an item that costs more at one branch/plant than at another, automatic accounting instructions (AAIs) direct the cost variance to a general ledger account. In this example, an item that costs 25.50 is transferred from Branch/Plant A to Branch/Plant B, where it costs 25.00. This creates a credit of 25.50 to Branch/Plant A, a debit of 25.00 to Branch/Plant B, and a standard cost variance of .50. The .50 difference is recorded in a variance account.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

319

Inventory Management

From Branch/Plant A Credit 25.50 (standard cost)

To Branch/Plant B Debit 25.00 (standard cost variance of .50 recorded in variance account)

The Transfers program in the Inventory Management system does not create any sales or purchase order documents. It updates only the costing method for the branch/plant. Also, it does not provide an adequate audit trail for transferring as a result of sales or purchase orders. Use this program for inventory purposes only. To transfer inventory

On Transfers

1. To enter transaction information, complete the following fields: From Branch/Plant (Business Unit) To Branch/Plant (BU for Account Duplication) Trans. Date (Date - Order Transaction) Document Number (Document) Document Type Explanation (Explanation - Transaction) G/L Date (Date - For G/L)

320

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Transfer Inventory

2. To enter transfer information for each branch/plant in which the item is stored and to create a new location and lot record at the destination location, access the fold area.

3. Complete the following fields: Item Number Quantity UM (Unit of Measure) Location (From) Lot (From) Location (To) Lot (To) Reason Code Unit Cost (Amount - Unit Cost) Extended Cost (Amount - Extended Cost) The system processes the transaction and displays a document number, document type, and the batch number for the transaction.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

321

Inventory Management

What You Should Know About

Correcting errors You can correct a transfer that was made in error by entering a reversing entry. Because the system records each inventory transaction for account purposes, you cannot delete the record. A reversal enters a positive quantity and cost back into the item information at the original location and a negative quantity and amount to the item at the destination location. If you transfer inventory from a location that results in a quantity of zero, but is still associated with an amount, the system automatically creates journal entries to the appropriate accounts to balance the amount to zero. Unlike issues and adjustments, you cannot enter additional transfers to the same document. In addition to a document type and batch number, the system displays a document number when you enter a transaction. Record this document number so that you can locate the transaction later.

Balancing for locations with no inventory

Adding transfers to the same document Recording document numbers

Processing Options for Inventory Transfers

Default Values : 1. Document Type 2. Enter a 1 to default the Location and Lot from the Primary for the FROM location. 3. Enter a 1 to default the Location and Lot from the Primary for the TO location. NOTE when using blank secondary locations, processing options 2 and 3 are invalid. Dream Writer Versions : Enter the version for each program to be used. If left blank, ZJDE0001 will be used. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Journal Entries G/L Functional Server Item Search Item Ledger Warehouse Requests (P09101) (XT0911Z1) (P41200) (P4111) (P46100) ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________

Processing Control : 9. Enter a 1 to protect costs or a 2 to make costs non-display. If left blank, the update of costs is allowed.

322

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Transfer Inventory

10. Enter a 1 to run in summary mode. G/L accounts will be summarized within each document number. If run in detail, G/L accounts will be produced for each line. 11. Enter a 1 to allow transfers to and from held lots. 12. Enter a 1 to allow transfers greater than quantity available. This option will allow your inventory balance to go negative. NOTE This option invalid for serial number processing. 13. Enter which Item Search screen is to be used to return items: 1 = Item Search window allowing the return of multiple items. 2 = Full Item Search screen with Query capabilities. (If left blank, the Item Search window allowing the return of a single item will be used.)

____________

____________ ____________

____________

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

323

Inventory Management

Test Yourself: Inventory Transactions

The answers to this Test Yourself exercise are in Appendix B. 1. If you leave the Cost field blank on transaction forms, which cost does the system use for the default? ____________________________________________________________

2. What is the difference between the transaction date and the G/L Date on transaction forms? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

3. Can you delete transactions that were made in error using the delete function? ____________________________________________________________

4. Which program should you use to remove inventory quantities? Amounts? ____________________________________________________________

5. When are inventory quantity and amount balances affected when you transfer from one branch to another? ____________________________________________________________

6. What happens if there is no quantity left in a location but an amount (cost) still exists? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

324

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Item and Quantity Information

Objectives
To locate master information about an item To access both summarized and detailed information about item quantities To access information about an item's sales performance To access supply and demand information for an item To access item ledger information and locate all of the transactions for an item To understand how, when, and why you create balance forward records To understand the different types of information in each of the general ledger (G/L) reports

About Item and Quantity Information

You can accurately plan for future stocking needs by reviewing information that the system provides about both the item and the quantity. For example, you can: Quickly access information about the items that you stock Access summary and detailed information about onhand, committed, and available items Access and monitor supply and demand information to help you plan for future stocking needs Access item information about previous sales, current inventory quantities, and future receipts Review balance forward records for a specific fiscal year Reconcile inventory balances with the G/L and access detailed item transaction information Compare your inventory balances at the end of one period with the same period end for the G/L

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

To use quantity information to determine your current and future inventory needs, you must understand the following: Available versus onhand quantities The four types of commitments and how the Inventory Management system commits inventory Complete the following tasks: - Locate item information - Locate quantity information - Review supply and demand information - Review performance information - Work with transaction records

Types of Quantities and Commitments

Available quantity The number of items that you can use based on user defined calculations. You determine how the system calculates item availability by defining the factors that subtract from, or add to, the available quantity of an item. This calculation can include quantities that do not immediately affect on-hand amounts. For example, you can set up the availability calculation to subtract any quantities that are committed to sales or work orders and add any quantities that are on purchase orders or in transit. On-hand quantity The number of items that are physically in stock in the primary unit of measure. The following affect the on-hand quantity of items: Variances that are recorded following a physical inventory Daily removals, additions, or transfers of items Shipment confirmations or updated sales information Locations with lots on hold, such as items requiring inspection or placed in quarantine

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Available to promise (ATP) The number of items that are uncommitted (available for sales or distribution) until the next replenishment orders arrive. You can choose whether to use the basic method or the cumulative method to determine ATP. The basic method assumes the following: Customer demand only, such as sales orders Demand for all periods until the next replenishment order arrives, such as purchase orders Complete consumption of existing quantities during the current period, resulting in no carry-over quantities for the next period The cumulative method is a running total that is based on the following: Does not assume consumption within the current period Does not allow a negative ATP within a period, however, does allow a negative cumulative ATP

After you enter a sales order, the system commits inventory for it. At the time of order entry, you can choose the type of commitment that you want to use.

Soft commitment

When you use soft commitments, the system: Does not specify a location from where to remove inventory Uses the primary location as the default location When you use hard commitments, the system: Specifies a location from where to remove inventory Note that this occurs most frequently during shipment confirmation, but can occur at any time during the sales order process.

Hard commitment

Future commitment

When you use future commitments, the system: Uses a future date that you define for completing a sales order When you commit inventory for other quantities: Assigns inventory to different types of sales documents, such as quote and blanket orders, that do not affect availability

Other Quantity 1 and 2

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

How the System Commits Inventory

The following diagram shows how the Inventory Management system commits inventory. You can use additional commitment methods if you are using lot processing.

Primary Location

Fill Order for 125 Items

Items
1. Pulls from the primary location first

75 __ 50

2. Pulls from the secondary location with the most inventory, then from the location with the next greatest amount of inventory

Secondary Location 25 Items

Secondary Location

100

Items

System Calculations for Supply and Demand Quantities

The system uses supply and demand inclusion rules to calculate the supply and demand quantities for an item.

Sources of supply

Starting with the requested date on purchase orders, the system calculates the supply quantity from the following sources: On-hand inventory the quantity on hand less hard commitments and quantities on sales and work orders Purchase orders the quantity entered on purchase orders Manufacturing work orders the quantity entered on a work order less the quantity shipped

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Sources of demand

Starting with the requested date on sales orders, the system calculates the demand quantity from the following sources: Sales orders the quantity entered on sales orders less the quantity shipped and the quantity canceled Safety stock any quantity reserved as protection against fluctuations in demand and supply Work order requirements and parts lists starting with the requested date on sales orders, the system calculates the demand quantity for sources such as the quantity required less the quantity issued

Reconcile Item Balances with the G/L

You can compare your inventory balances to the G/L at the end of a period. Because inventory transactions continue after G/L periods close, the system provides a method for you to reconcile your inventory balances to the G/L for any fiscal period. You can use this information to create the following: Summary level reports according to the G/L classification code Running balance information on Item Ledger (the Cardex) Balance forward records Integrity reports

On Item Search Complete one or more of the following fields: Search Text Item Number Branch/Plant Category Codes Language Supplier X-Ref Type Ext (External)

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

Field Search Text

Explanation A field that lets you specify how the system searches for an item. Your entry should be specific and descriptive of the item. Type the words in the order a user is likely to enter them. In single-byte environments, where computer storage space can hold only Latin-based language character sets, the system inserts the first 30 characters from the items description if you do not enter search text. In double-byte environments, where computer storage space can hold more complex language character sets (in languages such as Japanese, Chinese, and Korean), you must complete this field. It is a single-byte field that you complete with single-byte characters to phonetically represent the item description (which can be single-byte, double-byte, or both).

Category Code

A code (table 41/S1) that represents an item property type or classification, such as color, material content, or so forth. The system uses this code to sort and process like items. This field is one of ten classification categories available primarily for sales purposes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This code is a sales or purchasing category code, depending on the processing options. The asterisk (*) is the default and causes the system to select all sales codes or purchasing category codes for an item.

Language

A user defined code (system 01/type LP) that specifies a language to use in forms and printed reports. If you leave the Language field blank, the system uses the language you specify in your user profile. If you do not specify a language in your user profile, the system uses the default language for the system. Before any translations can appear, a language code must exist at either the system level or in your user profile.

Supplier

The address book number of the preferred provider of this item. You can enter the number for the supplier or you can have the system enter it each time that you receive the item from a supplier. You specify whether the system enters the supplier using processing options for Enter Receipts.

410

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Locate Item Information

Field Type CrossReference Type Code

Explanation A code (UDC table 41\DT) that identifies the type of cross-reference you have set up for this customer. The system contains examples for: 1. Substitutes 2. Replacements 3. Bar Codes 4. Customer Numbers 5. Supplier Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . You use this code in conjunction with the Item Number field and the Ext (External) field. The asterisk (*) is the default and instructs the system to select all cross-reference types for an item.

Code External (Y/N)

Code indicating whether the cross-reference items are the customer/suppliers (external) or your companys (internal). When you enter an item number for an inquiry, the system looks at the code in this field to determine what type of item number it is looking for. Valid codes are: Y Customer/supplier (external) item number N Your company (internal) item number (default)

Entering Search Text

You can only use search text to locate items that have search text information in the item master records. When you use search text, the system first searches the Word Search tables (F009141 and F00X41) for all words that contain the text that you enter. The system accesses information from the following tables:

Item Location (F41021)

The system searches for the following information: Location Lot number Lot status code The system searches for the following information: Lot Lot description Serial number Expiration date

Lot Master (F4108)

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

411

Inventory Management

Location Master (F4100)

The system searches for the following information: Picking zone Putaway zone Replenishment zone

To enter search text

On Item Search 1. Access query mode.

2. Complete the following fields: Branch/Plant Item Number

412

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Locate Item Information

What You Should Know About

Performing a wildcard search You can perform a wildcard search for both criteria or text searches by entering a partial name or description followed by an asterisk (*). For example, when you enter pen*, the system finds pen, pencil, and Pennsylvania. When you use the search criteria method, the system matches up to 12 characters in the text string. When you use the search text method, the system displays any items with text that matches any portion of the text string. Displaying category codes You can set up processing options to display sales or purchasing category codes that are applicable to items.

Processing Options for Item Search

Process Control : 1. Enter a 1 to omit item location records with no quantity available. 2. Enter a 1 to search by Purchasing Category Codes. If left blank the search will be by Sales Category Codes. ____________ ____________

415

Inventory Management

Locating Summary Quantity Information

You can access summary quantity information about each item that is based on the item number and branch/plant. You can also view the total number of items in any of the following categories: Onhand Held Hard and softcommitted Available Purchase and work orders Backorders You can locate all of the items in a specific location within a branch/plant and review detailed information for each item in the location. To locate summary quantity information

On Summary Availability

1. Complete the following fields: Branch/Plant Item Number U/M (Unit of Measure)

416

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Locate Quantity Information

S/D (Supply/Demand) From Grade Thru Grade From Potency Thru Potency 2. To locate quantity information for each location in which an item is stored, access the fold area.

3. Review the following fields: Location On Hand Committed Available On Receipt Hard Commit SO Soft Commit SO/WO Hard Commit WO Future Commit Qty on PO Qty on WO

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

417

Inventory Management

PO/WO Routing Backordered

Field Unit of Measure Purchasing

Explanation A code (table 00/UM) that identifies the unit of measure in which you usually purchase the item. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you leave this field blank, the system uses the primary unit of measure.

From Grade

A code (system 40, type LG) that indicates the minimum grade acceptable for an item. The system displays a warning message if you try to purchase or issue items that have a grade below the minimum grade acceptable. The system does not allow you to sell items that have a grade below the minimum acceptable level.

Thru Grade

From Potency

Thru Potency

A number that indicates the maximum potency, or percentage of active ingredients, acceptable for an item. The system displays a warning message if you try to purchase or issue items that have a potency above the maximum potency acceptable. The system does not allow you to sell items that have a potency above the maximum potency acceptable.

Primary Location (P/S)

A value that indicates if this is the primary or secondary location for this item within this stocking location. Valid values are: P Primary storage location S Secondary storage location NOTE: You can only have one storage are within each branch or warehouse marked as primary. In some cases, the system uses the primary storage area as the default.

Quantity on Hand Primary units

The number of units that are physically in stock. The quantity on hand displays in the primary unit of measure.

418

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Locate Quantity Information

Field Quantity Soft Committed Quantity Available

Explanation The number of units soft committed to sales orders or work orders in the primary units of measure. The quantity available can be on-hand balance minus commitments, reservations, and backorders. Availability is user defined and can be set up on Branch/Plant Constants form. The total number of items on receipt for a specific location. The total is based on the total number of items entered in the Quantity on Purchase Order Receipts and the Quantity on Work Order Receipt fields. The number of units committed to a specific location and lot. The number of units soft committed to sales orders or work orders in the primary units of measure. The number of units hard committed to work orders in the primary unit of measure. The quantity on sales order whose requested shipment date is beyond the standard commitment period that has been specified in the Inventory Constants for that branch. As an example, if you normally ship most orders within 90 days, then an order for an item with a requested ship date a year from now would have its quantity reflected in this field. The number of units specified on the purchase order in primary units of measure. The number of units on work orders in primary units of measure. The number of units in the purchase order (or work order) routing process, in the primary unit of measure. This includes the quantity in transit, the quantity in inspection, and the quantities in user defined operations 1 and 2. The number of units backordered in primary units of measure.

Quantity Receipts Total

Quantity Hard Committed Quantity Soft Committed Quantity Work Order Hard Commit Quantity on Future Commit

Quantity on Purchase Orderprimary units Quantity on Work Order Receipt Units in Routing (Primary Units)

Quantity on Backorder

What You Should Know About

Reviewing item quantity by location You can review availability for an item in a specific location by accessing Item Availability.

Processing Options for Item Availability Summary

Process Control: 1. Enter a 1 to omit locations with no quantity available. If left blank, all locations will display. ____________

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

419

Inventory Management

Dream Writer Versions: Enter the version for each program. If left blank, ZJDE0001 will be used. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Item Master Text Message Code Review Item Search Purchase Order Inquiry Customer Service Inquiry Open Work Orders Supply and Demand Bill of Materials Lot Availability (P4101 ) (P40010 ) (P41200 ) (P430301) (P42045 ) (P31225 ) (P4021 ) (P30200 ) (P41280 ) ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________

Enter the version for each program. If left blank, ZJDE0001 will be used. 11. 12. 13. 14. Item Ledger (P4111 ) Branch/Plant Item Info. (P41026) Availability by Location (P4190 ) Item / Location Information (P41024) ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________

Grade And Potency: 15. Enter a 1 to display the grade range. If left blank, no grade will display for selection. 16. Enter a 1 to display the potency range. If left blank, no potency will display for selection.

____________

420

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Locate Quantity Information

Locating Detailed Quantity Information

You can view detailed quantity information about an item in a specific storage area and verify the size and types of commitments against that quantity. To locate detailed quantity information

On Detailed Availability

1. Complete the following fields: Branch/Plant Item Number Unit of Measure 2. To view item information for a location other than the primary location, complete the following field: Location 3. Review the following fields: Status Quantity on Soft Commit SO/WO Quantity on Hard Commit SO Quantity on Future Commit SO Quantity on Hard Commit WO

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

421

Inventory Management

Quantity on SO - Other 1 Quantity on SO - Other 2 Quantity Held Safety Stock Quantity on Purchase Order Quantity on PO - Other 1 Quantity on Work Order Receipt Quantity in Transit Quantity in Inspection Quantity in Operation 1 Quantity in Operation 2

Field Lot Status

Quantity 1 Other primary units Quantity 2 Other primary units Quantity Held Safety Stock Quantity Other Purchasing 1 Quantity in Transit

The first of two quantities that can be specified as additional offsets (subtractions from on-hand) in the determination of quantities available for sale. (Primary unit of measure) The second of two quantities that can be specified as additional offsets (subtractions from on-hand) in the determination of quantities available for sale. (Primary unit of measure) The number of units held. The system displays the units in the primary unit of measure for the item. The quantity of stock kept on hand to cover high-side variations in demand. The quantity that appears on documents such as bid requests, which are not formal commitments to buy on the part of your organization. Code telling the system to include the number of units in transit in the item availability calculation. Valid codes are: Blank No effect on the quantity available (default) + Increases the quantity available Code telling the system to include the number of units in inspection in the item availability calculation. Valid codes are: Blank No effect on the quantity available (default) + Increases the quantity available

Quantity in Inspection

422

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Locate Quantity Information

Field Quantity in Operation 1

Explanation Code telling the system to include the number of units in one operation of the receipt routing process in the item availability calculation. You define which operation from receipt routing corresponds to this field. Valid codes are: Blank No effect on the quantity available (default) + Increases the quantity available Code telling the system to include the number of units in one operation of the receipt routing process in the item availability calculation. You define which operation from receipt routing corresponds to this field. Valid codes are: Blank No effect on the quantity available (default) + Increases the quantity available A quantity in the primary unit of measure that you expect to add to the location detail after you confirm a putaway or replenishment suggestion. A quantity in the primary unit of measure that you expect to remove from the location after you confirm a picking or replenishment suggestion.

Quantity in Operation 2

Quantity Inbound Warehouse Quantity Outbound Warehouse

What You Should Know About

Displaying availability information You can display item availability information based on the calculations that are set up for your system: Plus (+) and minus () appear by fields that add to, or subtract from, the on-hand quantity. Fields without a plus (+) or a minus () are not included in the availability calculation. The on-hand quantity is the current physical amount of the item in the location. You can define availability calculations to meet your needs. See Setting Up Item Availability and Setting Up Branch/Plant Constants for information about the factors that define availability calculations.

Defining availability calculations

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

423

Inventory Management

Processing Options for Item Availability Detail

Purchase Orders: 1. Enter the version of Open Purchase Orders to be used. If left blank, ZJDE0001 will be used. Sales Orders: 2. Enter the version of Customer Service Inquiry to be used. If blank, ZJDE0001 will be used. Work Orders: 3. Enter the version of Open Work Orders to be used. If left blank, ZJDE0001 will be used. ____________

____________

Locating Quantity Information by Lot

G41 Inventory Management Choose Lot Control

G4113

Lot Control Choose Lot Availability

You can review the number of items that are in a specific lot, as well as the activity dates, item quantities, and hold statuses that pertain to the lot. The activity date and quantity information reflect transactions such as issues, receipts, and sales.

424

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Locate Quantity Information

To locate quantity information by lot

On Lot Availability

1. Complete the following fields: Branch/Plant History (Y/N) From Grade Thru Grade From Potency Thru Potency Lot/SN Item Number 2. Review the following fields: Status Rea Expires Quantity on Hand/Held Available

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

425

Inventory Management

Field History

Explanation A code that tells the system to display information for all locations and lots or only for those with on-hand balances. Valid codes are: N Display only locations and lots with on-hand balances Y Display all locations and lots A user defined code (table 41/L) that indicates the status of the lot. If this field is blank, it indicates that the lot is approved. All other codes indicate that the lot is on hold. You can assign a different status code to each location in which a lot resides on Item/Location Information or Location Lot Status Change.

Lot Status

Status Change Reason

A code (system 42, type RC) that indicates the reason for a change in the status of a lot, such as goods damaged in shipment or goods placed in quarantine. The date that a lot of items expires. The system enters this date for you if you have specified the shelf life days for the item on Item Master Information or Item Branch/Plant Information. The system calculates the expiration date by adding the number of shelf life days to the date that you receive the item. You can commit inventory based on the lot expiration date for items. You choose how the system commits inventory for an item on Item Master Information or Item Branch/Plant Information.

Expires

Quantity on Hand/Held

The number of units that are physically in stock. The quantity on hand displays in the primary unit of measure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The number of items in stock or on hold. If the item is on hold, the system highlights the field.

What You Should Know About

Viewing the same item or lot If the same item or lot appears more than once, the item exists in multiple locations.

See Also
Locating Detailed Quantity Information (P41202) for information on how the Inventory Management system calculates item availability

426

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Locate Quantity Information

Processing Options for Lot Availability

Dream Writer Versions: 1. Enter the Version of the Trace/Track Inquiry to call. 2. Enter the Version of Item Master Revisions to call. 3. Enter the Version of Work Order Entry to call. 4. Enter the Version of Branch/Plant Item Information to call. Field Display Control 5. Enter a 1 to protect Lot Status from being updated. Grade And Potency: 6. Enter a 1 to display the grade range. If left blank, no range will be displayed for selection. 7. Enter a 1 to display the potency range. If left blank, no potency will be displayed for selection. ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________

____________

Locating On-Hand Quantity Information

After you conduct a physical inventory of your warehouse, you can review any variances in the on-hand quantity for an item. On-hand quantity is the number of items that are physically in stock. In addition, you can locate on-hand quantity information for a specific transaction date in the Item Ledger (The Cardex). The Item Ledger contains transaction history, such as sales, receipts, or transfers for each of the items in your inventory. Each entry represents a transaction that affects the on-hand quantity for an item. You can review a transaction to determine both item quantities and the related costs in any branch, location, or lot as of a particular date. Also, you can see any transactions for that item that have taken place as of a specific date.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

427

Inventory Management

SAdjustments STransfers SPO Receipts SCredit Orders

Add to

Quantity on Hand

SIssues STransfers SSales Orders SShip Confirm

Subtract from

Physical Inventory Variances

To locate on-hand quantity information

On Item Ledger (The Cardex)

1. To locate the on-hand quantity information for a specific transaction date, complete the following fields: Item Number Dt From/Trans Dt Thru/Trans 2. Review the following fields: Quantity On Hand Value

428

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Locate Quantity Information

3. To locate on-hand quantity information for a specific branch/plant, location and lot, complete the following fields: Branch/Plant Location Lot/SN 4. Review the following fields: Quantity On Hand Value

Field Date From Date Thru G/L

Explanation The beginning date in the date range. This is the date starting with which you want the system to display information. A number that identifies either the period number or date upon which you want to inquire. If you leave this field blank, the system uses the ending date of the current period for the company that contains the business unit. Valid period numbers are from 1 through 14. The extended cost/price value of an inventory transaction for an inventory item. The product of the number of units and the unit cost.

Amount Extended Cost/Price Extended Cost

What You Should Know About

Locating running balances You can set up the processing options to display running balances for quantities during a specific fiscal period or year end. See Working with Transaction Records for more information about viewing the running balance format on the Item Ledger (The Cardex). Locating deductions from on-hand quantities You can locate information about quantities that are deducted from the on-hand quantity. See Locating Detailed Quantity Information for more information about these deductions.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

429

Inventory Management

See Also
Working with Transaction Records (P41542) for more information about locating running balance and transactionrelated information using the Item Ledger (The Cardex)

430

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Review Supply and Demand Information

G41

Inventory Management Choose Inventory inquiries

G41112

Inventory Inquries Choose Supply/Demand Inquiry

Reviewing Supply and Demand Information

Processing Options for Supply/Demand Inquiry

Display Options: 1. Enter a 1 to deduct Safety Stock from Availability. 2. Enter a 1 by the following Routing Quantities to be considered on hand. Any quantity not included will be displayed on the appropriate date. 1 Quantity in Transit 2 Quantity in Inspection 3 User Defined Quantity 1 4 User Defined Quantity 2 3. Enter a 1 to summarize all In Receipt Routing steps into one line. Display Options (Cont.): 4. Enter a 1 to summarize Item Location records. 5. Enter one of the following: = No Available to Promise Line 1 = Available to Promise Line 2 = Cumulative ATP Line 6. Enter the version of Supply/Demand Inclusion Rules to be used. 7. Enter a 1 to display the window format if called from another program. ____________

____________ ____________

434

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Review Supply and Demand Information

Dreamwriter Versions: Enter the Dream Writer version to use for each program listed. If left blank, version ZJDE0001 will be used. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. Purchase Order Entry (P4311) Purchase Order Inquiry (P430301) Sales Order Entry (P4211) Sales Order Inquiry (P42045) Scheduling Workbench (P31225) MPS/MRP/DRP Pegging Inq. (P3412) MPS/MRP/DRP Time Series (P3413) MPS/MRP/DRP Message Detail(P3411) ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________

Optional Records: 16. Enter a 1 to include Planned Orders from MPS/MRP/DRP generations. If left blank, Planned Orders will not be displayed. 17. Enter the Forecast Type(s) to be included. Up to 5 types can be included. If left blank, no forecast records will be included. (Enter multiple forecasts, for example 01 02 & BF, as 0102BF). Optional Records (Cont.): 18. Enter the number of days (+/-) from todays date that you wish to begin including Forecast records. A blank will use todays date to begin including Forecast records. 19. Enter a 1 to omit Bulk Stocking Type records from screen. If left blank, Bulk items will be included. Optional Records (Cont.): 20. Enter the rate based Schedule Type to use. If left blank, no rate based schedules will be displayed. Potency: 21. Enter 1 to convert Quantities to Standard Potency. Lot Expiration: 22. Enter 1 to reduce Quantity available due to lot expiration. (Note: This option will not work with ATP. If you use this option, option 5 must be set to blank or 2.)

____________

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

435

Inventory Management

436

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Review Performance Information

G41

Inventory Management Choose Inventory Inquiries

G41112

Inventory Inquiries Choose Buyers Information

You can also access Buyers Information from the Inventory Master/Transactions menu (G4111). Select Inventory Inquiries, followed by Buyers Information from the Inventory Inquiries menu (G41112).

Reviewing Performance Information

When you review performance information for an item, you can review previous sales activity, open purchase orders, and the current quantities for items in your inventory. This information is useful in helping you to plan for your inventory needs. Reviewing performance information includes the following tasks: - Reviewing inventory quantities - Reviewing sales history - Reviewing open purchase orders Performance information is available from three sources: Inventory (provides item and quantity information) Sales history (provides information for previous sales periods) Purchasing (provides information about open purchase orders)

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

437

Inventory Management

Reviewing Inventory Quantities

The following table lists the types of quantity calculations that the system can perform:

Days available

This calculation reflects the number of days in the future that an item will be available. This calculation reflects the total number of items in a particular branch/plant. This calculation includes soft commitments, hard commitments, and quantities on work orders. You can define how the system performs this calculation. Typically, it includes on-hand quantities minus any outstanding commitments, reservations, and backorders. This calculation reflects quantities that are on open purchase orders. You can specify the minimum item quantity for which replenishment should occur or have the system calculate it. This calculation determines a minimum quantity for an item based on an economic analysis of the cost of placing an order and keeping inventory.

Onhand

Commitments

Available

On receipt

Reorder point

Economic Order Quantity (EOQ)

438

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Review Performance Information

To review inventory quantities

On Buyers Information 1. Complete the following fields: Item Number Brn/Plt Input U/M 2. Review the following fields: Day/Avail On Hand Comm Avail Avail/Rec (Available on Receipt) On PO (On Purchase Order) Reor Pt EOQ (Quantity Economic Order) Cumulative Sales This Yr

Field Unit of Measure Purchasing

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

439

Inventory Management

Field Days Available

Explanation A number that indicates how many days of inventory are available. This number of days is calculated by first dividing the total number of units sold during the previous two months by the number of working days in a two-month period (43.5). Next, the system divides the number of days by the current quantity available. Example: Current Period is 11. Period 9 (150 sales) + Period 10 (140 sales) = 290 cumulative sales for two periods. Divide by 43.5 Average working days within two months = 6.6666667 Quantity Available = 610 Divide by 6.6666667 Days Available = 91.5 The number of units that are physically in stock. The quantity on hand displays in the primary unit of measure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The total number of items (counted in the primary unit of measure) that are stored in both the primary and secondary locations of a particular cost center. This information is stored in the Item Location Information table (F41021). The total number of items (counted in the primary unit of measure) that are stored in both the primary and secondary locations of a particular cost center. This information is stored in the Item Location Information table (F41021).

On Hand

On Purchase Order

The number of units specified on the purchase order in primary units of measure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The system retrieves this number from the Item Location table (F41021) for the primary and all secondary locations of the item in the specified branch/plant.

Quantity Available On Receipt Reorder Point Input

The number of units that are currently available (in the primary unit of measure) plus the quantity on purchase or work orders. A quantity for an item that specifies when replenishment occurs. Typically, this occurs when the total quantity on hand plus the quantity on order fall to, or below a specified quantity. You can enter this quantity or the system can calculate it if there is sufficient sales history. If there is no safety stock quantity defined, the system first calculates the safety stock by multiplying the square root of the average leadtime quantity. Then, the system adds the calculated safety stock quantity to the average leadtime quantity to determine the reorder point.

440

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Review Performance Information

Field Economic Order Quantity (EOQ)

Explanation A fixed order quantity for an item that is intended to minimize the combined costs of acquiring and carrying inventory. The system calculates this number based on ecomonic analysis of the cost of placing an order and keeping inventory. The Economic Order Quantity, EOQ (or Reorder Order Quantity, ROQ) is calculated with the following variables: POCS Cost to issue a Purchase Order from the value entered in the Inventory Constants on 02/G4131. ANNS Annual Sales, in units, calculated from data contained in the Item History File, F4115. CSTA Average Cost of the item, from the branch inventory record of the primary storage location for the item. INCS Cost of carrying inventory from the value entered in the Inventory Constants on 02/G4131. EOQ = the square root of [2(POCS) / (INCS)] * [(ANNS) / (CSTA)]

Reviewing Sales History

You can use sales history information to determine previous and projected sales. For example, you can review the cumulative sales to date and the projected sales for the remainder of the year. You can also compare item sales for different fiscal periods. To review sales history

On Buyers Information 1. Complete the following fields: Item Number Brn/Plt Input U/M 2. Review the following fields: ABC RK (ABC Ranking) Per End Cumulative Sales - This Yr Cumulative Sales - Last Yr 12 PD (Quantity Projected Total) Trd (Trend Percent) Reor Pt

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

441

Inventory Management

Lst Cst Avg Cst Lst Rec

Field ABC Code 1 Sales Inventory

442

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Review Performance Information

Field Reorder Point Input

Explanation A quantity for an item that specifies when replenishment occurs. Typically, this occurs when the total quantity on hand plus the quantity on order fall to, or below a specified quantity. You can enter this quantity or the system can calculate it if there is sufficient sales history. If there is no safety stock quantity defined, the system first calculates the safety stock by multiplying the square root of the average leadtime quantity. Then, the system adds the calculated safety stock quantity to the average leadtime quantity to determine the reorder point.

Amount Unit Cost Last Paid Amount Unit Cost Weighted Average

The last-in cost of this item. This is the cost that effective the last time you recorded a receipt for this item. The weighted average cost for an item. This cost is recalculated with each receipt or adjustment for the item. It is calculated as shown below: (Quantity On Hand x Current Average Cost) + (Transaction Quantity x Transaction Unit Cost) = Average Cost per Unit Quantity On Hand + Transaction Quantity

Reviewing Open Purchase Orders

If your Inventory Management system is set up to work in conjunction with the Purchase Management system, you can review all of the open purchase orders that meet the following criteria: Do not have an open quantity that is equal to zero Do not have a next status that is below 900 To review open purchase orders

On Buyers Information 1. Complete the following fields: Item Number Brn/Plt Input U/M

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

443

Inventory Management

2. Review the following fields: Type Number Line Supplier Name Quantity Date

Processing Options for Buyers Information

Process Control : 1. Enter a 1 to calculate quantities using the current period from Company Constants. Otherwise current period from Br/Plt Constants will be used. 2. Enter last 2 digits of Fiscal year you wish to see. If blank the Current Fiscal Year from Company Constants will be used. Dream Writer Version : 3. Enter the version of Open Order Inquiry to call. If left blank, version ZJDE0001 will be used. (See Form ID P430301). ____________

____________

444

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Work with Transaction Records

Working with Transaction Records

You can use transaction records for the following purposes: Keep accurate balance forward records from year to year Compare and reconcile your inventory balances for different fiscal periods Access information about an item's quantity and cost in any location Complete the following tasks: - Create balance forward records - Enter individual transactions - Review multiple transactions and balances - Review transactions on general ledger reports You can create balance forward records for a fiscal year by running the Item Ledger As Of Generation program. This program summarizes item transactions for each general ledger category code and provides the most accurate and efficient method of updating the records in the As Of table (F41112). After you run the As Of Generation program, you can compare and reconcile your inventory balances at the end of one period with the same period end for the general ledger. This is helpful because the system continues to record inventory transactions after the general ledger periods close. Information in the balance forward records allow you to review specific transactions and review how much of an item (both the quantity and cost amount) that you have in any specific branch, location, or lot as of specific date. Also, you can also review any transactions for that item that have taken place after that date.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

445

Inventory Management

Before You Begin

- Verify that no records have been purged from the Item Ledger table (F4111). - Verify that you allow an adequate amount of time for the As Of Generation program to run. These procedures can be very lengthy, depending on the number of items that you want to convert. - Read Locating OnHand Quantity Information for information about reviewing current transaction information on the Item Ledger (The Cardex).

Creating Balance Forward Records

G41 Inventory Management Choose As Of Processing

G4122

As Of Processing Choose Item Ledger As Of Generation

You can keep accurate balance forward records from year to year. You create the balance forward records for item transactions by running the Item Ledger As Of Generation DREAM Writer program. You can run this program using one of the following methods.

Complete regeneration

Typically, you only run the Item Ledger As Of Generation program the first time that you create the As Of table (F41112). However, if you change the fiscal date patterns on the general ledger, you must completely regenerate this table. During a complete regeneration, the system processes the information as follows: Verifies records, including those that were in the previous complete regeneration Builds the table based on transactions in the Item Ledger (The Cardex) table (F4111) as of the current date Marks all transactions in the table as summarized so that they will not be included in any partial regeneration

446

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Work with Transaction Records

Partial regeneration

After you create the As Of table (F41112) for the first time, you can run this process at the end of each general ledger period to enter new transactions and keep your balance forward records current.

The system records a transaction for the following information, using the primary unit of measure: Data for the entire year, based on your fiscal date pattern Cumulative quantity and cost amount totals from the previous years The system creates a record for each unique combination of the following levels: Item number Branch/plant Location Lot G/L class Fiscal year After you enter individual transactions to the As Of table (F41112), you create a record for each of the unique combinations of the levels. When one of these records changes, the system creates a new balance forward record at each level. However, the system bypasses the item ledger and G/L transaction accounts. Use the following data sequence when you run the As of Generation program: Item NumberShort Branch/Plant Location Lot G/L Class G/L Date

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

447

Inventory Management

What You Should Know About

Loading incomplete records The system cannot load purged Item Ledger records into the As Of table (F41112). Loading the item ledger records after a purge results in inaccurate totals. The system loads only the records for sales orders that have been processed through sales update during the As Of Generation program. You can delete information from the As Of table (F41112) with the following results: Updates the balance forward information but not the Item Ledger (The Cardex) and other general ledger transaction accounts. Marks any transactions that you delete as summarized in the Item Ledger and does not reselect them if you run a partial regeneration of the As Of Generation table.

Loading sales orders

Deleting information

Processing Options for Item Ledger As Of Record Generation

Generation Options: 1. Enter a 1 to REgenerate the entire As Of file (F41112). If left blank, the As Of file will be updated with any transactions in the Item Ledger file (F4111) that have not yet been processed by the As Of generation. NOTE: The intended use of a REgeneration is in the case that your fiscal date patterns have changed. In order to REgenerate the file correctly, all pertinent Generation (ConT) : Item Ledger records must exist. If you have at any time purged your Item Ledger records the REgeneration will not create accurate information in the As Of records. Generation Options: 1. Enter a 1 to REgenerate the entire As Of file (F41112). If left blank, the As Of file will be updated with any transactions in the Item Ledger file (F4111) that have not yet been processed by the As Of generation. ____________

____________

448

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Work with Transaction Records

NOTE: The intended use of a REgeneration is in the case that your fiscal date patterns have changed. In order to REgenerate the file correctly, all pertinent Generation (ConT) : Item Ledger records must exist. If you have at any time purged your Item Ledger records the REgeneration will not create accurate information in the As Of records.

Entering Individual Transactions

G41 Inventory Management Choose As of Processing

G4122

As Of Processing Choose Direct As Of Entry

You might find that you need to enter individual transactions if the Item Ledger table (F41112) has been purged or if some records were damaged. You can use the Item Ledger As Of Generation program to enter these transactions. Enter only those item quantities that actually exist in the Item Ledger tablej. Any entries that do not match the Item Ledger table will cause errors in the Item Balance/Item Ledger Integrity report. In addition, there might not be an adequate audit trail for you to reconcile any differences.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

449

Inventory Management

To enter an individual transaction

On Direct As Of Entry

1. Complete the following fields: Item Number Fiscal year Branch/Plant Location The system displays the total item transaction quantity and amount information for each fiscal period. 2. Complete the following fields next to the applicable G/L period: Quantity Amount 3. To enter cumulative transaction information for an item if the system does not display it, complete the following fields: Quantity Amount

450

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Work with Transaction Records

Field Fiscal Year

Explanation A number that identifies the fiscal year. Generally, you can either type a number in this field or leave it blank to indicate the current fiscal year (as defined on the Company Numbers and Names screen). Specify the year at the end of the first period rather than the year at the end of the fiscal period. For example, a fiscal year begins October 1, 1994 and ends September 30, 1995. The end of the first period is October 31, 1994. Specify the year 94 rather than 95.

Net Quantity 01 Amount Net Posting 01

The net transaction quantity from all transactions for an Item for Period 01. Number that represents the net amount posted during the accounting period. The system uses the accounting periods from the Company Constants table (F0010). The net amount posted is the total of all debits and credits beginning with the first day of the period through the last day of the period. The cumulative total quantity from all transactions in the Item Ledger for an item. The total amount of all transactions in the Item Ledger for an Item.

Cumulative Quantity Cumulative Amount

What You Should Know About

Reviewing information for a fiscal period You can review item transaction and balance information for a specific fiscal period on Direct As Of Entry after the As Of table (F41112) has been generated. If cumulative amounts and quantities for the previous year are in the system, the system displays them after you enter the fiscal year, branch/plant, and item number on Direct As Of Entry. If the system does not display this information because there are no balance forward records for the previous year, you can enter them manually. However, any amounts that you enter must match the previous years totals.

Entering cumulative quantities and amounts

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

451

Inventory Management

Reviewing Multiple Transactions and Balances

G41 Inventory Management Choose Inventory Inquiries

G41112

Inventory Inquiries Choose Item Ledger (The Cardex)

You can review transaction history, such as sales, receipts, or transfers for each item in your inventory. This is helpful when you are preparing to reconcile your inventory and need to review a number of transactions. It is also helpful when you are tracking the original versus the G/L document type for a transaction. Also, you can reconcile your inventory quantities by reviewing running balances for items on Item Ledger (Running Balance). To review multiple transactions and balances

On Item Ledger (The Cardex)

452

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Work with Transaction Records

1. Complete the following fields: Item Number Branch/Plant Location Lot/SN 2. To locate the specific period and document type, complete the following fields: Dt From/Trans Dt Thru/Trans Document Type 3. Review the following fields: Quantity On Hand Value (Extended Cost) 4. Select the specific document. 5. Access Item Ledger Information.

6. On Item Ledger Information, review the following fields: J/E Line Number G/L Date Batch Number User ID Work Station ID

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

453

Inventory Management

Reference Program ID Document Number Reason Code Explanation Supplier

Field Extended Cost Journal Entry Line Number

Explanation The product of the number of units and the unit cost. A number that designates a line within a journal entry. The system uses this field to sequence the journal entry for inquiry purposes. A date that identifies the financial period that the transaction is to be posted to. The general accounting constants specify the date range for each financial period. You can have up to 14 periods. Generally, period 14 is for audit adjustments. The system edits this field for PBCO (posted before cutoff), PYEB (prior year ending balance), and so on.

Date For G/L (and Voucher)

Batch Number

A number that identifies a group of transactions that are processed and balanced as a unit. When you add a batch, you can either assign a batch number or let the system assign it through Next Numbers. When you change, locate, or delete a batch, you must specify the batch number. The system closes the batch when you return to the menu. The IBM-defined user profile. The workstation ID number that appears in the upper right corner of each J.D. Edwards menu. A general purpose reference number that provides an audit trail for specific transactions. The RPG program name defined in the Software Versions Repository Master table. See also JD Edwards Standards. T SS XXX T Specific member ID number SS System number, for example, 01 for Address Book XXX Member type, for example, P for Program, R for Report, and so on

User ID Terminal Identification Transaction Reference Program ID

Reason Code

454

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Work with Transaction Records

Processing Options for Item Ledger Inquiry

Display Options: 1. Enter the format to be displayed: 1 = Running Quantity Balance format. 2 = Running Dollar Balance format. 3 = Cost Item Ledger format. 4 = Location Item Ledger format. 5 = Lot Status/Grade/Potency Item Ledger format. If left blank, the Cost Item Ledger format will be displayed. Default Values: 2. Enter the default document type upon entering the video. If left blank, a * will default for all document types. 3. Enter a 1 to display Item Ledger entries in ascending date and time order. If left blank, the entries will be displayed in descending date and time order. (This option does NOT apply to Running Balance formats.) 4. Enter a 1 to search by Original Document Type. If left blank, the search will be done by G/L Document Type. Dream Writer Versions: Enter a DREAM Writer Version for the following programs. (ZJDE0001) is the default. 5. Load & Delivery Ledger Inq P49511 ____________

____________

Reviewing Transactions on General Ledger Reports

You can review inventory transactions on four general ledger reports. Complete the following tasks: - Review the Item Ledger Detail Print report - Review the Item Ledger by G/L Class Code Print report - Review the General Ledger by Object Account report - Review the Trial Balance by Object Account report

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

455

Inventory Management

Reviewing the Item Ledger Detail Print Report

G41 Inventory Management Choose Inventory Reports

G41111

Inventory Reports Choose Item Ledger

Item Ledger Detail Print is a DREAM Writer report that lists the cumulative transactions from balance forward records prior to the G/L date that you select in the processing options. It is based on the user defined G/L dates that you set up in the processing options.

456

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Work with Transaction Records

41540

J.D. Edwards & Company Item Ledger Detail Print

Page Date Branch

3 07/04/98 30

From 06/30/98

06/30/98 G/L Date Explanation Document Ty 06/30/98 Balance Forward Grade Potency 06/30/98 Inventory Receipt Grade Potency 06/30/98 Inventory Receipt Grade Potency 06/30/98 Office Systems Serv Grade Potency 06/30/98 Clark Office System Grade Potency 06/30/98 Transfer STock Grade Potency 06/30/98 Inventory Issue Grade Potency Location. . . . . Components Item Number (Short). . . . . . Location. . . . . Inventory 1445 CR 43953.15 128,773,921.72 128,773,921.72 128,773,921.72 BF . . . . . . . . . . . . Transaction. . . . . . . . . . . Quantity Cost Extended Amount 43060 EA 128776041.79

Item No / Description Cls Location/Lot Code M001 Markette Red Highlighter . . IN30

IN30

2364 OP

200

8.1672

1,633.44

IN30

2410 OP

8.1672

408.36

IN30

774 SO

1000 EA

.6806

680.60

IN30

780 SO

100 EA

.6806

68.06

IN30

209 IT

5000 EA

.6806

3,403.00

IN30

1 II

15 EA

.6806

10.21

P002 IN30 Green Bar Continuous Fo . . IN30

06/30/98 Balance Forward Grade Potency 06/30/98 Inventory Receipt Grade Potency 06/30/98 Office Systems Serv Grade Potency

2364 OP

30.1049

301.05

IN30

774 SO

700 CR

30.1049

21,073.43

Location. . . . . P002 IN30 Green Bar Continuous Fo 1 .B .1 06/30/98 Balance Forward Grade Potency BF 50 CR

23,180.77 1512.50

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

457

Inventory Management

Reviewing the Item Ledger by G/L Class Print Report

G41 Inventory Management Choose As Of Processing

G4122

As Of Processing Choose Item Ledger by G/L Class Rpt

Item Ledger by G/L Class Print is a DREAM Writer report that you use to review the high level totals of transactions for specific G/L class and category codes. Each line of the report displays a G/L classification code total for the fiscal year and period that you specify in the processing options. The As Of Generation program creates the quantity and amounts for the fiscal periods that this program uses. Do not change the sequence order of this report: Branch/Plant G/L Class
41541 J.D. Edwards & Company Item Ledger By G/L Class Code Print Page . . . 2 Date . . . 06/30/98 Branch/Plant 30

G/L Fiscal . . . . . .Balance . . . . . . . Class Description Yea Per Quantity Amount IN30 Components 98 06 10924 702,696.60

Processing Options for Item Ledger As Of by G/L Class Code

Report Options: 1. Enter the fiscal year and period for which the Item Ledger by G/L Class Code Report is to be prepared. If left blank, the financial reporting year and period will be used. Year: Period:

____________ ____________

458

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Work with Transaction Records

Reviewing the General Ledger by Object Account Report

G41 Inventory Management Choose As Of Processing

G4122

As Of Processing Choose G/L by Object Account

General Ledger by Object Account is a DREAM Writer report that prints your general ledger in object account sequence. You can select specific transaction documents or all transaction documents. The system accesses information for this report from the Financial Report Master table (F1011). The report format includes: Balance forward summaries Account mode selection Subledger selection Object account summaries

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

459

Inventory Management

09421

J.D. Edwards & Company Period General Ledger by Object Account

Page 3 Date 07/01/98 From Date 06/01/98 Thru Date 06/30/98 Current

G/L Account LT P

Account Description

Do Document

G/L

Co.

. . . . . Amounts . . . . .

Explanation Ty Date Debit Credit Balance C 1.1105 Petty Cash 00001 Balance Forward 2,272.48 6/98 BalancesCo 001 JA 1553 06/30/98 185.44 AA P 6/98 Assets Period Totals 185.44 2,457.92 2,457.92 00001 Total 00001 1553 06/30/98 16,758.26 2,457.92 2,457.92

Account Totals MD.1105 Petty Cash Object 1105 1.1110.BEAR AA P 6/98 Assets 6/98 BalancesCo 001 JA AA P 6/98 Assets 6/98 BalancesCo 001 JA AA P 6/98 Assets 6/98 BalancesCo 001 JA AA P 6/98 Assets 6/98 BalancesCo 001 JA AA P 6/98 Assets 6/98 BalancesCo 001 JA AA P 6/98 Assets 6/98 BalancesCo 001 JA AA P 6/98 Assets Bank Deposit AA P Edwards & Edwards AA P Office Warehouse, In PN AA P Centrum Incorporated RK AA P Bank Deposit AA P Bank Deposit AA P Fashion Malls, Ltd AA Period Totals PV 671 06/01/98 RK 1914 06/01/98 RK 1913 06/01/98 123 06/01/98 1018 06/07/98 PN 1950 06/10/98 RK 2049 06/15/98 1553 06/30/98 1553 06/30/98 1553 06/30/98 1553 06/30/98 1553 06/30/98 1553 06/30/98

Bear Creek Nation 6/98 BalancesCo 001 JA

2,575.50

70.70

555.50

252.50

353.50

151.50

500.00 300.00 100.00 2,540.00 1,015.72 6,970.00

27,783.98 4,359.20 27,783.98 4,359.20 23,424.78 00001 00001 1553 06/30/98 11,229.18

Account Totals MD.1110.BEAR 1.1110.FIB AA P 6/98 Assets Period Totals Bear Creek Nation First Interstate 6/98 BalancesCo 001 JA

11,229.18 11,229.18 11,229.18 00001 00001

Account Totals 1.1110.FRANCE 1.1110.LONDON First Bank of Par First Bank of Lon

460

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Work with Transaction Records

Reviewing the Trial Balance by Object Account Report

G41 Inventory Management Choose As Of Processing

G4122

As Of Processing Choose T/B by Object Account

Trial Balance by Object Account is a DREAM Writer report that prints trial balances with total postings and account balances by object account sequence. The system selects information for this report from the Financial Reporting table (F1011). The report format includes: Trial balance by object account Account mode selection Subledger selection Object account summaries

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

461

Inventory Management

094121

J.D. Edwards & Company Trial Balance By Object Account

Page Date As Of

4 07/01/98 06/30/98

Co. Account Codes L Description Prior YearEnd . . . .Postings. . . . Current D Balance This Period YearToDate Balance 00001 MD.1200 5 Accounts Receivable Object Account . . . . . 00001 00001 1.1210 MD.1210 6 Trade Accounts Receiv 6 Trade Accounts Receiv 2,441,853.76 258,230.94 697,085.59 3,138,939.35

Object Account . . . . . 00001 MD.1211 6 Tenant Receivables

2,441,853.76 258,230.94 697,085.59 3,138,939.35

Object Account . . . . . 00001 MD.1212 6 Deferred Tenant A/R Object Account . . . . . 00001 00001 1.1215 MD.1215 6 Allow for Doubtful Ac 6 Allow for Doubtful Ac 183,870.50 14,040.99 41,572.34 225,442.84

Object Account . . . . . 00001 MD.1218 6 Finance Charges Recei

183,870.50 14,040.99 41,572.34 225,442.84

Object Account . . . . . 00001 MD.1220 6 Notes Receivable Object Account . . . . . 00001 00001 1.1222 MD.1222 6 Drafts Receivable 6 Drafts Receivable 88,167.50 8,600.61 25,464.56 113,632.06

Object Account . . . . . 00001 00001 1.1224 MD.1224 6 Remittances Receivabl 6 Remittances Receivabl

88,167.50 8,600.61 25,464.56 113,632.06 90,686.00 6,622.65 19,608.24 110,294.24

Object Account . . . . . 00001 MD.1225 6 Retainages Receivable

90,686.00 6,622.65 19,608.24 110,294.24

Object Account . . . . . 00001 00001 1.1230 MD.1230 6 Employee Receivables 6 Employee Receivables 100,840.50 8,477.80 25,100.93 125,941.43

Object Account . . . . . 00001 00001 1.1240 MD.1240 6 VAT Recoverable 6 VAT Recoverable

100,840.50 8,477.80 25,100.93 125,941.43

Object Account . . . . . 00001 1.1290 6 Other Accounts Receiv 1,007,420.00 72,267.84 213,969.49 1,221,389.49

Page Date Branch

4 4/04/98 30

FDB . Food & Beverages Blank Sales Rpt Code 2 41/S2 Committed/ Selected/ On P.O./ On Hand Held Work Order Available Unit Cost 24020 500 23520 0.7500 Potency 775 Potency EA Grade . . Grade . . Grade 1 .A .1 00000004 1 .A .1 00000006 1 .A .2 00000005 . . Grade EA Grade EA Grade EA Grade EA Potency Potency 5245 1000 4245 35.1200 Potency 10 10 16.0000 Potency 16.0000 EA BX Potency 18050 Potency 1 5000 13050 2544 16.1500 Potency 2000 2000 0.0000 3500 1850 1650 130 0.2000 50 725 25 6.7500

Item Number Description Location/Lot UM MIN001 . . BT Mineral Water Grade S001 Front Loading Stapler S002 Stanley Staple Remover S003 1/2 inch Tackmaster Staple for Front Loading Staplers V001 Natureway High Energy Vita 100 Capsules V001 Natureway High Energy Vita 100 Capsules V001 Natureway High Energy Vita 100 Capsules V001 Natureway High Energy Vita 100 Capsules V002 Natureway High Energy Vita 250 Capsules P001 Premium Xerographic Paper TS001 Issel Pump Court Shoes TS002 AirShaq Childrens XTrai . . Grade . . Grade . . Grade .1 Grade . Grade 1 .B .1 Grade 1 .B .2 Grade . . Grade CR EA EA EA PR PR PR RM . . Grade . . EA

16.1500

16188 Potency 1469 Potency 1467 Potency 350 Potency 3870 Potency 16 Potency 16 Potency 305 Potency

5500

10688

2.6829

275 50 275 50

1144

150

82.0000

1142

180

66.0000

TS002 1 .C AirShaq Childrens XTrai 1001 Pen & Pencil Set 1001 Pen & Pencil Set 1001 Pen & Pencil Set P002 Green Bar Continuous For .

350

43.9573

251

3619

5.2500

100

205

200

30.1049

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Review Inventory Status Reports

Processing Options for Stock Status

Unit Of Measure Options: 1. Enter the Unit of Measure (BX, DZ, CS, CA, etc.) to appear on the report. If the chosen Unit of Measure is not defined for an item, the Primary Unit of Measure will be used. If left blank, the Primary Unit of Measure will be displayed. ____________

Reviewing the Item Master Directory Report

Item Master Directory is a DREAM Writer report that lists the item master records.
41560 J.D. Edwards & Company Item Master Directory by Sales Catalog Section Page Date 4 4/04/98 . Blank Sales Rpt Code 1 41/S1 Blank Sales Rpt Code 2 41/S2

Stk Bck 2nd Item Description Typ Ord UM 12731 12749 12757 12765 12773 12781 12790 12802 12811 12829 12837 12845 PRIMARY VALVE VS001 GB001 GBP001 SBB002 PVG003 BSB004 SR005 GATE PUMP PM GFP001 GFPM006 GFPF009 GFPC001 GC0001 Vitamin B1 Vitamin B2 Vitamin B6 Vitamin B12 Vitamin C Minerals, complex Magnesium Iron Selenium Parselenium Zinc Buffer, inert Gate Valve, Primary Primary Valve Stem Gland Bushing, Primary Valve Gland Bushing Packing Stuffing Box Bushing Primary Valve Gasket Back Seat Bushing Seat Ring Gate Pump Preventive Maint. Gate Fuel Pump Gate Fuel Pump Motor Gate Fuel Pump Filter Gate Fuel Pump Connector Grease Cartridge P P P P P M P P M P P P K P P P P P P P K K P P P P Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y GM GM GM GM GM GM GM GM GM MG GM GM EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA EA

Processing Options for Item Master Directory

1. Select Short, Long, or 3rd Item (Enter 1, 2 or 3) 2. Enter a 1 to include Item Notes on report. 3. Enter a 1 to include Print Messages on report. ____________ ____________ ____________

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

Reviewing the Buyers Guide Report

The Buyers Guide is a DREAM Writer report that lists product and item performance information.

4152

J.D. Edwards & Company Buyers Guide

Page Date

2 4/04/98

Item Number/ Supplier Description / Branch 1001 Pen & Pencil Set 4345 Value Worldwide 30

Last Cost UM Average Cost EA 5.2500 5.2568

Receipt Order 06/08/98 07/25/98

Margin Ann Sale Avail Lt Days ROP SOQ ABC Avg Mth On L Times EOQ Safety 0% 3,651 6.52 CCC 96 3,651 96

Memphis Distribution Center

Item Number (Short). . . . . .

3,651 96

STEREO

JDE STEREO SYSTEM 30

675.0000 0.0000

0% 07/25/98 CCC

0.00 60

High quality performance system for the music enthusiast. Memphis Distribution Center 60

Item Number (Short). . . . . . 60

RECEIVER

350 Channel Mega Watt 30

200.0000 200.0000

06/30/98 0% 07/25/98 CCB

950 60

0.00

Component for the JDE Stereo System package. 950 60

Memphis Distribution Center

Item Number (Short). . . . . .

950 60

Processing Options for Buyers Guide

Enter a 1 to print all items or enter a 2 to print only those items at/or below reorder point Enter a 1 to print item notes. ____________

____________

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Review Inventory Status Reports

Reviewing the Inventory Journal Report

The Inventory Journal is a DREAM Writer report that you use to review the transactions against your inventory. The information is grouped by the source of the transactions over a specific period of time. This report lists all the basic information about the items in a specific branch, plant, or warehouse. You can also use this report to verify the amount of your inventory against the general ledger. The Inventory Journal retrieves records from the Item Ledger table (F4111).

41550

J.D. Edwards & Company Inventory Journal All Branches

Page Date Branch

58 4/04/98 30

From 01/01/98 To 12/31/99 Source Code IA Inventory Adjustments Item Number Exten Quantity In Pr Description Document Date Reference Quantity Cost Prim UM UM 1001 Pen & Pencil Set 13 04/30/98 Inventory Adjustment 75 EA 525.00 393.75 75 EA Item Number Total. . . . . . . 393.75 P001 Premium Xerographic Paper

13 04/30/98 Inventory Adjustment

268.29

Item Number Total. . . . . . . M001 Markette Red Highlighter

134.15 134.15

13 04/30/98 Inventory Adjustment

68.06 Item Number Total. . . . . . . 68.06

100

68.06

100

P002 Green Bar Continuous For

13 04/30/98 Inventory Adjustment

903.15 Item Number Total. . . . . . . 903.15

3,010.49

M002 Markette Blue Highlighter

13 04/30/98 Inventory Adjustment

100

68.06

Item Number Total. . . . . . . E001 Commercial Business Envelo

68.06 68.06

100

13 04/30/98 Inventory Adjustment

663.78

Item Number Total. . . . . . . M003 Markette Green Highlighter

331.89 331.89

13 04/30/98 Inventory Adjustment

68.06 Item Number Total. . . . . . . 68.06

100

68.06

100

TS001 Issel Pump Court Shoes

13 04/30/98 Inventory Adjustment

5,122.57

Item Number Total. . . . . . . TS002 AirShaq Childrens XTrai

3,073.54 3,073.54

Inventory Management

- Review the Supply/Demand report - Print Stock Tags

Reviewing the ABC Analysis Report

The ABC Analysis report is based on the principle that a small number of items will account for the largest part of a companys business. A slightly larger number of items will account for a smaller, but significant amount of business. The remaining large number of items, taken together, will account for only a small amount of business. You can generate an ABC Analysis report based on an items total sales, gross margin, or on-hand value. The ABC analysis report ranks inventory items with a letter grade of A, B, or C (where A represents the items with highest total sales, largest gross margin, or largest on-hand value). You can also use different ranking percentages in each category. For example, the system could rank Item A based on percentage of sales and Item C based on gross margin. The information that the ABC Analysis report provides helps you to determine which items control your inventory costs and profits. You can use the ABC Analysis as the basis for inventory cycle counts (in which A items are counted more often than C items). You can run this report in proof or final mode, based on how you set up the processing options. The first time you run the ABC Analysis report, you should run it in proof mode. Proof mode allows you to review the information without updating the item master and branch/plant records with the new ABC ratings. Determine the natural breaks in your inventory item listing to determine where to set the percentage breaks in the branch/plant constants.

Before You Begin

- Set up the ABC code percentage breaks on Branch/Plant Constants. - If you plan to run the sales version or the gross margin version of the ABC Analysis report, verify that you have set the processing options for the Sales Update program so that the system updates the Item History table (F4115). - If you decide to include forecasted records in the ABC calculations, you must first run DRP (Distribution Requirements Planning). - Determine which inventory items to exclude from the ABC analysis rankings. To exclude an item when you run this report, you must set the code on Branch/Plant Information to bypass the item. See Entering Basic Item Information for information on the ABC codes.

510

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Review Inventory Analysis Reports

4164

J.D. Edwards & Company ABC Analysis Sales By Sales

Page Date Brn/Plt

2 04.04.98 10

Item Number MPDRPST02 MPDRPST01 MPDRP MIN001 LOCK CRT KEYBOARD 3180 KEYBOARD FEATURE KEYBOARD AT GOLD 24K E001 D1091 DRP4 DRP3 DRP2 DRP1 CRT CRATE CRT CHASSIS CRT CD5 DISK TRAY CDSINGLE LOAD CD FEATURE CABLE CONNECTORS BIKE15G BIKE15B BIKE15 BIKE10G BIKE10B BIKE10 BIKE

Description Napa Valley Soft Side CD Case Napa Valley Soft Side CD Case Napa Valley Soft Side CD Case Mineral Water CRT Lock Option CRT 3180 Style Keyboard CRT Keyboard Feature CRT AT Style Keyboard 24 Carat Gold Commercial Business Envelope Desk Set Napa Valley Soft Side CD Case Napa Valley VCR Box Napa Valley CD Box Napa Valley Cassette Box CRT Packing Crate CRT Chassis, Final Assembly CRTAS/400 Compatible Kit Compact Disk 5 Disk Tray Compact Disk single load CD Options for Stereo system CRT Cable Connector 15 Speed BikeGreen 15 Speed BikeBlue 15 Speed Bike 10 Speed BikeGreen 10 Speed BikeBlue 10 Speed Bike Bike Parent 10 Total

Sales

Item % of Total

Cumulative % of Total 100,0000 100,0000 100,0000 100,0000 100,0000 100,0000 100,0000 100,0000 100,0000 100,0000 100,0000 100,0000 100,0000 100,0000 100,0000 100,0000 100,0000 100,0000 100,0000 100,0000 100,0000 100,0000 100,0000 100,0000 100,0000 100,0000 100,0000 100,0000 100,0000

ABC Code

257806,50

100,0000

Processing Options for ABC Analysis

Report Display: 1. Enter a 1 to rank and display the items by Sales Amount. Enter a 2 to rank and display the items by Gross Margin. Enter a 3 to rank and display the items by On Hand Value. If left blank, the items will be ranked and displayed by Sales Amount. 2. If displaying the items by Sales or Gross Margin, enter a 1 to retrieve forecasted quantities from the MPS Summary file. If left blank, the Item History file will be used for past quantities. 3. If displaying the items by Sales or Gross Margin, enter the Date Range for Periods to be selected for processing. If left blank, the System Date will be used. From Date Thru Date ____________

____________

____________ ____________

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

511

Inventory Management

Cost Center Processing: 4. Enter a 1 to consolidate the amount totals of multiple Cost Centers. The ABC Codes will be based on the ABC Percentages for Cost Center ALL. To display amount totals by individual Cost Centers, the Cost Center selection must be first in the Data Sequence and must level break for each Cost Center. File Update Option: 5. Enter a 1 to update files with the new ABC Codes. If left blank, no files will be updated.

____________

Reviewing the Cost Analysis Report

Cost Analysis is a DREAM Writer report that lists items with a transaction cost that is different from the current average cost that you specified in the processing options. J.D. Edwards recommends that you print this report at least once a month so that you are aware of transactions that vary significantly in costs from the average cost per item. The Cost Analysis report retrieves records from the Item Ledger (F4111) and Item Cost Information (F4105) tables.

512

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Review Inventory Analysis Reports

41580 Memphis Distribution Center

J.D. Edwards & Company Unit Cost Warnings Variance from Average Cost 5%

Page Date Brn/Plt. .

4 4/04/98 30

. . . . . . . . . . . . . Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . Item Number Description P001 Premium Xerographic Paper

M001

Markette Red Highlighter

M002

Markette Blue Highlighter

E001

Commercial Business Envelope

M003

Markette Green Highlighter

. . Document. . . Number Date 2284 06/30/98 2364 07/15/98 2321 04/30/98 2313 05/31/98 2292 07/15/98 2292 07/15/98 2364 07/15/98 2410 07/15/98 851 10/25/98 853 10/25/98 2321 04/30/98 13 04/30/98 2313 05/31/98 1 06/15/98 774 06/30/98 780 06/30/98 209 06/30/98 4 07/10/98 2292 07/15/98 2364 07/15/98 2410 07/15/98 2321 04/30/98 2313 05/31/98 2292 07/15/98 2292 07/15/98 2364 07/15/98 2321 04/30/98 2313 05/31/98 2292 07/15/98 2292 07/15/98 2364 07/15/98 2410 07/15/98 2321 04/30/98 2313 05/31/98 2292 07/15/98 2292 07/15/98

. . . . Unit Cost. . . . . This Trans Wtd Avg 27.5000 2.6829 26.8290 2.6829 26.8293 2.6829 27.5000 2.6829 27.5000 2.6829 27.5000 2.6829 8.1672 6,806.0000 8.1672 6,806.0000 0.6806 6,806.0000 0.6806 6,806.0000 8.1675 6,806.0000 0.6806 6,806.0000 6.6000 6,806.0000 0.6806 6,806.0000 0.6806 6,806.0000 0.6806 6,806.0000 0.6806 6,806.0000 0.6806 6,806.0000 6.6000 6,806.0000 8.1672 0.6806 8.1672 0.6806 8.1675 0.6806 6.6000 0.6806 6.6000 0.6806 6.6000 0.6806 66.3780 6.6378 66.3777 6.6378 64.1000 6.6378 64.1000 6.6378 64.1000 6.6378 8.1672 0.6806 8.1672 0.6806 8.1675 0.6806 6.6000 0.6806 6.6000 0.6806 6.6000 0.6806

. . . . Variance. . . . Amount Percent 24.8171 925.0102 24.1461 900.0000 24.1464 900.0111 24.8171 925.0102 24.8171 925.0102 24.8171 925.0102 6,797.8328 99.8800 6,797.8328 99.8800 6,805.3194 99.9900 6,805.3194 99.9900 6,797.8325 99.8799 6,805.3194 99.9900 6,799.4000 99.9030 6,805.3194 99.9900 6,805.3194 99.9900 6,805.3194 99.9900 6,805.3194 99.9900 6,805.3194 99.9900 6,799.4000 99.9030 7.4866 ,100.0000 7.4866 ,100.0000 7.4869 ,100.0440 5.9194 869.7325 5.9194 869.7325 5.9194 869.7325 59.7402 900.0000 59.7399 899.9954 57.4622 865.6814 57.4622 865.6814 57.4622 865.6814 7.4866 ,100.0000 7.4866 ,100.0000 7.4869 ,100.0440 5.9194 869.7325 5.9194 869.7325 5.9194 869.7325

Processing Options for Cost Analysis

Enter the variance percent (i.e. 5 will select any transaction where the transaction cost was 5% greater or 5% less than the current average cost for the item.) ____________

Reviewing the Margin Analysis Report

Margin Analysis is a DREAM Writer report that you use to identify profit margin based on current information. This report allows you to periodically analyze your cost and price values. It also identifies margin exception items. The Margin Analysis report retrieves records from the Item Cost Information (F4105) and the Item Pricing Information (F4106) tables. The two asterisks (**) next to the unit of measure indicate that the margin percentage does not meet the minimum margin that you specified in the processing options.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

513

Inventory Management

41700

J.D. Edwards & Company Inventory Cost/Price Comparison 50% Margin Based on Last In Cost

Page Date

2 04.04.98

Item Number/ Description DISPLAY Plastic Display Unit DIS001 End Aisle Display POSTER Promotional Poster S001 Front Loading Stapler S002 Stanley Staple Remover P001 Premium Xerographic Paper E001 Commercial Business Envel M002 Markette Blue Highlighter M003 Markette Green Highlighte 1001 Pen & Pencil Set M001 Markette Red Highlighter

Branch Location Lot Selling Price Cost % Mrgn UM DC R. . EA **

DC R. .

EA **

. .

EA **

DC R. .

EA **

DC R. .

EA **

DC R. .

RM **

DC R. .

BX **

DC R. .

EA **

DC R. .

EA **

DC R. .

EA **

DC R. .

EA **

Processing Options for Margin Analysis

1) Enter an override sales costing code. (Mandatory for costing) 2) Enter a warning minimum margin percent. Items below this percent will be denoted with **.) 3) Enter a 1 to only print those items that fall below the warning minimum margin percent (Default of blanks will print all items). ____________ ____________

____________

514

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Review Inventory Analysis Reports

Reviewing the Valuation Analysis Report

Valuation Analysis is a DREAM Writer report that you use to review the extended value of on-hand inventory, based on the following cost bases: Weighted average unit cost Lastin unit cost Lot cost (associated with each storage area for an item) You can compare these costs to your inventory account or the inventory accounts in your general ledger. You must use the following data sequence: Warehouse Sales reporting code 1 Sales reporting code 2 You can create a version of this report using the G/L class code to produce totals that correspond directly to the accounts in your general ledger.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

515

Inventory Management

41590

J.D. Edwards & Company Inventory Valuation Analysis Last In Weighted Average Standard

Branch Page Date

2 21.05.96 .

Blank Sales Rpt Code 1 41/S1 Blank Sales Rpt Code 2 41/S2 . . . Unit Item Number Location/Lot Description UM Quantity Weighted Aver CD Compact DiskVarious Artists EA 5,0000 . . EA 5,0000 R. . EA 144 5,0000 1.B.2 EA 32 5,0000 1.G.1 EA 6 5,0000 1.H.1 EA 10 5,0000 2.D.2 EA 120 5,0000 3.B.1 EA 96 5,0000 4.C.2 HP . . PS . . POSTER . . CASSETTE . . DIS001 R. . DISPLAY R. . Headphones EA 8,0000 Cost . . . . . Extended Last In Lot Weighted Aver 0,0000 0,0000 5,0000 0,0000 5,0000 720,00 0,0000 5,0000 160,00 0,0000 5,0000 30,00 0,0000 5,0000 50,00 0,0000 5,0000 600,00 0,0000 5,0000 480,00 0,0000 0,0000 0,0000 0,0000 0,0000 0,0000 0,0000 0,0000 0,0000 0,0000 0,0000 0,0000 0,0000 Dollars . . Last In Lot

720,00 160,00 30,00 50,00 600,00 480,00

Portable CD Player

50,0000

Promotional Poster

1,0000

Cassette TapePopular Melodies EA

3,0000

End Aisle Display

0,0000

Plastic Display Unit

119,3400

2.040,00 2.040,00

Processing Options for Inventory Valuation Analysis

DEFAULT VALUES 1. Enter the Costing Method you wish to print for cost number 1. (Default is Weighted Average 2) 2. Enter the Costing Method you wish to print for cost number 2. (Default is Last In 1) 3. Enter the Costing Method you wish to print for cost number 3. (Default is Layer 6) NOTE: Use F1 for a list of valid values. ____________

____________

516

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Review Inventory Analysis Reports

Reviewing the Inventory Turn Report

Inventory Turn is a DREAM Writer report that you use to analyze the following: Trends in your inventory environment Inventory turnover in dollars To review Inventory Turn, you must complete the following tasks: - Group transaction codes - Run the Inventory Turn report

Before You Begin

- Set up document type codes

Grouping Transaction Types

Before you run the Inventory Turn report, you must group your transaction types by document codes. For example, you can group the transaction codes for inventory adjustments (IA), inventory issues (II), and inventory transfers (IT) into a transaction type for inventory transactions (I). You can then run the Inventory Turn report using I as a transaction family document type in the processing options.
G41 Inventory Management Choose Inventory Reports

G41111

Inventory Reports Choose Transaction Family Documents

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

517

Inventory Management

To group transaction codes

On Transaction Family Documents

Complete the following fields: Transaction Type Document Type

Field Transaction Type

Explanation This field is used to inquire on different document transaction types such as I for Inventory Tranasaction documents, O for Purchase Order documents and S for Sales Order documents.

518

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Review Inventory Analysis Reports

Field Document Type

Explanation A user defined code (system 00/type DT) that identifies the origin and purpose of the transaction. J.D. Edwards reserves several prefixes for document types, such as vouchers, invoices, receipts, and time sheets. The reserved document type prefixes for codes are: P Accounts payable documents R Accounts receivable documents T Payroll documents I Inventory documents O Order processing documents J General ledger/joint interest billing documents The system creates offsetting entries as appropriate for these document types when you post batches.

Running the Inventory Turn Report

You can print this report for a cost center, an item, and a date range combination that you specify. The Inventory Turn report: Retrieves records from the Item Ledger table (F4111) Clears the existing workfile, rebuilds it, and accesses records to produce the report You must use the following data sequence: Transaction date Branch/plant Item number - short

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

519

Inventory Management

41116

J.D. Edwards & Company Inventory Turn Report 01/01/98 04/04/98

Page Date Branch From Thru Average

4 08.08.98 M30 01.01.98 04.04.98 Turns

. . . . . . . . . . . . Item. . . . . . . . . . . . Number _ Description __________

Beginning

Ending

Inventory _______________

Usage _______________

Factor __________

5666 333 212 121 111 424 444 443 123 122 1261 1008A 12706 12714 12722 12731 12749 12757 12765 12773 12781 12790 12802 12811 12837 12845

CHAIR, 5 LEG, W/TILT OAK SHELF UNIT OAK SHELF SIDES OAK SHELF TOP/BOTTOM 1x10x6 OAK S4S OAK SHELVES OAK SHELF CABINET INSERT ASSY CABINET SIDES, DOOR, BACK HARDWARE KIT BULK HARDWARE Multivitamin Tablets Drawer Labels Vitamin A Retinyl Palmitate Beta Carotene Vitamin B1 Vitamin B2 Vitamin B6 Vitamin B12 Vitamin C Minerals, complex Magnesium Iron Selenium Zinc Buffer, inert

135.000,00 7.901.430,78 15.322,28 2.093.636,58 9.542,00 28.898,24 265.014,42 780,00 13.917,12 740.051,80 1.165,17 3.540,55 539,00 625,50 599,80 900,30 1.510,80 3.077,85 246,30 110,81 16,90 1.486,08 685,00 1.495,99

631.650,00 1.545.418,15 15.322,28 2.093.636,58 9.087,00 28.898,24

383.325,00 3.178.006,31 15.322,28 2.093.636,58 9.314,50 28.898,24 132.507,21 690,00 27.865,32 352.423,30 1.165,17 3.404,37 754,60 875,70 599,79 900,29 1.510,80 3.077,85 246,30 110,81 19,01 1.671,84 770,62 1.495,98

600,00 41.813,52 35.205,20 1.165,17 3.268,19 970,20 1.125,90 599,79 900,29 1.510,80 3.077,85 246,30 110,81 21,13 1.857,60 856,25 1.495,98

What You Should Know About

Columnar information The system calculates beginning, ending, and average inventory as follows: Beginning inventory is the amount for all transactions prior to the first date that you specified in data selection. Ending inventory is the amount of the beginning inventory plus or minus the amount of the item ledger transactions for the period that you specified in the processing options. Usage is the amount of all the item ledger records that match the transaction family document types that you specify in the processing options for the report.

520

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Review Inventory Analysis Reports

Processing Options for Inventory Turn Report

Enter the Transaction Family Document Types to include: (Based on user defined code table 41/TT and setup in P43115). . . . ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________

Reviewing the Supply and Demand Report

Supply and Demand is a DREAM Writer report that provides information about an items demand, supply, and available quantities. The report lists the following information: Quantities on hand Safety stock Sales orders Purchase orders Forecasts Work orders You can print a report for supply and demand information using the following criteria: Branch/plant Item number Date

Before You Begin

- Ensure that you have correctly identified all sources of supply and demand and have specified all sources in the supply and demand inclusion rules. - Review the formulas for determining supply and demand and available to promise. See Reviewing Supply and Demand Information and Reviewing Performance Information.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

521

Inventory Management

4051

J.D. Edwards & Company Supply and Demand

Page Date

10 04/04/98

Item Number. . . M001

Markette Red Highlighter

Unit of Measure. .

Request Branch Location Lot Dema Supply Available Date Order No Ty Description / Vendor Name 30 18,919 18,919 On Hand Balance 30 17,919 Available to Promise 30 1,000 17,919 01/04/98 801 ST Sales Order 30 1,200 19,119 06/01/98 2410 OP Value Worldwide Paper Sup 30 300 06/01/98 Available to Promise 30 1,500 17,619 06/18/98 19254 SO Sales Order 30 600 18,219 06/30/98 2007 OP Vector Manufacturing Co 30 600 18,819 06/30/98 2008 OP Vector Manufacturing Co 30 9,800 06/30/98 Available to Promise 30 1,000 17,819 07/10/98 18972 SO Sales Order 30 10,000 7,819 08/05/98 1883 SO Sales Order

Processing Options for Supply/Demand Report

Inventory Options: 1. Enter a 1 to deduct Safety Stock from Availability. 2. Enter a 1 by the following Routing Quantities to be considered on hand. Any quantity not included will be displayed on the appropriate date. 1 Quantity in Transit 2 Quantity in Inspection 3 User Defined Quantity 1 4 User Defined Quantity 2 3. Enter a 1 to summarize all In Receipt Routing Steps into one line. Inventory Options (Cont.): 4. Enter a 1 to summarize the Item Balance Quantity records. 5. Enter the thru date for the period of transactions to appear on the report. If left blank, all transactions will be printed. 6. Enter the version of Supply/Demand Inclusion Rules to be used for processing. Print Options: 7. Enter one of the following: = No ATP Line 1 = ATP Line 2 = Cumulative ATP Line Optional Records: 8. Enter a 1 to print Planned Orders from the MRP/MPS/DRP generations. If left blank, Planned Orders will not print. ____________

____________

522

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Review Inventory Analysis Reports

9. Enter the Forecast Type(s) to be included. Up to 5 types can be included, if left blank the program will not include any Types. Example, for types 01,02, & BF enter 0102BF etc. 10. Enter the number of days (+/-) from todays date that you wish to begin including Forecast records. A blank will use todays date to begin including Forecast records. 11. Enter a 1 to omit Bulk Stocking Type records from report. Blank is the default and Bulk record types will be printed. 12. Enter the Rate Base Schedule Type to be included on the Supply/Demand report. If left blank, Rate Based Items will not appear. 13. Enter the Unit of Measure you would like to appear on the report. If left blank, Primary units will be used. Potency: 14. Enter 1 to display all quantities at Standard Potency Lot Expiration: 15. Enter 1 to reduce quantity available due to lot expiration. (Note: This option will not work with ATP. If this option has to work Option 7 must be set to blank or 2).

____________

Printing Stock Tags

You can print generic DREAM Writer stock tags for inventory in the warehouse. The stock tags include bar codes for the item, location, and lot.

Before You Begin

- To print bar code information, verify that you have a printer capable of printing from an Intelligent Printer Data Stream (IPDS) device file. - Set the Intelligent Printer Y/N field on DREAM Writer Printer File Overrides to Y.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

523

Inventory Management

STOCK TAG 12/9/98 12:15:42 Item Number. . P002 Branch/Plant . 40 Description. . Green Bar Continuous Form Lot. . . . . . Location . . . 3 .C . Qty On-Hand. . 150 CR

Processing Options for Stock Tags

Report Display: 1. Enter the item/location quantity to be printed on the tags: 1 = On-hand quantity 2 = On-hand + inbound outbound committed. (Warehouse Management users) If left blank, only the on-hand quantity will print. 2. Enter a 1 to print bar code information. 3. If printing bar codes, enter a 1 to print bar codes for blank lots. ____________ ____________ ____________

524

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Review Inventory Integrity Reports

G41

Inventory Management Choose Inventory Master/Transactions

G41111

Inventory Reports Choose an option under the Integrity/Audit Reports heading

Reviewing Inventory Integrity Reports

Inventory integrity reports provide information about discrepancies between item and accounting information. Complete the following tasks: - Review the Item Ledger/Account Integrity report - Review the Item Balance/Ledger Integrity report

Reviewing the Item Ledger/Account Integrity Report

Item Ledger/Account Integrity is a DREAM Writer report that displays discrepancies between the Item Ledger (F4111) and Account Ledger (F0911) tables. The report displays the following types of discrepancies: Item ledger detail exists with no corresponding general ledger detail. Item ledger does not balance with the corresponding general ledger detail. The report displays summary lines that represent specific totals: Document type Document number Key company

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

525

Inventory Management

The report also displays the solution to the discrepancies. A blank report indicates that there are no discrepancies. You must use the following data sequence: Document type Document Document company

Before You Begin

- Verify that exception rules are set up.

41543

J.D. Edwards & Company Item Ledger/Account Integrity

Page . . . Date . . .

2 4/05/98

From 06/01/98

To 06/30/98

Document Key . . . . . . Amount . . . . . . G/L Error Type/Number Co Item Ledger Account Ledger Variance Date Number IA 1500 100 3,535.00 11,200.00 7,665.00 06/30/98 3038 II 1 100 10.21 52.00 41.79 06/30/98 3038 II 3 100 5.37 30.47 25.10 06/30/98 3038 IT 127 100 143.85 143.85 06/30/98 3038 JE 1504 100 415,340.00 2,088,705.00 1,673,365.00 06/01/98 3038 OP 2284 13,750.00 13,750.00 06/30/98 3036 OP 2292 722,000.00 722,000.00 06/30/98 3036 OP 2364 11,880.84 11,880.84 06/30/98 3036 OP 2401 6,950.00 6,950.00 06/01/98 3036 OP 2410 1,225.08 1,225.08 06/30/98 3036 OP 2444 168.75 168.75 06/30/98 3036 OP 2516 100 4,395.73 4,395.73 06/14/98 3036 OP 2559 100 17,442.00 17,442.00 06/15/98 3036 OP 2591 100 17,280.00 17,280.00 06/15/98 3036 OP 2604 100 840.25 840.25 06/03/98 3036 OP 2621 100 06/15/98 3036

Error Message Item Ledger and G/L do not balance Item Ledger and G/L do not balance Item Ledger and G/L do not balance Item Ledger and G/L do not balance Item Ledger and G/L do not balance No existing General Ledger records No existing General Ledger records No existing General Ledger records No existing General Ledger records No existing General Ledger records No existing General Ledger records No existing General Ledger records No existing General Ledger records No existing General Ledger records No existing General Ledger records No existing General Ledger records

41544

J.D. Edwards & Company Item Variance

Page . . . Date . . .

2 7.05.96

Branch/Plant . .

10 Modesto Distribution Center

. . . . . . Quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Amount . . . . . . . . Percent Item Location Lot or Item Balance Item Ledger Variance Item Balance Item Ledger Variance Variance M001 . . 4893 4893 2.691,15 3.344,15 653,00 19,52 E001 . . 5000 10000 5000 32.050,00 32.050,00 TS001 . . 250 125 125 12.562,50 12.562,50 TS002 . . 346 173 173 14.919,52 14.919,52 TS002 1 .C .1 240 264 24 10.440,00 10.440,00 V001 1 .A .1 9310140004 100 100 1.600,00 1.615,00 15,00 0,92 DRP1 . . 22 500 522 110,00 2.500,00 2.610,00 104,40 DRP2 . . 57 1000 1057 342,00 6.000,00 6.342,00 105,70 DRP3 . . 1 100 101 7,00 700,00 707,00 101,00 D1091 . . 27 27 271,59 271,59 372OAK . . 36 36 3.254,26 3.254,26 CRT CHASSIS . . 43 43 5.009,50 5.009,50 AMBER SCREEN . . 23 23 1.380,00 1.380,00 GREEN SCREEN . . 28 28 1.680,00 1.680,00 CRT LOCK . . 53 53 1.166,00 1.166,00 KEYBOARD 3180 . . 25 25 1.050,00 1.050,00 KEYBOARD AT . . 23 23 966,00 966,00 CABLE CONNECTORS . . 44 44 792,00 792,00 CRT CRATE . . 52 52 1.508,00 1.508,00 MIN001 . . 24360 12180 12180 21.315,00 18.315,00 3.000,00 16,38

529

Inventory Management

Processing Options for Item Ledger to Item Balance Integrity Report

Report Display: 1. Enter a Y to print all items on the report. Enter an N to print only those items with a variance. If left blank, an N will default. 2. Enter the variance percent which will cause only items above this percent to print. If left blank, all variance items will print. ____________

____________

Processing: 3. Enter the costing method you want used to calculate the unit cost for each item. If left blank, the costing method for each item will be retrieved from the Cost Ledger (F4105).

____________

530

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Review Inventory Audit Reports

G41

Inventory Management Choose Inventory Master/Transactions

G41111

Inventory Reports Choose an option under the Integrity/Audit Reports heading

Reviewing Inventory Audit Reports

Inventory audit reports contain the results of the audit process. The audit process monitors and records changes to item master and item/branch information. For example, if you enter or change an item in the Item Master table (F4101), the system stores both the old and new information in the Item Master Audit table (F41019). If you change an items location in the Item/Branch table (F4102), the system stores both the old and new information in the Item Branch Audit table (F41029). It is important to understand the meaning of change in the audit process. For example, a change could represent any of the following actions: Addition of a record or field Change to a record or field Deletion of a record or field The audit reports display these changes. In addition, the reports provide information such as who made the change, when the change took place, and from where. You cannot change the data sequencing for the audit reports. The system sequences records by item number. However, based on your data selection, you can display records by: Cost center Item Date Time

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

531

Inventory Management

Complete the following tasks: - Review the Item Master Audit report - Review the Item Branch Audit report

What You Should Know About

Purging records You must purge records to control the size of the reports. See Purging Data for information on purging the audit tables. Entering new information After you enter new information to the item master or item branch, the system records the information and prints it on the report. However, the report does not list information in the from column because the information did not previously exist.

Reviewing the Item Master Audit Report

Item Master Audit is a DREAM Writer report that lists the changes that personnel have made to item master information.

532

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Review Inventory Audit Reports

410199

A Model Financial Co (Trng) Item Master Audit Report

Page . . . Date . . .

2 4/29/98

Item Stn ID Item Number Job No. A Date Time User Program Work 333 701552 C 04/29/98 13:43:20 SL288278 P4101 V3197JI53 To 00007165 333 SHELF UNIT OAK SHELF UNIT SHELF SHELF OFS FRN OFS 999 00008200 12287 EA EA EA EA EA EA EA LB VOL IN20 3 3 3 N Y P N N M S Y EC ENG455 A A A N 00009200 1 R 00003 1 000000000000100 G F I N 001

Description From Item Number (Short). . . . . . 00000000 2nd Item Number. . . . . . . . 3rd Item Number. . . . . . . . Description. . . . . . . . . . Search Text. . . . . . . . . . Search Text Compressed . . . Sales Catalog Section. . . . . Sub Section. . . . . . . . . . Commodity Class. . . . . . . . Master Planning Family . . . . Buyer Number . . . . . . . . . 00000000 Drawing Number . . . . . . . . Unit of Measure. . . . . . . . Secondary UOM. . . . . . . . . Purchasing UOM . . . . . . . . Pricing UOM. . . . . . . . . . Shipping UOM . . . . . . . . . Production UOM . . . . . . . . Component UOM. . . . . . . . . Unit of Measure Weight . . . Cycle Count Category . . . . . G/L Category . . . . . . . . . Sales Price Level. . . . . . . Purchase Price Level . . . . . Inventory Cost Level . . . . . Grade/Potency Pricing. . . . . Check Availability Y/N . . . . Bulk/Packed Flag . . . . . . . Potency Control. . . . . . . . Grade Control. . . . . . . . . Stocking Type. . . . . . . . . Line Type. . . . . . . . . . . Backorders Allowed (Y/N) . . . Item Flash Message . . . . . . Print Message. . . . . . . . . ABC Code 1 Sales . . . . . . ABC Code 2 Margin. . . . . . ABC Code 3 Investment. . . . Serial No. Required. . . . . . Planner Number . . . . . . . . 00000000 Planning Code. . . . . . . . . Round to Whole Number. . . . . Leadtime Level . . . . . . . . 00000 Order Policy Code. . . . . . . Accounting Cost Quantity . . . 000000000000000 Planning Fence Rule. . . . . . Fixed/Variable Leadtime. . . . Issue Type Code. . . . . . . . Order With (Y/N) . . . . . . . Low Level Code . . . . . . . . 000

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

533

Inventory Management

Reviewing the Item Branch Audit Report

Item Branch Audit is a DREAM Writer report that lists the changes that personnel have made to item branch information.

410299

A Model Financial Co (Trng) Item Branch Audit Report

Page . . . Date . . .

2 4/29/98

Item Branch Stn ID Item Number Plant Job No. A Date Time User Program Work 1001 30 701552 C 04/29/98 13:41:58 SL288278 P41026 V3197JI53 To 00001001 1001 P100PPS41 30 SPO IMP OFC PEN 00004345 IN30 Y N N Y C C C S N Y Y 1 N 1

Description From Item Number (Short). . . . . . 00000000 2nd Item Number. . . . . . . . 3rd Item Number. . . . . . . . Business Unit. . . . . . . . . Sales Catalog Section. . . . . Landed Cost Rule . . . . . . . Warehouse Process Grp 1. . . . Warehouse Process Grp 2. . . . Primary / Last Supplier Number 00000000 G/L Category . . . . . . . . . Check Availability Y/N . . . . Potency Control. . . . . . . . Grade Control. . . . . . . . . Backorders Allowed (Y/N) . . . ABC Code 1 Sales . . . . . . ABC Code 2 Margin. . . . . . ABC Code 3 Investment. . . . Stocking Type. . . . . . . . . Serial No. Required. . . . . . Purchasing Taxable (Y/N) . . . Sales Taxable. . . . . . . . . Net Change Flag. . . . . . . . Order With (Y/N) . . . . . . . Commitment Method. . . . . . .

534

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Review Inventory Audit Reports

Test Yourself: Item and Quantity Information and Reports

The answers to this Test Yourself exercise are in Appendix B. 1. How does J.D. Edwards software calculate availability? ____________________________________________________________

2. Name four quantity fields that are available in the Branch/Plant Location table (F41021). ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

3. What is the default method that J.D. Edwards uses for inventory commitment processing? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

4. What information is displayed on Item Ledger (The Cardex)?

5. What affects an items on-hand quantity?

6. What is the significance of the running balance format for Item Ledger Inquiry? ____________________________________________________________

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

535

Inventory Management

7. Which form would you use for direct access to other forms when you are researching transaction or item information? ____________________________________________________________

8. Which form would you use to review past sales, current demand, and open purchases for an item? ____________________________________________________________

9. Which form would you use to analyze current inventory statuses or to provide a customer with a ship date? ____________________________________________________________

10. How can you set up items that are used for substitutions, associated items, or customer/vendor item numbers in Sales and Purchase Management? ____________________________________________________________

11. What is the benefit of building the As Of table?

12. What is the number of the As Of table? ____________________________________________________________

13. Besides the Item Ledger (The Cardex), which programs access the As Of table? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

536

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Review Inventory Audit Reports

14. How often should you refresh the As Of table? ____________________________________________________________

15. Why doesnt the refresh program duplicate transactions in the As Of table but instead adds any new records? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

16. Which report provides a list of items with list prices and discount prices? ____________________________________________________________

17. Which report lists variances of current transaction costs as they compare to the current cost? ____________________________________________________________

18. Which report lets you review your current costs as they compare to the sales price of current transactions? ____________________________________________________________

19. Which report lets you analyze trends in your environment and inventory costs? ____________________________________________________________

20. Which reports list discrepancies between the item ledger (F4111) amounts and the G/L ledger (F0911) amounts? ____________________________________________________________

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

537

Inventory Management

538

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Periodic

Inventory Management

540

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Physical Inventories
Objectives
To understand the methods for keeping accurate inventory

About Physical Inventories

Accurate inventories help you: Reduce backorders Reduce dollars invested in inventory Reduce downtime attributed to stock outages Increase ontime deliveries Complete the following tasks: - Process a cycle count - Process a tag count You can use both cycle and tag counts to satisfy a variety of needs. Both help you to reconcile your online inventory records and physical inventory. A cycle count is the item-based method of counting. Using the cycle count process, you select items to be counted at various intervals throughout the year. A tag count is the location-based method of counting. It is designed for an end-of-year, wall-to-wall physical inventory.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Process a Cycle Count

G41

Inventory Management Choose Inventory Count Alternatives

G4121

Inventory Count Alternatives Choose an option

Processing a Cycle Count

A cycle count is the item-based method of counting inventory. You record data such as item numbers, descriptions, and locations on printed inventory count sheets, which you later use to update the online inventory records. The cycle count method allows you to: Group items to be counted at specific intervals throughout the year Track variances Reduce costs and backorders Consider using a cycle count in conjunction with a tag count to ensure accuracy. Complete the following tasks: - Run the Select Items for Count program - Review the cycle count - Print cycle count sheets - Canceling the cycle count - Enter the cycle count results - Review the cycle count variances

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

- Revise the cycle count quantity - Print the variance report - Update the cycle count status

Before You Begin

- Read Item Ledger (The Cardex) and Item Setup for Branches and Plants for setup information. - Verify that the following AAIs are set up: AAI table 4152, which provides the inventory account to offset against any count variance. AAI table 4154, which provides the cost of goods sold account to update. - Define the selection criteria with the cycle count category code or ABC Analysis code. - Identify which items to count by reviewing the fields in the Item Branch (F4102) or Item Location (F41021) tables. - Specify status codes in the processing options to further specify the information that displays.

Running the Select Items for Count Program

Before you start the cycle count process, you must run the Select Items for Count program. Select Items for Count is a DREAM Writer program that builds a record for each inventory item to be counted and records the current on-hand quantity and cost for each item. Next, the system generates the Items Selected for Count report, which lets you compare your actual on-hand quantity with the online records. The system processes the information as follows: Selects items to be counted based on your data selection Copies the current onhand balance to the Quantity Onhand at Count field in the Cycle Count Transaction table (F4141) Creates a cycle count header in the Cycle Count Header table (F4140) that contains the status codes for the processes that have been completed for Cycle Count items

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Process a Cycle Count

Updates the following data in the Cycle Count Detail table for each item in the selected locations: Item information Quantity on-hand Amount on-hand

Produces a report, Selected Items for Cycle Count, that lists the selected items for each location and the item quantity onhand at the time of the count

You can group items by: Cycle count categories (for example, monthly and semiannually) ABC codes (for example, count A" items monthly)

You cannot change the following sequence for the Items Selected for Count report: Item number- (short) Lot Location

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

41411

J.D. Edwards & Company Items Selected for Count

Page . . . Date . . .

2 7.05.98

Cycle Count Number . . . 226 Cycle Count Description. ALL ITEMS Item 1001 1001 1001 P001 M001 P002 P002 M002 E001 E001 M003 S001 S002 TS001 STEREO TS002 TS002 RECEIVER SPEAKERS V001 V001 V001 V001 CD FEATURE V002 CDSINGLE LOAD CD5 DISK TRAY TAPE DECK WIRING KIT DRP1 DRP2 DRP3 1200 3106000 2312 2309 18163000J3 20010000 56089000 70089010 23/1200 99000000 1122 2434 2556 2556 2556 2556 2556 2556 2556 2556 2556 2556 Description Branch Location Pen & Pencil Set 30 . . Pen & Pencil Set 30 1 .B .1 Pen & Pencil Set 30 1 .B .2 Premium Xerographic Paper 30 . . Markette Red Highlighter 30 . . Green Bar Continuous Form 30 . . Green Bar Continuous Form 30 1 .B .1 Markette Blue Highlighter 30 . . Commercial Business Envelope 30 . . Commercial Business Envelope 30 DA.MAG.ED Markette Green Highlighter 30 . . Front Loading Stapler 30 . . Stanley Staple Remover 30 . . Issel Pump Court Shoes 30 . . JDE STEREO SYSTEM 30 . . AirShaq Childrens XTrainer 30 . . AirShaq Childrens XTrainer 30 1 .C .1 350 Channel Mega Watt 30 . . Dual Tower Speakers Black 30 . . Natureway High Energy Vitamins 30 . . Natureway High Energy Vitamins 30 1 .A .1 Natureway High Energy Vitamins 30 1 .A .2 Natureway High Energy Vitamins 30 1 .A .1 CD Options for Stereo system 30 . . Natureway High Energy Vitamins 30 . . Compact Disk single load 30 . . Compact Disk 5 Disk Tray 30 . . High Density Dual Head Deck 30 . . Wiring package for Stereo 30 . . Napa Valley Cassette Box 30 . . Napa Valley CD Box 30 . . Napa Valley VCR Box 30 . . Model 1200 Security System 30 . . 1200 Base Unit 30 . . 12 Volt Battery Backup 30 . . 9 Volt Battery Backup 30 . . Inline Breakers 30 . . Magnetic Breakers 30 . . No Service Key Pad 30 . . Three Service Key Pad 30 . . 1200 Baud Monitor Modem 30 . . Wire 30 . . CRT AS/400 Compatible 30 . . CRT Chassis Subassembly 30 . . Printed Circuit Board 12227 30 . . Printed Circuit Board 12227 30 . . Printed Circuit Board 12227 30 . . Printed Circuit Board 12227 30 . . Printed Circuit Board 12227 30 . . Printed Circuit Board 12227 30 . . Printed Circuit Board 12227 30 . . Printed Circuit Board 12227 30 . . Printed Circuit Board 12227 30 . . Printed Circuit Board 12227 30 . . Lot or On Hand 3870 16 16 16188 18819 305 50 21918 13445 10 17560 775 2900 1469 1467 350 950 1900 18050 1 10

00000004 00000005 00000006

5245 930 1870 950 950 22 2957 1254

CB980001 CB980002 CB980003 CB980004 CB980005 CB980006 CB980007 CB980008 CB980009

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Processing Options for Select Items for Cycle Count

Default Values: 1. Enter the Cycle Count Description ____________

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Process a Cycle Count

Reviewing the Cycle Count Status

Before you perform the cycle count, review the online status of each cycle count and access detailed information, such as descriptions of each item in the count. To review the cycle count status

On Cycle Count Review

1. To select the cycle count information that you want to review, complete the following fields: Date From Date Through 2. Access Cycle Count Detail Review for each cycle count number.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

Field Date From Date Thru

Explanation The beginning date in the date range. This is the date starting with which you want the system to display information. The ending date in the date range. This is the date through which you want the system to display information. If you leave this field blank, the system uses the current period.

What You Should Know About

Cycle status The status codes that appear in the Cycle Status field default from the processing options. You can change the status code entries at any time for reviewing the cycle status.

Processing Options for Cycle Count Review

Default Values: 1. From Status Code 2. Thru Status Code Cycle Count Print (P41410): 3. Enter the DREAM Writer Version of Cycle Count Print to execute. (Default is Version ZJDE0001.) ____________ ____________ ____________

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Process a Cycle Count

Cycle Count Detail Print (P41403P): 4. Enter the DREAM Writer Version of Cycle Count Detail Print to execute from the Cycle Count Detail Inquiry (Default is Version ZJDE0001.) Cycle Count Update (P41413): 5. Enter the DREAM Writer Version of Cycle Count Update to Execute. (Default is Version ZJDE0001.) Cycle Count Entry (P4141): 6. Enter the DREAM Writer Version of Cycle Count Entry to Execute for Sequencing. 001- By Item, Brn, Location, Lot 002- By Brn, Location, Lot 003- By Sales Reporting Codes (Default is Version ZJDE0001.)

____________

Printing Cycle Count Sheets

After you choose the items to include in the cycle count and have reviewed them online, you can print the cycle count sheets that you will use to perform the actual count. Run the Print Cycle Count Sheets DREAM Writer program to print information from the Cycle Count table (F4141) on the count sheets. You must specify the count number that you want to print. The system uses the DREAM Writer version you specified in the processing options. J. D. Edwards recommends that you use the following sequence on the Print Cycle Count Sheet report: Cycle Count Number Item Number Branch/Plant

What You Should Know About

Status After you print the count sheets, the Status field displays Canceled.

Processing Options for Inventory Count Sheet

Print Options: 1. Enter a 1 to print non-cancelled cycle sheets. If left blank, all cycle sheets will be printed. ____________

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

Canceling the Cycle Count

You can cancel a cycle count at any time before you update it. For example, if there are several days between the time that you print cycle count sheets and actually perform the cycle count, you can cancel the cycle count and reprint it later.

What You Should Know About

Status After you cancel the cycle count number, the Status field displays Canceled.

Entering the Cycle Count Results

After you have performed the cycle count and recorded the information on the cycle count sheets, transfer the results to your online inventory records. To enter the cycle count results

On Cycle Count Review 1. Access Cycle Count Entry.

2. Locate a cycle count.

610

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Process a Cycle Count

3. Complete the following field to replace the count for a particular item, if necessary: Quantity

Field Quantity Physical Count

Explanation The number of units that the system counts in the primary unit of measure.

What You Should Know About

New location When you enter a new location, the system creates a new branch/plant record and a variance for the entire quantity/amount.

Processing Options for Inventory Count Entry and Additions

Single Cycle Count Sequencing: 1. Enter one of the following for sequencing : 1 Sequence by Item Number, Branch, Location and Lot. 2 Sequence by Branch, Location, and Lot. 3 Sequence by Sales Reporting Codes 1-5. ____________

Reviewing the Cycle Count Variances

After you enter the results of the cycle count, the system automatically calculates variances. A variance is the difference between the on-hand quantity and the counted quantity. Use the information to help you resolve discrepancies online. You can review the following information for each item: Onhand quantity Counted quantity Variance The system records variances to the Item Ledger (F4111), Account Ledger (F0911), and Location Balance (F4102) tables.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

611

Inventory Management

To review the cycle count variances

On Cycle Count Detail Review 1. Use the Replace Count function to access Cycle Count Detail Review. 2. To select the variances that you want to review, complete the following fields: Variance Type Rel (Relationship) Amt (Amount) Amount Type

Field Type Variance Relationship

Explanation A code that indicates whether the system displays a quantity variance or an amount variance. The relationship between the range of variances you display. Valid codes are: EQ Equal to LT Less than LE Less than or equal to GT Greater than GE Greater than or equal to NE Not equal to NL Not less than NG Not greater than CT Contains (only allowed in selection for Open Query File function) CU Same as CT but converts all input data to upper case letters A number that indicates the relative size of the variance you want to display. The number can be either a percentage or an amount, depending on the Variance Type. A code that determines whether the variance is an amount or a percentage variance from the expected quantity or amount.

Amount Variance

Type Variance Amount or Percent

612

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Process a Cycle Count

Revising the Cycle Count Quantity

After you enter and review your cycle variance information, you might decide to recount some items and subsequently revise the cycle count quantity. After you recount and revise, you can review variances again, both online and through the Detail Variance Print report (P41403P). You can revise the cycle count quantity using one of the following methods: Replace the count Add and subtract quantities If you are counting by item location, replacing the count is the preferable method. To replace the count

On Cycle Count Entry Complete the following field with the Replace Count option: O (Option) To add and subtract quantities

On Cycle Count Entry Complete the following field: Quantity

Field Quantity Physical Count

Explanation The number of units that the system counts in the primary unit of measure.

See Also
Entering the Cycle Count Results (P4141)

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

613

Inventory Management

Printing the Variance Report

You can print a report of the variances between the results of the cycle count and the inventory records to resolve discrepancies.

41403P

J.D. Edwards & Company Detail Variance Print

Page Date

2 4/12/98

Cycle Count Number . . .

190 ALL ITEMS

Variance Type. . Relationship . . Variance Amount. Amount Type. . .

. . . .

Q GE 5 %

Physical Physical Perpetual Perpetual Variance Variance Item Number Description UM Quantity Amount Quantity Amount Quantity Amount DRP1 Napa Valley Cassette EA 25 125.00 22 110.00 3 1500.00 Branch/Plant 30 Location . . . . . Lot 2nd Item Number. . . . . . . . 3 15.00

Cycle Count Number . . . . . .

3 15.00

Processing Options for Print Variance Detail

Variance Selection Information: 1. Enter one of the following Q to select on Quantity Variance A to select on Amount Variance 2. Enter the Relation to use for the Variance selection. ie GT 3. Enter the Quantity or Amount to used to compare the variance to for selection. 4. Enter one of the following: % to compare the Percent Variance A to compare the unit variance ____________

____________ ____________

____________

Updating the Cycle Count Status

After you enter and review your cycle count and have it approved by the appropriate person, you must update the cycle count status, which the system stores in the Location Balance table (F4102).

614

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Process a Cycle Count

To update the cycle count status

On Cycle Count Review Complete the following field with the Update option: O (option)

Field Selection Exits

Explanation Selection exit codes are options and function keys that are used to perform a specific function for a selected line or form of data. The most commonly used selection exits for each program are displayed in highlighted text at the bottom of the form. To display all available selection exits, press F24. Press F1 in the Option field to display all available Options for the program.

Processing Options for Update Cycle Count

General Ledger Date: 1. Enter the General Ledger Date for processing the Update. If blank Todays Date will default. Next Count Date Calculation: 2. Enter a 1 to calculate the Next Count Date based on the Cycle Count Category. If blank the ABC Codes will be used. File Update: 3. Enter a 1 if you wish to delete the Detail Records from the Cycle Count file (F4141). If blank the records will not be deleted. 4. Enter a 1 if you wish to write Item Ledger records (F4111) when the variance is zero. ____________

____________

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

615

Inventory Management

616

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Process a Tag Count

G41

Inventory Management Choose Inventory Count Alternatives

G4121

Inventory Count Alternatives Choose the appropriate function

Processing a Tag Count

A tag count is the method for counting all items in a location. When you perform a tag count, you physically tag and count all items twice by location, typically at the end of the year. That is, two teams independently perform the same physical inventory and record their data on two different parts of the tag. Later, you use each teams data to compare results and resolve variances. Consider using a tag count in conjunction with a cycle count to ensure accuracy. Complete the following tasks: - Run the Select Items for Count program - Print inventory tags - Record tag distribution information - Record tag receipt information - Enter the tag count results - Review the tag status - Review the tag count variances

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

617

Inventory Management

- Run the Quantity Count Comparison - Run tag count updates

See Also
Processing a Cycle Count (P41411) if you are considering processing both cycle and tag counts

Running the Select Items for Count Program

Before you start the tag count process, you must run the Select Items for Count program. Select Items for Count is a DREAM Writer program that builds a record for each inventory item to be counted and records the current on-hand quantity and cost for each item.

What You Should Know About

Excluding stock from a tag Exclude the following stocking types because they represent count non-stock items: K (kits) F (features) Any other user defined stocking types

Printing Inventory Tags

Although you can print tags at any time, you typically print tags at the beginning of the tag count process and distribute them to the teams who are counting items. Run the Print Inventory Tags DREAM Writer program to print inventory tags for each location. The tag is a two-part form that includes the following information: Branch/plant Date printed Tag number You can vary the tags format to accommodate your business needs. The system stores the tag number and tag status in the Tag Inventory table (F4160).

618

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Process a Tag Count

41607

J.D. Edwards & Company Print Inventory Tags

Number Date Brn

21 7.05.98 30

Item : _____________________ Desc : _ Location :

Counted Qty: _____ Counted UOM: _ Lot : _______

Remarks : ______ Count Date : _ Counted By : _______

========================================================================== Number 21 Date 7.05.98 Brn 30 Item : _________________________________________ Desc : _________________________________________ Location : ____________________ Counted Qty: ___________ Counted UOM: ___________ Lot : ___________

Remarks : ________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________ Date Order Person In Out __________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ __________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ __________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________ __________ _______________ _______________ _______________ _______________

Processing Options for Tag Print

1.Enter the number of Tags you wish to print. 2.Enter the Branch/Plant to print on the Tags. ____________ ____________

Recording Tag Distribution Information

Before you distribute tags to the teams, you must record who is responsible for each tag number. You use this information to track: Who tagged each item Who returned the parts of each tag

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

619

Inventory Management

To record tag distribution information

On Tag Issues and Receipts

Complete the following fields: Brn/Plt (Branch/Plant) From Tag To Tag Status New Status Tag Team ID Is (Tag Team Identification Issued) Tag Team ID Re (Tag Team Identification Received)

Field Branch/Plant

620

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Process a Tag Count

Field From Tag

Explanation A number that the system assigns to the tag using the Print Tag program, based on the next available tag number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In the From Tag field, this is the beginning tag number. If you enter a tag number in this field, the system displays the tags that are equal to or past this number.

To Tag

A number that the system assigns to a specific location that contains inventory. The Tag Count facility within the inventory system allows for the use of pre-numbered multi-part tags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The ending tag number. If you enter a number in this field, the system displays the tags that are equal to or past the beginning tag number and equal to or before the ending tag number.

Tag Status New Tag Status

The code (UDC table 41/TS) for the status of a tag in the tag inventory count process. A code that indicates the tag status (such as Closed or Issued) to which the system will update a tag or group of tags. The address book number of the individual or team that you issued the tags to.

Tag Team ID Issued

What You Should Know About

Entering additional tags You cannot enter additional tags to an existing group. Print a new group of sequentially-numbered tags using the Print Inventory Tags program. See Printing Inventory Tags for more information.

Deleting tags

You cannot delete tags on Tag Issues and Receipts because all tag numbers must be accounted for. You can, however, change the status of a tag to DS (destroyed) to indicate that the tag should not be used.

Additions to and movement of inventory

Inform personnel of receipts, shipments, and item breakage that occur during the count. Counters must record by location all items that are added and moved during the count.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

621

Inventory Management

Recording Tag Receipt Information

After you receive the tags back from the counters, you need to record the following information: The team who returned the tag The tag number from the team To record tag receipt information

On Tag Issues and Receipts Complete the following fields: New Status Tag Team ID Re (Tag Team Identification Received)

Field Tag Team ID Received

Explanation The address book number of the individual or team that you received tags from.

Entering the Tag Count Results

After the count is complete, you must enter the information from each tag into the system. To enter the tag count results

On Tag Count Entry

622

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Process a Tag Count

Complete the following fields: Brn/Plt (Branch/Plant) Skip to Tag Tag No. (Tag Number) Item Number Quantity UM (Unit of Measure) Location Remark Lot

Field Skip to Tag

Explanation A number that the system assigns to a specific location that contains inventory. The Tag Count facility within the inventory system allows for the use of pre-numbered multi-part tags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In the Skip to Tag field, this is the tag number you want the system to display. For example, if you enter 5, the system displays only the tags numbered 5 and above.

Tag Number

A number that the system assigns to the tag using the Print Tag program, based on the next available tag number.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

623

Inventory Management

Field Item Number Unit of Measure

Explanation A number that the system assigns to an item. It can be in short, long, or 3rd item number format. A user defined code (system 00/ type UM) that indicates in what quantity an inventory item is expressed; for example, CS (case) or BX (box). A code that identifies inventory locations in a branch/plant. You define the format of the location identifier by branch/plant (P410012). A generic field that you use for a remark, description, name, or address. A number that identifies a lot or a serial number. A lot is a group of items with similar characteristics.

Location

Name Remark Lot

Processing Options for Tag Inventory Count Entry

1. Enter the Statuses that a Tag can be at to be valid for change. Status One Status Two Status Three Status Four 2. Enter a 1 to default Location and Lot from the Primary Location. 3. Enter a 1 to allow for the addition of secondary location records.

Reviewing the Tag Status

You can review the current status of any tag to check for lost or incomplete tags. Complete the following tasks: Review tag status Review tag status summary

624

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Process a Tag Count

To review the tag status

On Tag Status Review Complete the following fields: Brn/Plt (Branch/Plant) Tag Status From Tag To Tag Item Number Issued to

Field Tag Team ID Issued

Explanation The address book number of the individual or team that you issued the tags to.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

625

Inventory Management

To review tag status summary

On Tag Status Review 1. Access Tag Status Summary.

2. Complete the following field: Brn/Plt (Branch/Plant)

626

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Process a Tag Count

Reviewing the Tag Count Variances

After you enter the results of the tag count, you can review the variance between the amount and cost of inventory online and the amount of inventory that the teams counted. To review the tag count variances

On Tag Variance Review

Inventory Management

See Also
Assigning Cost Methods to Items (P4105) for information about assigning an item's sales/inventory cost method

Updating Costs for an Item across Multiple Branch/Plants

You can update costs for a single item across multiple branch/plants, locations, and lots. You select the cost method for which you want to update item costs. For example, you can update an items last-in costs, average costs, and so on. Changes you make to costs take place immediately. You can increase or decrease costs by: A specified amount A specified percentage You can also enter a new dollar amount to override the previous cost. To update costs for an item across multiple branch/plants

On Cost Revisions

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Update Item Costs

1. To locate current cost information for an item, complete the following fields: Item Number Branch/Plant (if applicable) Cost Method to Update 2. Complete the following fields: Increase/Decrease Amount Amount Type (A % *) Unit Cost

Field Cost Method Increase/Decrease Amount

Explanation A user defined code (system 40, type CM) that identifies a cost method. Cost methods 01 through 08 are hard-coded. The dollar amount or percentage by which you want to increase or decrease unit costs for items. You can also indicate a dollar amount to override current unit costs. The value you specify in the Amount Type field determines whether you enter a dollar amount or a percentage. Note: Enter percentages as whole numbers. For example, enter 10 to increase costs by 10%. To decrease costs, enter a negative sign before the number. For example, enter 10 to decrease costs by 10%. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All costs for all locations are changed.

Amount Type (A % *)

A code that indicates whether the number in the Increase/Decrease Amount field is a dollar amount or a percentage value. Codes are: A Amount % Percentage * Cost Override Amount

Unit Cost

The amount per unit (the total cost divided by the unit quantity). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The cost for one unit of this item, based on the corresponding cost method.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

What You Should Know About

Information that displays The information that displays on Speed Cost Maintenance depends on the cost level for the item. For example, if an item has a cost level of 2, the system displays costs for all branch/plants. If an item has a cost level of 3, the system displays costs for all locations at the branch/plant you specify. See Assigning a Cost Level to an Item (P4101) for information about cost levels for items.

Processing Options for Speed Cost Maintenance

Display Control: 1. Enter a 1 for Speed Cost Update. If left blank, the screen will default to Item Cost Revisions. Default Values: 2. Enter the default cost method to display when the Speed Cost Update format is selected. Process Control: 3. Enter a 1 to prevent the standard cost from being changed. ____________

____________

Updating Costs for Multiple Items across Multiple Branch/Plants

You can update costs for numerous items across multiple branch/plants, locations, and lots using the Batch Cost Maintenance DREAM Writer program. You can increase or decrease item costs by a specific amount or percentage, or, you can indicate a new cost. You can update item costs for the cost methods you select. For example, you can update last-in costs, weighted average costs, and so forth. You can preview your changes by running this program in proof mode and reviewing the report. After you are satisfied with the results, you can run the program in final mode.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Update Item Costs

41802

J. D. Edwards & Co Cost Revisions Update

Page Run Date

2 8/15/98

Item Number Branch/Plant Location Lot Number 1001 10 * * 1001 10 * * 1001 10 * * 1001 10 * * 1001 10 * * 1001 10 * * 1001 10 * * 1001 10 * * 1001 10 * * L1L1 1001 10 * * L1L1 1001 10 * * L1L1 1001 10 * * L11L11 1001 10 * * L11L11 1001 10 * * L11L11 1001 10 * * W1 1001 10 * * 010199 1001 10 * * 46522 1001 10 * * 46522 1001 10 A * * 1001 10 A * * 1001 10 A * * 11

OnHand Quantity 41000533983 41000533983 41000533983 41000533983 41000533983 41000533983

21 101

30030 30030

Um Old Cost New Cost Cost Method EA 10.0000 11.0000 01 Last In EA .1771 1.1771 02 Weighted Ave EA 20.0000 21.0000 03 Memo EA 10.0000 11.0000 06 Lot EA 7.0000 8.0000 07 Standard EA 250.0000 251.0000 99 Standard EA 12.0000 11.0000 01 Last In EA 12.0000 11.0000 01 Last In EA 77.0000 78.0000 02 Weighted Ave EA 10.0000 11.0000 06 Lot EA 75.0000 76.0000 20 Historical A EA 66.0000 67.0000 02 Weighted Ave EA 10.0000 11.0000 06 Lot EA 75.0000 76.0000 20 Historical A EA .0000 1.0000 02 Weighted Ave EA 45.0000 46.0000 02 Weighted Ave EA 14.0000 15.0000 03 Memo EA 10.0000 11.0000 07 Standard EA .0000 1.0000 01 Last In EA 69.9825 70.9825 02 Weighted Ave EA 40.0000 41.0000 08 PurchasingB

Processing Options for Batch Cost Maintenance

Cost Change Options: 1. Enter the cost change to use for update. (When entering a percentage, enter it as a whole number.) 2. Enter the cost change type. (A=Amount, %=Percent, *=Actual) Default Values: 3. Reason code. 4. Document Type. 5. General Ledger Date Report Control: 6. Enter a 1 to generate a report. If blank, no report will be generated. Update Option: 7. Enter a 1 to run this program in final update mode. If blank, this program will perform no file updates. ____________

____________

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

Updating Average Costs for Items

There are two methods you can use to update average costs for items: Interactive Batch To specify that the system updates average costs interactively, you use System Constants. To update average costs in batch mode, you use the Average Cost Update program. You specify the items, branch/plants, locations, and lots for which to update average costs. Each time a transaction affects the current cost of an item, the system updates the Average Cost Workfile. When you run the Average Cost Update program, the system: Accesses current cost information from the Average Cost Workfile (F41051) Calculates the average cost for each item Updates the Cost Ledger table (F4105) Deletes transactions from the workfile

What You Should Know About

Cost levels Before you run the Update Average Cost program, you should be familiar with the cost level of the items you want to update. For all items with a cost level 1, you must specify ALL for the branch/plant and locations. For all items with a cost level of 2, you specify ALL for the locations only. If you choose to run the update over items from all three cost levels, you should only select by item number. See Assigning a Cost Level to an Item (P4101) for information about cost levels for items. Updating the workfile You can specify the programs that update the workfile by using Define Average Cost, which contains user defined code table 40/AV.

See Also
Defining System Constants (P41001) for information about updating average costs interactively

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Update Item Costs

Updating Current Item Costs to Future Costs

You can replace current costs with future costs using the Future Cost Update DREAM Writer program. You choose the cost level of the items for which to update future costs.

After you run this program, the system prints a report that lists the new costs and the old costs. The report also lists any errors that detail invalid cost methods.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

710

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

41052

J.D. Edwards & Company Future Cost Update Cost Level Three Items Only

Page . . . Date . . .

3 4/04/98

Location . . 1 .B .1 1 .B .2

Lot

Item 1001 1001 1001 44557 1001 1001 P002 P002 P002 P002 TS002 V001 V001 V001 372OAK 1 .B . 1 .B 1 .B . D . . . . D . . 00000009 00000007 . . . 1 .B . . . . . . . .1 . . . . .2 . .1 .1 . . . . . . .

Description Pen & Pencil Set Pen & Pencil Set Pen & Pencil Set Calloway 4557 Pen & Pencil Set Pen & Pencil Set Green Bar Continuous Form Green Bar Continuous Form Green Bar Continuous Form Green Bar Continuous Form AirShaq Childrens XTrainer Natureway High Energy Vitamins Natureway High Energy Vitamins Natureway High Energy Vitamins Oak Filing Cabinet

. 1 .A 2 .A 3 .A . . . .

. . . .1 . . . .

Cost Method 01 01 02 07 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01

Branch Plant 30 30 30 S 30 40 10 20 40 40 40 40 40 40 10 DEN 10 27 30 30 20 27 30 40 M10 M20 M30 M40 10 10 10 10 20 27 30 40 M10 M20 M30 M40 20 27 30 M10 M20 M30 M40 Pen & Pencil Set Pen & Pencil Set Pen & Pencil Set Pen & Pencil Set Premium Xerographic Paper Premium Xerographic Paper Premium Xerographic Paper Premium Xerographic Paper Premium Xerographic Paper Premium Xerographic Paper Premium Xerographic Paper Premium Xerographic Paper Markette Red Highlighter Markette Red Highlighter Markette Red Highlighter Markette Red Highlighter Markette Red Highlighter Markette Red Highlighter Markette Red Highlighter Markette Red Highlighter Markette Red Highlighter Markette Red Highlighter Markette Red Highlighter Markette Red Highlighter Green Bar Continuous Form Green Bar Continuous Form Green Bar Continuous Form Green Bar Continuous Form Green Bar Continuous Form Green Bar Continuous Form Green Bar Continuous Form . . . . . . 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01

1001 1001 1001 1001 P001 P001 P001 P001 P001 P001 P001 P001 M001 M001 M001 M001 M001 M001 M001 M001 M001 M001 M001 M001 P002 P002 P002 P002 P002 P002 P002

New Unit Cost 6.0000 6.2500 6.5000 1.2500 5.2500 5.2500 30.2500 30.2500 30.1049 30.1049 43.9573 16.1500 16.1500 16.1500 110.5000 3.5000 5.4127 5.2568 5.2568 5.2500 2.7794 2.7860 2.7860 2.7860 2.7793 2.7793 2.7793 2.7793 .6834 .5500 .5500 .5500 .5077 .3556 .3556 .3556 .5091 .5091 .5091 .5091 30.9778 32.7591 32.7591 30.9681 30.9681 30.9681 30.9681

Previous Unit Cost 5.2500 5.2500 5.2500 1.0000 6.5000 5.2569 30.3750 30.8417 30.5610 30.2500 43.7336 16.1455 16.1455 16.0000 90.3963 2.2700 10.0000 5.2500 6.0000 6.2500 2.8373 2.6829 2.6829 2.6829 2.8373 2.8373 2.8373 2.8373 .5500 .0000 .0000 .0000 .5608 .6806 .6806 .6806 .5608 .5608 .5608 .5608 31.4333 30.1049 30.1049 31.4333 31.4333 31.4333 31.4333

711

Inventory Management

Processing Options for Future Cost Update

Process Control: 1. Enter the costing method that you desire to replace using a future cost method which you MUST specify in data selection. If left blank, the cost method replaced will be your current Inventory/Sales costing method for the items you select. ____________

712

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Test Yourself: Cost Updates

The answers to this Test Yourself exercise are in Appendix B. 1. Which three methods can you use to increase or decrease costs? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

2. What happens in the system when you change a cost? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

3. How could you prevent someone from updating costs? ____________________________________________________________

4. Which method do you use to produce a report of current costs and how the costs will change? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

5. Which two methods can you use to calculate a true average cost based on the average costs of all locations? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

713

Inventory Management

714

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Supplemental Database
Objectives
To enter, review, and report on additional user defined inventory information To classify supplemental data by using codes, freeform text, or links to other programs

About the Supplemental Database

The Supplemental Database is an optional feature that allows you to store information about an item that you do not include in the standard master tables. For example, perhaps you need to track detailed information for your engineering change specifications. Using the supplemental database, you could enter information such as the departments and people who are respsonsible for specific duties. In another example, you could use the supplemental database to track costs for an advertising campaign. For each end item, you could enter campaign information such as dates, costs, the type of campaign, and so forth. Supplemental data can include: Quality performance information Legal descriptions Repair and replacement records Government procurement information Hazardous material regulations Complete the following tasks: - Define data types - Work with supplemental data

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

What You Should Know About

Updating the supplemental You might need to run the following programs to update your database supplemental database: Profile Data Copy/Move, after you have changed data types and you need to transfer information from one data type to another. Build the Word Search File, to update supplemental data information for online searches. Purge Supplemental Data, to purge information from supplemental data files. CIF (Central Information File) Sequence Revisions, to define security for supplemental database users. You can customize the supplemental database display for each user, user group, and data type. You can access these programs from Item Supplemental Data/CIF.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Define Data Types

G41

Inventory Management Choose Item Supplemental Data/CIF

G4124

Item Supplemental Data/CIF Choose Profile Data Types

Defining Data Types

Data types are user defined codes that classify supplemental data. When you define data types, you specify the mode for entering supplemental data. You can specify three different modes:

Code (C)

Use this mode to enter dates, amounts, and so forth. Codes also allow you to specify the format in which the data types appear in the system, and whether the system verifies that the user defined codes exist in a code table. Use this mode to enter the supplemental data as free-form text. For example, you could use data type EN to record detailed text information about an engineering specification for an item. Use this mode to directly exit to the program that you specify for the data type.

Narrative (N)

Program (P)

Although your security clearance may allow you to work with the supplemental database, you might not be able to access other programs through the database.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

Before You Begin

- Before you define data types, decide whether to track information at the item level or the item and branch/plant level. To track information at the item and branch/plant level, set the Supplemental Database by Branch field to Y (yes) in System Constants, which you access through Branch/Plant Constants. To track by item only, set the field to N (no). - If you want the system to edit user defined codes, you must: Set up the code type table Enter valid system and record type codes After you have set the Supplemental Database by Branch field and entered data in the Supplemental Database, do not change the field value. If you change the value, you lose the ability to view data for the item/branch. CAUTION: After you have set the Supplemental Database by Branch field and entered data in the Supplemental Database, do not change the field value. If you change the value, you lose the ability to view data for the item/branch. To define data types

On Profile Data Types

810

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Work with Supplemental Data

To enter supplemental data in narrative mode

On Profile Data Entry 1. Complete the following fields: Branch/Plant Item Number 2. Select a data type for which to enter supplemental data. The Supplemental Data Narrative form appears.

3. On Supplemental Data Narrative, enter free-form text for the item.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

811

Inventory Management

Reviewing Supplemental Data

G41 Inventory Management Choose Item Supplemental Data/CIF

G4124

Item Supplemental Data/CIF Choose an option under the Item Profile Inquiries heading

You can review supplemental data: With multiple criteria By item By data type
Multiple criteria Use multiple criteria to review a data type and several other related data types. For example, you might want to review the data type advertising and several other related data types, such as newspapers, television, and magazines. Review supplemental data by item to review both item master information and any supplemental data that you entered. For example, you might want to review all supplemental data for an item. Use a data type to review all the supplemental data for a specific data type and its related items. For example, you can view all items that were advertised in a specific periodical or newspaper.

Item

Data type

Complete the following tasks: Review supplemental data with multiple criteria Review supplemental data by item Review supplemental data by data type

812

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Work with Supplemental Data

To review supplemental data with multiple criteria

On Profile Multi-Attribute Search

Complete the following fields: And/Or Data Type Search Value Only supplemental data whose data types are in code mode appear on Profile Multi-Attribute Search.

Field And/Or Selection Data Type 1 Search Value

Explanation A code that determines whether compound data selection logic is based on an A = AND condition or an O = OR condition. The type of data from the supplemental database that is used in a multiple information search. A value linked to a supplemental data type that you can search for during a multittribute search. You can search for up to four values at one time.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

813

Inventory Management

To review supplemental data by item

On Profile by Item

Complete the following field: Item Number Only supplemental data with data types in narrative mode appear on Profile by Item.

Field Item Number

Explanation A number that the system assigns to an item. It can be in short, long, or 3rd item number format.

814

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Work with Supplemental Data

To review supplemental data by data type

On Profile by Data Type

Complete the following field: Type of Data

Field Type Data

Processing Options for Inquiry by Type of Data Items

Enter the specific Type of Data on which to inquire within the chosen data base. ____________

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

815

Inventory Management

Running Supplemental Data Reports

Run supplemental data reports to print: Item master information Data type information Complete the following tasks: - Run the Item Profile report - Run the Items by Data Type report

Running the Item Profile Report

This DREAM Writer report displays a summary of data from supplemental data tables and the Item Master (F4101). You can sequence the Item Profile report alphabetically or by business unit.

816

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Work with Supplemental Data

410400

J.D. Edwards & Company Item Profile Alphabetical by Item

Page Number Date

2 4/07/98

Item Number. . . . 1001 Product No . . . . 1001 Catalog No . . . . P100PPS41

a Pen & Pencil Set Sub Section. . . . Commodity Class. . Sales Catalog Sect SPO

Blank Sales Rpt Co Blank Commodity Cl Supplies, Office

Stocking Type. . . . . . Unit of Measure. . . . . Master Planning Family .

P EA

Advertising ============================== Effective Source From Through Campaign Telemarketing Cost/Issue POST 03/20/98 03/27/98 Full Page Silvestra Ad 350.00 In addition to these ads, extensive telemarketing has been done via our Seattle office. TIME 02/16/98 02/16/98 One Month New Tech Ad TRIBUNE 04/15/98 04/22/98 Insert Page Silvestra Ad WALLSTREET 01/22/98 01/22/98 Two Page Back to Basics Ad Total 5,500.00 250.00 91,500.00 97,600.00

Customer Satisfaction ============================== Effective Category From Through Customer Name Sales Order Number INSTALL 01/15/98 Moser Printing 00001165 Mr. Tom Moser, Vice President of Sales, wrote a letter stating that the install Manager, Frank Von, was difficult to work with and unable to understand customer requirements. OTHER SERVICE 01/15/98 04/15/98 Ms. Patty Dugan had no response JEPKCO 00005532 Kaiser Inc. 00002518 called to inform us that their service call placed 06/15/98 has as of 6/16/98.

WARRANTY

01/15/98 ABC Company 00009967 Mr. Tracey Pool reported that 95% of their items continue to be maintenance free 1 year after the warranty has expired.

Engineering Specifications ============================== Engineering specifications can be stored online via the Supplemental Data Base.

Processing Options for Item Profile Report

Enter an N to bypass printing text information on the report. Default of blank will print the text. ____________

Running the Items by Data Type Report

This DREAM Writer report displays a list of all item profile information by data type.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

817

Inventory Management

410410

J.D. Edwards & Company Profile Information by Data Type

Page Number Date

2 4/07/98

Advertising ============================== Effective Date . Item Description From Through Campaign Telemarketing Cost/Issue

Source . . . . . DENVERPOST 1315 Natureway High Energy Vit 06/20/98 Total for: DENVERPOST

300.00 300.00

Source

. . . . . POST 03/20/98 03/27/98 Full Page Silvestra Ad 350.00

1001 a Pen & Pencil Set

In addition to these ads, extensive telemarketing has been done via our Seattle office. Total for: POST 350.00

Source . . . . . TIME 1001 a Pen & Pencil Set

02/16/98 02/16/98 One Month New Tech Ad Total for: TIME

5,500.00 5,500.00

Source . . . . . TRIBUNE 1001 a Pen & Pencil Set

04/15/98 04/22/98 Insert Page Silvestra Ad Total for: TRIBUNE

250.00 250.00

Source . . . . . WALLSTREET 1001 a Pen & Pencil Set

01/22/98 01/22/98 Two Page Back to Basics Ad Total for: WALLSTREET Total for: Advertising

91,500.00 91,500.00 97,900.00

Processing Options for Items by Data Type Report

Enter an N to bypass printing text information on the report. Default of blank will print the text. ____________

818

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Kits
Objective
To understand kits and how to set them up in Inventory Management

About Kits
A kit is a collection of inventory items that are associated with a parent item. Kits provide a way to: Package items together to be sold under a parent name Assemble a parent item from multiple inventory items For example, you might store together several computer components, such as a monitor, hard drive, keyboard, and mouse. When you sell the items, you might sell them collectively as a computer system. In another example, you might store the same computer components in different locations within a warehouse. By entering the components in the system as kit components, you can easily locate each item and assemble the final product. You do not stock the parent item as an inventory item. The bill of material defines which items form the kit. If the kit has features or options, such as an optional glare-resistant screen, you can specify these. If the kit has required components, the system orders them automatically. You can view kit components on Sales Order Entry and Purchase Order Entry detail if you have set up the processing options. Complete the following tasks: - Enter kit information - Enter a bill of material

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

Kit Components
A kit is typically made up of several types of inventory items.

Parent item

A parent item represents the assembled item. Generally, the system does not carry inventory for a parent item. You must set up a parent item in the Item Master and designate it with a stocking type of K (for kit). The Item Master determines how the system calculates the price. Components are the actual inventory items that are contained in the kit. You set up components in the Item Master as regular stock items. Features and options are additional items for the kit. Feature items have a stocking type of F (for feature). The system recognizes feature items as second-level parent items, because the system does not carry inventory for the feature items. You set up the actual inventory items in the bill of material.

Components

Features and options

Example: Kit For example, assume that a kit consists of a stereo, which is the parent item, and the following components and options: Wiring jacks (component) Receiver (component) Speakers (component) Cassette deck (option 5platter CD player (option) Single CD player (option)

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Stereo (Parent Item)

Wiring Jacks (Component)

Receiver (Component)

Speakers (Component)

Cassette Deck (Option)

5Platter CD (Option)

Single CD (Option)

Example: Feature Assume that a CD player is a feature in the kit, and there are two versions of the feature: 5platter CD player Single CD player CD Player (Feature)

5Platter CD

Single CD

Kits in Distribution Systems

It is important to remember that in distribution systems, the word kit has a different meaning than in the manufacturing environment: Distribution systems use the bill of material to locate and assemble a group of items. Manufacturing systems use the bill of material to create a parts list for a work order. When you create a work order, you are preparing to produce a product. The parts list indicates the material and quantity that you will need.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Kit Information

Entering Kit Information

Kits and bills of material can have up to 999 levels. A level consists of components, features, and options. Each can consist of various parts. For example, you define a feature in a parent kits component and then enter the feature as a parent. Thus, the feature becomes a second level. Complete the following tasks: - Enter item master records for kits - Set up locations for kits - Enter kit pricing information

Entering Item Master Records for Kits

G41 Inventory Management Choose Inventory Master/ Transactions

G4111

Inventory Master/Transactions Choose Item Master Information

After you have decided which kits you need and what each kit will contain, enter the items on Item Master Information.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

To enter item master records for kits

On Item Master Information

Complete the following fields: Stocking Type Kit Pricing Method

Field Stocking Type

Explanation A user defined code (system 41/type I) that indicates how you stock an item(for example, as finished goods, or as raw materials). The following stocking types are hard coded and you should not change them: B Bulk Floor Stock C Configured item F Feature K Kit parent item N Non-stock

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Kit Information

Field Kit Pricing Method

Explanation A code that indicates how the system determines the sales price of a kit or configured item. Valid codes are: 1 The system totals list prices of components to determine the kit or product family price. 2 The list price of the final kit. This is the kit or product family price from the Base Price file (F4106). 3 The price inclusion rules for the product family determine the product family price (for configured items only). 4 The kit or product family price is the sum of the components discounted prices. There is no discount on the parent.

What You Should Know About

Item Master validation The system checks component item numbers against the Item Master table if you have a line type assigned to the component, feature, or option. Kits can also contain non-stock components. In this case, the system does not validate the item numbers against the Item Master table. An example of a non-stock component is a flyer or catalog.

See Also
Entering Item Master Information (P4101) for more information on entering item master records

Setting Up Locations for Kits

G41 Inventory Management Choose Inventory Master/ Transactions

G4111

Inventory Master/Transactions Choose Item Branch/Plant Information

After you enter the kits components, you must identify the location where the kit is stored.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

To set up locations for kits

On Item Branch/Plant Information Complete the following field: Branch/Plant

Field Branch/Plant

Explanation A code that identifies a separate entity within a business for which you want to track items and costs. This entity might be a warehouse location, job, project, work center, or branch/plant. The Business Unit field is alphanumeric. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This is the branch/plant or warehouse to which this item information is applicable.

See Also
Entering Branch/Plant Information (P41026)

Entering Kit Pricing Information

You must specify how to price kits in the item master. If you decide to price the kit at the parent level, you enter only pricing information for the parent item. To price the kit by the sum of the component prices, you must enter pricing information for each component. To enter kit pricing information

On Item Master Information Complete the following fields: Sales Price Level Purchase Price Level Kit Pricing Method

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Kit Information

Field Sales Price Level

Explanation A code that indicates whether the system maintains standard sales prices for an item, different sales prices for each branch/plant, or different sales prices for each location and lot within a branch/plant. The system maintains sales prices in the Base Price file (F4106). Valid codes are: 1 Item level 2 Item/Branch level 3 Item/Branch/Location level A code that indicates where to retrieve the purchase price for an item when you enter a purchase order. Valid codes are: 1 Use the supplier/item price from the Purchase Price table (F41061). 2 Use the supplier/item/branch price from the Purchase Price table (F41061). 3 Use the inventory cost from the Inventory Cost table (F4105). This cost is based on the inventory cost level and the purchasing cost method you specify for the item. The first two codes are applicable only if you set up supplier costs in the Purchase Order Management system. If you do not set up supplier costs, the system uses the inventory cost as the default for the purchase order.

Purchase Price Level

What You Should Know About

Feature parent items Do not enter pricing information for a feature parent item.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

910

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter a Bill of Material

G41

Inventory Management Choose Bill of Material Processing

G4114

Bill of Material Processing Choose Enter/Change Bill of Material

Entering a Bill of Material

You must enter a bill of material to specify how to assemble kit components to create the parent item. By entering a bill of material, you also provide the system with information such as: Whether there are feature items and options that are included with the kit Whether the feature items are optional The number of items that you need to assemble the kit To enter a bill of material, you must set up your inventory kit.

Before You Begin

- Verify that the parent, components, features, and options for the kit are set up in Item Master Information - Verify that a valid parent item number exists in the Item Master table - Determine whether you need to enter branch/plant information for kits

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

911

Inventory Management

To enter a bill of material

On Enter/Change Bill of Material

1. Complete the following fields: Parent Item Component Item Quantity Per UM (Unit of Measure) 2. To establish multiple levels, choose Next Level. 3. Access the fold area. The bill of material can have several levels. 4. Complete the following fields: Standard/Optional/Feature Required

912

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter a Bill of Material

Field Item Number

Explanation A number that the system assigns to an item. It can be in short, long, or 3rd item number format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Header: The Parent field contains the item number of the parent item. Detail: The Component Item field contains the item number of the component item listed.

Quantity Per

The number of units to which the system applied the transaction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicates how many of a component is used to manufacture the parent item. A quantity of zero is valid. The default value is 1.

Unit of Measure

A user defined code (system 00/type UM) that identifies the unit of measurement for an amount or quantity. For example, it can represent a barrel, box, cubic yard, gallon, an hour, and so on.

What You Should Know About

Levels Component records Enter each level in the kit separately. If you have set a processing option so that the system does not validate the existence of an item/branch record, you do not have to set up the location of a component in the branch/plant where the kit is created. However, the item information must exist in the item master.

See Also
Working With Bills of Material (P3002) in the Product Data Management Guide

System Setup
Objectives
To understand the basic setup requirements of the Inventory Management system

About System Setup

Before you use Inventory Management, there are certain setup procedures that you must perform: - Set up constants - Set up warehouse locations - Set up automatic accounting instructions - Set up messages - Set up default location information - Set up standard units of measure - Set up item crossreference - Set up audit information - Work with speed location maintenance

What Information Do I Need to Set Up?

The following describes the features that you must set up and each features purpose.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

101

Inventory Management

Constants

Constants provide the system with the following types of default information: System constants determine which functions to perform. Batch control constants determine whether an application requires management approval and batch control. Branch/plant constants define the day-to-day transactions within a branch/plant. Location format determines how you identify item storage areas in a branch/plant. Item availability defines how the system calculates the number of items that each branch/plant contains.

Warehouse locations Automatic accounting instructions (AAIs)

Warehouse locations define the locations that are available in branch/plants. AAIs provide the Inventory Management system with accounting information and general ledger relationships for interacting with the General Accounting system. Messages display depending on which programs you specify and which messages you determine should print. Default location and printer settings provide the system with branch/plant, printer output queue, and approval route code information to use as default settings. Item cross-reference numbers allow the system to associate internal and external items.

Messages

Default location and printers

Item cross-references

102

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Set Up Constants

G41

Inventory Management Enter 29

G4141

Inventory System Setup Choose Branch/Plant Constants

Setting Up Constants
A constant is a piece of information that you associate with either the entire system or a specific branch/plant. The system uses constants as default information in many J.D. Edwards systems. After you determine the information that you want to use throughout your system, you can enter the appropriate values or change any predefined values. Complete the following tasks: - Define branch/plant constants (required) - Define item availability (required) - Define system constants - Define batch control constants - Define the location format

See Also
Setup for Advanced Pricing (P40091W) in Advanced Pricing for more information on additional system constants that you can define

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

103

Inventory Management

Before You Begin

- Create an address book record for the branch/plant - Set up a branch/plant named ALL - Set up the branch/plant as a business unit

Defining Branch/Plant Constants

Branch/plant constants allow you to customize the processing of daily transactions for each branch/plant in your distribution and manufacturing systems. To define branch/plant constants

On Branch/Plant Constants

1. Select a branch/plant using the constants option.

104

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Set Up Constants

2. On Branch/Plant Constants Page 1, complete the following fields: Branch/Plant Brch/Plt Address Number (Branch/Plant Address Number) Current Inventory Period Interface G/L (Y/N) (Interface General Ledger (Y/N)) Number of Days in Year

Field Branch/Plant

Address Number

Period Number Current

Interface G/L (Y/N)

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

105

Inventory Management

Field Number of Days in Year

Explanation The number of days you are open for business in a year. This number must be between 252 and 365. The Purchase Order Management system uses this number to calculate economic order quantity (EOQ). This is a required field.

What You Should Know About

Defining warehouse control specifications If you use the Advanced Warehouse Management system, you must define the warehouse information on Branch/Plant Constants Page 2.

Defining Item Availability

You must define how you want the system to calculate item availability for each branch/plant. This calculation impacts how the system calculates backorders, cancellations, and customer delivery time. To define item availability

On Branch/Plant Constants 1. Choose Availability to select a branch/plant.

106

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Set Up Constants

2. On Item Availability Definition, enter a minus () or plus (+) sign in fields with quantities that you want to subtract or add, respectively, from the quantity on hand.

See Also
Reviewing Performance Information (P4115) for more information about quantities

Defining System Constants

Set up system constants to determine which functions to perform. For example, assume that you have several branch/plants and you use different units of measure for the items in each branch/plant. You can set a system constant to automatically convert units of measure by branch. System constants apply to all branch/plants. You cannot customize the settings for each branch/plant. To define system constants

On Branch/Plant Constants 1. Access System Constants.

2. On System Constants, complete the following fields: Unit of Measure Conversions by Branch Supplemental Data Base by Branch Allow Duplicate Lots Update Average Cost On-Line

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

107

Inventory Management

Sales Price Retrieval Unit of Measure Purchase Price Retrieval Unit of Measure Sales Price Based On Date Purchase Rebate Category Code ECS Control (Y/N)

Field Process UOM Conversions by Branch

Explanation A code that indicates how the system uses the branch/plant within the Item Specific Unit of Measure Conversion tables. Valid values are: Y The system displays the item specific conversion table when you add an item to a specific branch/plant. N The system displays the item specific conversion table for all branch/plants from the Item Master file. A code that indicates how the system uses the branch/plant within the Inventory Supplemental Database. Valid values are: Y The supplemental data is unique by item and branch. N The supplemental data is unique by item only. A flag that determines if the system can assign the same lot to multiple items. A code that indicates when the system calculates the new average cost for an item. Valid values are: Y The system calculates a new average cost online immediately after any transaction that affects the average cost of an item. N All processes that affect average cost create transactions to an Average Cost Work file (F41051). The system calculates a new average cost when you run the Average Cost Update program (P41811).

Process Supplemental Data Base by Branch

Allow Duplicate Lots Update Average Cost OnLine

Sales Price Retrieval UOM

A value that specifies the unit of measure the system uses for retrieving base prices and price adjustments during sales order processing. The system allows you to define your base prices in the Base Price File (F4106) and price adjustments in the Adjustment Detail File (F4072) in various unit of measures. If you specify the Transaction or Pricing UOM and the system does not find a record in that unit of measure, the system retries using the primary UOM of the item.

108

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Set Up Constants

Field Purchase Price Retrieval UOM

Explanation A value that represents the unit of measure the system retrieves for the purchase base price (F41061) during purchase order processing. If you specify the Transaction or Purchasing UOM and the system does not find a record in that unit of measure, the system retries using the primary UOM of the item.

Sales Price Based On Date

A value that determines how the system updates the Price Effective Date in the Sales Order Header (F4201) and Detail (F4211) files. In Sales Order Management, the system uses the Price Effective Date (PEFJ) to retrieve the base price from F4106 and price adjustments from F4072. A number contained in the system constants that dictates which category code is to be used in the criteria for inclusion comparison. The Energy and Chemical System Control code is used to indicate if the ECS application will be used.

Purchase Rebate Category Code Control Code ECS

Defining Batch Control Constants

Defining batch control constants prevents the system from applying changes that unauthorized personnel make to the general ledger. Also, you can define a constant that requires you to enter batch control information before the system runs a batch processing job. You might enter batch control information to compare the anticipated size of the job to the end result. You must define management approval and batch control separately for each distribution and manufacturing system that you use. To define batch control constants

On Branch/Plant Constants 1. Access Application Constants.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

109

Inventory Management

2. On Application Constants, complete the following fields: Mgmt Apprv (Management Approval) Batch Ctrl (Batch Control)

Field

Explanation

Batch Management Approval A code that indicates whether you want to require approval of Required Inv batches before they can be posted to the general ledger. Valid values are: Y Y (yes) instructs the system to assign a status of Pending to each batch that you create within the listed systems. N N (no) instructs the system to assign a status of Approved to each batch. Batch Control Required (Y/N) Inv A code that indicates whether you want to require entry of batch control information. For each batch, the system displays a batch control screen where you must enter information about the number of documents and the total amount of the transactions you expect in the batch. The system uses these totals to edit and display differences from the actual transactions you entered. This field applies only to the Inventory Management and the Purchase Order Management systems. Valid values are: Y In Inventory Management, Y (yes) instructs the system to display a batch control screen before you issue, adjust, or transfer inventory. In Purchase Order Management, Y instructs the system to display a batch control screen before you enter receipts. N N (no) indicates that you do not require entry of batch control information.

Defining the Location Format

Defining the location format allows you to determine how to set up item locations. For example, assume that you store pencils in branch/plant A. You can define elements that contain more specific information about the actual location. For example, an element can represent an aisle, bin, shelf, or any other location that you use in a branch/plant. You can define a locations format using up to 10 different elements, such as aisle, shelf, and bin. For each element, you can define the following: Length Justification Separator character

1010

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Set Up Constants

If you are using the Advanced Warehouse Management system, you must also define default units of measure for volumes, dimensions, and weights. To define the location format

On Branch/Plant Constants 1. Select a branch/plant. On Branch/Plant Constants Page 2

2. To define the location format, complete the following fields for each element: Length (of Aisle, of Bin, of Code 3 10) L/R (Left/Right) Separator Character

Field Length

Explanation Identifies the number of characters to represent the tank (or aisle for packaged stock). Valid values are numbers 1 through 8. A character (L or R) that specifies left or right justification for Aisle in the location format.

L/R

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1011

Inventory Management

Field Separator Location

Explanation A character that divides the elements of the location when you display them on forms or reports. Separators are not stored in the tables, but are used to edit a location on a form or report. If you do not want to use separators, leave this field blank. The system displays the location as one string of characters.

What You Should Know About

Location length The total length of all elements, including separators, cannot exceed 20 characters. The system does not store separators in the tables, but uses separators to edit a location on a form or report. If you do not want to use separators, leave the separator field blank. The system displays the location as one string of characters.

See Also
Setting Up Locations (P41204) in the Warehouse Management Guide

1012

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Set Up Warehouse Locations

G41

Inventory Management Enter 29

G4141

Inventory System Setup Choose Define Warehouse Locations

Setting Up Warehouse Locations

After you have defined the format for your locations, you must define all of the locations in a warehouse. To locate items more easily, you can create a hierarchy of locations within the warehouse and enter information about zones. You can also define a primary location to store basic information about items in a warehouse. A primary location is not an actual physical location. For example, you could designate a primary location as Location A, and then assign every item in the warehouse to a location that begins with A. You can also define a blank location as the primary location for inventory items. How the system displays the primary location depends on the location format specifications that you defined for the branch/plant.

Before You Begin

- Define the location format in Branch/Plant Constants - Verify that location control is activated in Branch/Plant Constants

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1013

Inventory Management

To define warehouse locations

On Define Warehouse Locations

1. Complete the following fields: Branch/Plant Location 2. To create a hierarchy of locations within a warehouse, complete the following field: LOD (Level of Detail) 3. To define a primary location, complete the following field, but do not use a separator character: Location The system displays an asterisk (*) to indicate the primary location.

Field Branch/Plant

Location

1014

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Set Up Warehouse Locations

Field Location Level of Detail

Explanation A code that summarizes or classifies locations and provides a hierarchy of locations for inquiry purposes. For instance, you can assign aisles to level 3, and individual racks within the aisle as level 4.

See Also
Setting Up Locations (P41204) in the Warehouse Management Guide Setting Up Constants (P41204) for information on defining location format for each branch/plant

1017

Inventory Management

4124

An inventory AAI that provides the expense or cost of goods sold account. A zero balance adjustment AAI that provides the inventory offset account. A zero balance adjustment AAI that provides the expense or cost of goods offset account. An item balance cost change AAI that determines the inventory offset account. An item balance cost change AAI that determines the expense or cost of goods offset account. A standard cost variance AAI that determines the cost of goods offset account. A physical inventory update AAI that determines the inventory offset account. A physical inventory update AAI that determines the cost of goods offset account. A batch cost maintenance AAI that determines the inventory offset account. A batch cost maintenance AAI that determines the expense or cost of goods offset account. A bulk product gain/loss AAI that determines the bulk inventory offset account. A bulk product gain/loss AAI that determines the expense or cost of goods offset account.

4126

4128

4134

4136

4141

4152

4154

4172

4174

4182

4184

Before You Begin

- Set up companies - Determine transaction types - Set up document types - Set up G/L class codes

1018

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Set Up Automatic Accounting Instructions

- Determine the account numbers for recording transactions - Set up account master information To set up automatic accounting instructions

On Automatic Accounting Instructions

1. Select an AAI using the AAI revisions option.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1019

Inventory Management

2. On Distribution Automatic Account, complete the following fields: Co. (Company) Do Ty (Document Type) G/L Cls (General Ledger Class) Cost Center Object Sub (Subsidiary)

Field Company

Explanation A code that identifies a specific organization, fund, entity, and so on. This code must already exist in the Company Constants table (F0010). It must identify a reporting entity that has a complete balance sheet. At this level, you can have intercompany transactions. NOTE: You can use company 00000 for default values, such as dates and automatic accounting instructions (AAIs). You cannot use it for transaction entries.

Document Type

A user defined code (system 00/type DT) that identifies the origin and purpose of the transaction. J.D. Edwards reserves several prefixes for document types, such as vouchers, invoices, receipts, and time sheets. The reserved document type prefixes for codes are: P Accounts payable documents R Accounts receivable documents T Payroll documents I Inventory documents O Order processing documents J General ledger/joint interest billing documents The system creates offsetting entries as appropriate for these document types when you post batches.

1020

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Set Up Automatic Accounting Instructions

Field Category G/L

Explanation A code that identifies the general ledger class that you want the system to use when it searches for the account to which it will post the transaction. If you do not want to specify a class code, you can enter **** (four asterisks) in this field. The table of Automatic Accounting Instructions (AAIs) allows you to predefine classes of automatic offset accounts for the Inventory, Purchasing, and Sales Order Management systems. G/L categories might be assigned as follows: IN20 Direct Ship Orders IN60 Transfer Orders IN80 Stock Sales The system can generate accounting entries based upon a single transaction. As an example, a single sale of a stock item can trigger the generation of accounting entries similar to these: SalesStock (Debit) xxxxx.xx A/R Stock Sales (Credit) xxxxx.xx Posting Category: IN80 Stock Inventory (Debit) xxxxx.xx Stock COGS (Credit) xxxxx.xx Although this field is four characters, only the last two characters of the Category and the last character of the Document Type are used to find the AAI.

Cost Center

Identifies a separate entity within a business for which you want to track costs. For example, a business unit might be a warehouse location, job, project, work center, or branch/plant. The Business Unit field is alphanumeric. You can assign a business unit to a voucher, invoice, fixed asset, and so on, for purposes of responsibility reporting. For example, the system provides reports of open A/P and A/R by business units, to track equipment by responsible department. Business unit security can prevent you from locating business units for which you have no authority. NOTE: The system uses this value for Journal Entries if a value is not entered in the AAI table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you leave this field blank, the system uses the business unit that you entered in the detail area of the transaction.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1021

Inventory Management

Field Object Account

Explanation The object account portion of a general ledger account. The terms object account and cost type are used synonymously. They refer to the breakdown of the Cost Code (for example, labor, materials, and equipment) into subcategories (for example, dividing labor into regular time, premium time, and burden). When you are using a flexible chart of accounts, if the object is set to 6 digits, J.D. Edwards recommends that you use all 6 digits. Here, entering 000456 is not the same as entering 456, because the system adds three blank spaces to fill a 6-digit object. A subdivision of an object account. Subsidiary accounts include more detailed records of the accounting activity for an object account.

Subsidiary

What You Should Know About

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1025

Inventory Management

4. On Text Messages, enter the text for the message.

Field Print Message

Explanation A code that you assign to each print message. Examples of text messages are engineering specifications, hours of operation during holiday periods, and special delivery instructions. A user defined name or remark that describes a field. The date that a transaction, text message, contract, obligation, or preference becomes effective. The date that a transaction, text message, agreement, obligation, or preference has expired or been completed. A one-character code indicating whether the print message/item note text prints before or after the detail line on the order. The default is for the text to print after the detail line.

Description Date Effective Date Expired Print Before (Y/N)

To define a base message in another language

On Print Message Revisions: 1. Select a message code. 2. Complete the following field: Language 3. Access Text Messages.

1026

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Set Up Messages

4. Enter the text.

Field Language

Explanation A user defined code (system 01/type LP) that specifies a language to use in forms and printed reports. If you leave the Language field blank, the system uses the language you specify in your user profile. If you do not specify a language in your user profile, the system uses the default language for the system. Before any translations can appear, a language code must exist at either the system level or in your user profile.

What You Should Know About

Messages in other languages You can use any base message that you create as a template for the same message in other languages. Also, you can use the same message code for all languages.

See Also
The Technical Foundations Guide for more information about defining messages

Defining Print Information for Messages and Item Notes

To define print information, complete the following tasks: - Define documents on which to print messages - Define document type exceptions

Defining Documents on Which to Print Messages

You must define the documents on which to print messages. For example, you might print special delivery instructions on every work order. You can specify a program for each type of print message.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1027

Inventory Management

To define documents on which to print messages

On Print Message Revisions 1. Access Document Selection.

2. Complete the following field: Y/N

Inventory Management Enter 29

G4141

Inventory System Setup Choose Default Location & Printers

Setting Up Default Location Information

By setting up default location information, you assign a branch/plant and print queue to a terminal that the system uses every time that you sign on. Complete the following tasks: - Define a default location and approval route code - Assign default print queues

Before You Begin

- Verify that you have set up branch/plants - Verify that you have set up print queue codes in the user defined code table (system 40, type PP)

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1031

Inventory Management

Defining a Default Location and Approval Route Code

A default location is the branch/plant that is assigned to your user ID or terminal ID. If the system uses a default location, it automatically displays the branch/plant. If there is no branch/plant assigned to your user ID or terminal ID, you must enter a branch/plant manually. You can define an approval route code if you use approval routing for purchase orders. To define a default location and approval route code

On Default Location & Printers Complete the following fields: Terminal/User ID Branch/Plant Approval Route Code

Field Terminal Identification Code Approval Routing

Explanation The workstation ID number that appears in the upper right corner of each J.D. Edwards menu. A code that determines to whom an order is routed for approval.

1032

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Set Up Default Location Information

Assigning Default Print Queues

Default print queues represent the location where the system sends certain types of documents. You can assign a default print queue so that each time you print, the system sends the document to the default print queue. If you have not assigned a default print queue, the system first accesses the print queues that were assigned in the DREAM Writer version, and then accesses the print queue that is assigned to your user profile. To assign default print queues

On Default Location & Printers 1. Complete the following fields: Terminal/User ID Branch/Plant 2. Access Default Print Queues.

3. Complete the following field: Print Queue

Field Print Queue

Explanation The name of the object. Objects can be libraries, source members, job queues, print queues, and files. Consult your IBM documentation for a full explanation of objects. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enter the name of the print queue that you want the system to use for the document shown immediately to the left.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1033

Inventory Management

What You Should Know About

Print programs Print programs that you have defined automatically access the print queue table (F40096). To display other print programs, modify them to access the print queue table and then set them up as user defined codes.

See Also
Working with the Subsystem (P40105) in the Sales Order Management Guide for information about the subsystem

1034

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Set Up Standard Units of Measure

G41

Inventory Management Enter 29

G4141

Inventory System Setup Choose Standard Units of Measure

Setting Up Standard Units of Measure

You must define units of measure for each inventory item. Use the standard unit of measure information as a template for customizing your unit of measure information. You specify the primary unit of measure and unit of measure conversions for each item. You can do this: For each item or item/branch combination For all items using standard units of measure Specify the primary unit of measure information for individual items or item/branch combinations when you set up item or branch information. The system stores unit of measure information in the Unit of Measure Conversion table (F41002). When you specify the primary unit of measure information for all items, the system stores the information in the Standard Unit of Measure Conversion table (F41003). You can also use unit of measure conversion information that you set up here for non-stock items in other distribution systems.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1035

Inventory Management

After you enter a transaction, the system uses the following hierarchy to determine the unit of measure for an item: 1. The system first searches for the item or item/branch combination in the Unit of Measure Conversion table (F41002). 2. If none are found in the Unit of Measure Conversion table, the system checks for system-wide standard units of measure for the item or item/branch in the Standard Unit of Measure Conversion table (F41003). 3. If none are found in either the Unit of Measure Conversion table or the Standard Unit of Measure Conversion table, the system displays an error message. When you define standard units of measure, you can create any number of conversion factors for any number of units of measure. You can also set up conversion factors that associate each unit of measure with the primary unit of measure.

Example: Conversion Factors for Units of Measure

1 box = 2 eaches 1 crate = 2 boxes 1 pallet = 2 crates

1 box

1 pallet

1 crate

2 boxes 2 crates

2 eaches

To determine the primary unit of measure, the system performs that following calculation:

1036

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Set Up Standard Units of Measure

1 box 1 crate

2 eaches

4 eaches

= 1 pallet 8 eaches

Before You Begin

- Review the setup information for units of measure in the Entering Basic Item Information (P4101) - Verify that you have set up units of measure in the user defined code table 00/UM

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1037

Inventory Management

To set up standard units of measure

On Standard Units of Measure

Complete the following fields: UM (Unit of Measure) Quantity

Field Unit of Measure

Explanation A user defined code (system 00/type UM) that identifies the unit of measurement for an amount or quantity. For example, it can represent a barrel, box, cubic yard, gallon, an hour, and so on. The factor that the system uses to convert one unit of measure to another unit of measure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enter the conversion factor, or numeric quantity. The system uses the conversion factor during various inventory transactions to convert the previously entered unit of measure to another unit of measure. The system stores all conversion factors in a table for automatic conversion under program control.

Quantity

1038

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Set Up Standard Units of Measure

What You Should Know About

Deleting unnecessary lines Enter revised information or clear fields to delete unnecessary lines.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1039

Inventory Management

1040

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Set Up Item Cross-Reference

G41

Inventory Management Enter 24

G41112

Inventory Inquiries Choose Item Cross-Reference Inquiry

Setting Up Item Cross-References

Cross-references associate your internal item numbers with those from other entities. Examples of cross-item numbers are:

Vendor item numbers

Used when vendors require their part numbers for orders or communications Used when customers prefer to order with their part number Used when the item ordered has no quantity on hand Used when you or your vendors discontinue an item and replace it with a new item Used to associate bar code input with a specific item Used to recommend it as part of the sale

Customer item numbers Substitute items Replacement items

Bar codes Associated items

Complete the following tasks: - Enter crossreferences - Review crossreferences

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1041

Inventory Management

Before You Begin

- Set up the user defined code table 41/DT for the crossreference types you define

Entering Cross-References
To enter cross-reference information, you can choose an existing cross-reference number and change the information. Use the same process to change cross-reference information. To enter cross-references

On Item Cross-Reference Inquiry 1. To access Item Cross-Reference Revisions, enter 1 in the following field next to an item cross-reference number: O (Option) Item Cross-Reference Revisions appears.

1042

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Set Up Item Cross-Reference

2. On Item Cross-Reference Revisions, complete the following fields: Ty (Type) Address Number XRef Item Number (Cross-Reference Item Number) XRef Description (Cross-Reference Description) 3. Access the fold area.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1043

Inventory Management

4. Complete the following fields: Effective Date Expired Date

Field Type CrossReference Type Code

Explanation A code (UDC table 41\DT) that identifies the type of cross-reference you have set up for this customer. The system contains examples for: 1. Substitutes 2. Replacements 3. Bar Codes 4. Customer Numbers 5. Supplier Numbers A number that identifies an entry in the Address Book system. Use this number to identify employees, applicants, participants, customers, suppliers, tenants, special mailing addresses, and so on. The cross-reference item number that the system assigns to an item number. A cross-reference number allows you to use a suppliers item number if it is different from your own item number when you are processing an order or printing. A brief description of an item, a remark, or an explanation. The date that a transaction, text message, contract, obligation, or preference becomes effective. The date that a transaction, text message, agreement, obligation, or preference has expired or been completed.

Address Number

Item Number Customer/Supplier

Inventory Management Enter 29

G4141

Inventory System Setup Choose an audit option

Setting Up Audit Information

You must set up the audit process to track changes that personnel have made to the Item Master (F4101) and Item Branch (F4102) tables. The audit process provides you with information about who made a change, the type of change, when the change took place, and so forth. After you activate the audit process, the programs run continuously in a subsystem. The audit process copies all information contained in the Item Master (F4101) and Item Branch (F4102) tables into two audit tables, the Item Master Audit (F41019) and Item Branch Audit (F41029). These tables contain fields that monitor and record any changes to the Item Master and Item Branch tables. To review the changes, you must run audit reports. To set up audit information, you must provide the system with information about how to run the audit process in your environment. Complete the following tasks: - Set up IBM information for the audit process - Set up the audit process - Activate the audit process

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1047

Inventory Management

What You Should Know About

Purging audit tables It is very important to note that after you activate the audit process, the size of the audit tables and the journal can increase dramatically, based on use. First, consider how much data you need to purge. If you purge all audit information, you will lose historical information that the system may need to use in the future to compare old versus new (changed) information. See Purging Data.

See Also
Reviewing Inventory Audit Reports (P410199 and P410299)

Setting Up IBM Information for the Audit Process

Complete the following IBM journaling (DDP) tasks: - Create a journal receiver - Create a journal - Activate the journal physical file - Create a data queue - Create a job description - Create a user profile

1048

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Set Up Audit Information

Creating a Journal Receiver

A journal receiver contains the journal entries that the system writes after you add, change, or delete a record. You must create one journal receiver for the files for which the system will record journal entries. To create a journal receiver

On the command line 1. Enter CRTJRNRCV to access Create Journal Receiver.

2. On Create Journal Receiver, enter JDEADR0001 in the following field: Journal Receiver 3. Enter the name of your library where the journal receiver will reside in the following field: Library 4. Complete the following field with your own narrative text: Text Description

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1049

Inventory Management

Creating a Journal
A journal is a file that contains the compilation of the journal entries to which the IBM operating system writes information. To create a journal

On the command line 1. Enter CRTJRN to access Create Journal.

2. On Create Journal, enter JDEAD in the following field: Journal 3. Enter the name of the library in which the journal will reside in the following field: Library 4. Enter JDEADR0001 in the following field: Journal Receiver

1050

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Set Up Audit Information

Activating the Journal Physical File

when you activate the journal physical file, you enable the system to write the journal entries to the journal file. Because you are preparing to audit two tables, the Item Master and Item Branch, you must perform this procedure for each table. Before you activate the journal physical file, make sure that no users are working with or running batch programs for the Item Master and Item Branch tables. To activate the journal physical file

On the command line 1. Enter STRJRNPF to access Start Journal Physical File.

2. On Start Journal Physical File, enter F4101 or F4102 in the following field: Physical File to be Journaled 3. Complete the following field with the name of the production library where the Item Master (F4101) or Item Branch (F4102) tables reside: Library 4. Enter JDEAD in the following field: Journal

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1051

Inventory Management

5. In the Journal section of the form, complete the following field with the name of the library in which the journal resides: Library See Creating a Journal. 6. Change the default from *AFTER to *BOTH in the following field: Record Images 7. Change the default from *NONE to *OPNCLO in the following field: Journal Entries to be Omitted Complete the above steps for both the Item Master (F4101) and Item Branch (F4102) files.

Creating a Data Queue

A data queue temporarily holds and sequences the journal entries until the system is ready to continue processing. Consider the size of your largest journal and account for the increasre in file size to create sufficient space in the data queue. To create a data queue

On the command line 1. Enter CRTDTAQ to access Create Data Queue.

1052

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Set Up Audit Information

2. On Create Data Queue, enter DTAQAUDIT in the following field: Data Queue 3. Enter the name of the library in which the journal resides in the following field: Library 4. Complete the following field with a number that equals twice the size of your largest tables record length, plus 350 characters: Maximum Entry Length

Creating a Job Description

The job description provides the system with information about the library in which you are working. To create a job description

On the command line 1. Enter CRTJOBD to access Create Job Description.

2. On Create Job Description, enter JDEDDP in the following field: Job Description

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1053

Inventory Management

Creating a User Profile

A user profile allows multiple computers to transmit data and ensures that the system places the data in the correct data queue. To create a user profile

On the command line 1. Enter CRTUSRPRF to access Create User Profile.

2. On Create User Profile, enter JDEDDP in the following field: User Profile

1054

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Set Up Audit Information

Setting Up the Audit Process

G41 Inventory Management Enter 29

G4141

Inventory System Setup Choose an audit option

After you have set up IBM information, you must set up the audit process. Complete the following tasks: - Create an audit job - Create audit locations

Creating an Audit Job

You must create an audit job to identify the location of the library that receives the audit information. To create an audit job

On Create Inv. Audit Jobs

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1055

Inventory Management

1. Change the demonstration version of the audit process that J.D. Edwards provides (DEMO0001). The system displays Create Audit Jobs.

2. On Create Audit Jobs, replace the default system name with your system name in the following field: System Name 3. Access Audit Journal Information.

1056

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Set Up Audit Information

4. On Audit Journal Information, replace the J.D. Edwards default in the following field: Receiver Library 5. Exit Audit Journal Information when you are finished.

Creating Audit Locations

After you have created an audit job, you must define the source and target systems by creating audit locations. That is, you must define from where the audit information is accessed and to where it will eventually reside. J.D. Edwards provides most of the audit location information, which defaults into the fields on Create Audit Locations. To create audit locations

On Create Audit Locations

1. Enter JDED in the following fields: Source System Target System

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1057

Inventory Management

2. Change the default entries with your own entries in the following fields: Source System Target System Description Jobq Jobq Library

What You Should Know About

User ID J.D. Edwards provides the user ID for the audit process. Do not confuse this code with your own personal user ID. You cannot change the default entry on Create Audit Locations.

Activating the Audit Process

G41 Inventory Management Enter 29

G4141

Inventory System Setup Choose Work With Inventory Audit Jobs

After you have set up both the IBM audit process and the Inventory Management audit process, you must activate the Inventory Management audit process. When you activate the audit process, the system runs a series of programs in a subsystem. In the event of a system failure, you might have to reactivate the audit process. To activate the audit process, run the demonstration version of the audit subsystem.

What You Should Know About

Stopping the audit process The only time you must stop the audit process is when you want to purge the journal and audit tables. See Purging Data.

1058

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Set Up Audit Information

Processing Options for DDP/Audit Information

Enter Default Driver Program ID to be display or leave blank to not have a Default Driver

____________

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1059

Inventory Management

1060

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Working with Speed Location Maintenance

G41

Inventory Management Enter 29

G4141

Inventory System Setup Choose Speed Location Maintenance

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Working with Speed Location Maintenance

To work with speed location maintenance

On Speed Location Maintenance

1. To locate the branch/plant for which you are entering locations, complete the following field: Branch/Plant 2. Verify that location control is on for the branch/plant by reviewing the message in the upper right corner of Speed Location Maintenance. 3. Complete the following fields for each element in the new location: From To Step By LM (Limit) 4. Press F13 to enter the new locations in the Location Master (F4100).

Field From/To

Explanation A code that identifies a location in a warehouse. This code is used in conjunction with a bin and lot identifier, to indicate a specific, tangible storage area within a warehouse or yard.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1069

Inventory Management

Field Step By

Explanation A number that separates locations within a specified range of locations. The step can be a numerical or alphabetical increment. You use a step number when you create locations using Speed Location Maintenance (P4100A). For example: To create new locations: From Location: 1 To Location: 7 Step by: 2 The new locations are: 1, 3, 5, and 7.

Step Limit Method

A code that indicates what limits are used in the stepping process: blank Upper & Lower Limit. You create location codes beginning with the From value, ending with the To value, then starting again at the From value. 1 Upper Limit. You create location codes beginning with the From value, ending with the To value, then starting again at the lowest value for that location code. 2 Lower Limit. You create location codes beginning with the From value, ending with the highest value for that location code, then starting again at the From value. 3 No Limit. You create location codes beginning with the From value, ending with the highest value for that location code, then starting again at the lowest value for that location code.

What You Should Know About

Numeric format Be consistent with the numeric format of your entries for both location elements as well as steps. If you use 0 (zero) to precede the location element numbers 1 through 9 (01 09), use 0 (zero) to precede the step number so that the stepping process works correctly. When you are entering locations, the message in the upper right corner of the form indicates the number of locations that the system will create, based on the location range information that you have entered. Ensure that this is the number of locations that you want the system to create before you enter them. Do not use the function keys at the bottom of the Speed Location Maintenance form. These function keys are used only in the Warehouse Management system.

Number of locations

Additional function keys

1070

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Working with Speed Location Maintenance

Deleting mistakes

If you set up an incorrect location through Speed Location Maintenance, you can either: Delete your mistakes through Location Master Revisions, provided that you have few mistakes. Purge a range of locations if you have a large quantity of mistakes. If you purge files, you must use extreme caution. You cannot delete locations using Speed Location Maintenance. See Purging Data.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1071

Inventory Management

Test Yourself: Inventory System Setup

The answers to this Test Yourself exercise are in Appendix B. 1. Name two reasons for setting up branch/plant ALL. ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

2. What must you set up before you can add a branch/plant record on Branch/Plant Constants? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

3. If you do not want to use future commitment processing, how could you set up the branch/plant to bypass future commitment routines? ____________________________________________________________

4. Where do you set up the segments of your location identifier? ____________________________________________________________

5. What is the main benefit of activating Location Control? ____________________________________________________________

6. Can you define availability for different branch/plants? ____________________________________________________________

7. Where do you define whether the system will update the average cost interactively or by batch, and whether you allow duplicate lots? ____________________________________________________________ 1072

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Working with Speed Location Maintenance

8. To use a location identifier of blank for default processing, to which item location should you assign it? ____________________________________________________________

9. How can you specify that different product lines should affect different G/L accounts? ____________________________________________________________ ____________________________________________________________

10. If a default location is defined for a user ID, but the user is logged on to a terminal that also has a default location, which would take precedence? ____________________________________________________________

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1073

Inventory Management

1074

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Lot Processing
Objectives
To create lots To define information for lots and lot items To review lot activity and availability

About Lot Processing

Lot processing allows you to manage and maintain information about groups of items. For example, you can have the system assign lot numbers to groups of perishable items based on receipt dates to identify the items that you must sell first. You can view current information about each lot, such as the quantity of available items and the transactions that have affected the lot. Lot control is beneficial for identifying groups of items that are components of a final product. For example, if you assign lot numbers to both bicycle tires and bicycles assembled from the tires, you can: Identify the lot number for the tires that were used to build a specific bicycle Identify all bicycles that were assembled from a specific lot of tires If you later find that a particular lot of tires is defective, you can immediately identify and recall all bicycles that were assembled with the defective tires. A lot usually contains one type of item, but you can set up system constants to allow different types of items in the same lot. If a lot contains different items, the system maintains lot information for each lot number and item. You can also set up system constants to restrict a lot to one type of item and still allow that lot to exist in multiple warehouses. There are several methods you can use to assign lot number to items. You can: Have the system assign lot numbers Assign your own lot numbers Assign supplier lot numbers

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

111

Inventory Management

After you create a lot, the system adds a record to the Lot Master table (F4108). Complete the following tasks: - Enter lot information - Work with lot availability - View lot transactions - Reclassify lots

See Also
Defining System Constants (P4009W) for information about allowing different types of items in the same lot

112

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Lot Information

G41

Inventory Management Choose Inventory Master/ Transactions

G4111

Inventory Master/Transactions Choose Item Master Information

Entering Lot Information

You can group items and monitor them through your inventory system by assigning them to lots. To work with lots, you must define: Lot information for items Information for lots When you enter lot information for an item, you specify whether a lot number is mandatory, how the system assigns the number, and so forth. When you enter information for a lot, you specify the type of item that is contained in the lot, the expiration date for the lot, and so on. Complete the following tasks: - Enter lot information for items - Enter information for lots

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

113

Inventory Management

Entering Lot Information for Items

When you enter master information or branch/plant information for an item, you can specify: Whether the item requires a lot number at the time of receipt Whether the system commits the item's inventory based on lot numbers You can also specify: The method by which lot numbers are assigned to the item The number of days that the item can remain in inventory before expiring You can further specify lots by assigning serial numbers to items within the lots. To enter lot information for items

On Item Master Information

Complete the following fields: Lot Status Code Lot Process Type Commitment Method

114

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Lot Information

Shelf Life Days Serial No. Required

Field Lot Status Code

Explanation A user defined code (table 41/L) that indicates the status of the lot. If this field is blank, it indicates that the lot is approved. All other codes indicate that the lot is on hold. You can assign a different status code to each location in which a lot resides on Item/Location Information or Location Lot Status Change. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The default value for the lots to which you assign this item.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

115

Inventory Management

Field Lot Process Type

Explanation A code that indicates whether lot or serial number is assigned. Lot and serial number processes use the Lot Master table (F4108). Valid codes are: 0 Lot assignment is optional. You can manually assign numbers. Quantity can be greater than one. (Default) 1 Lot assignment is required. The system assigns numbers using the system date in YYMMDD format. Quantity can be greater than one. 2 Lot assignment is required. The system assigns numbers in ascending order using Next Numbers. Quantity can be greater than one. 3 Lot assignment is required. You must manually assign numbers. Quantity can be greater than one. 4 Serial number assignment is optional except during shipment confirmation. Quantity must not exceed one. 5 Serial number assignment is required. The system assigns numbers using the system date in YYMMDD format. Quantity must not exceed one. 6 Serial number assignment is required. The system assigns numbers in ascending order using Next Numbers. Quantity must not exceed one. 7 Serial number assignment is required. You must manually assign numbers. Quantity must not exceed one. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use codes 4 through 7 for advanced serial number processing. In Purchase Management, you add serial numbers using the Lot field on Purchase Order Detail. Each item must have a unique serial number. For items requiring serial numbers as well as lot assignments, use the Lot Process Type field in conjunction with the Serial No Required field. Codes 3 through 5 for the Serial No Required field indicate the setup requirements necessary for these items.

116

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Lot Information

Field Commitment Method

Explanation A code that indicates the method the system uses to commit lot items from inventory. Valid codes are: 1 The normal commitment method for inventory (default). The system commits inventory from the primary location, then from secondary locations. The system uses locations with the most inventory and moves to the location with the least. The system commits backorders to the primary location. 2 The inventory commitment method by lot number. The system commits inventory by lot number, starting with the lowest lot number and committing orders to available lots. 3 The inventory commitment method by lot expiration date. The system commits inventory from the locations with the earliest expiration date first. The system considers only locations with expiration dates greater than or equal to the sales order or parts list requested date. The number of days that an item can remain in inventory before it expires. The system adds this number to the date that the item is received to determine the expiration date for the item. If you do not enter a value here, you must enter an expiration date each time you receive the lot item.

Shelf Life Days

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

117

Inventory Management

Field Serial Number Required

Explanation A code that indicates whether you must attach a serial number to this item at the time of receipt or sale for basic serial number processing, or if memo lot information is required for advanced serial number processing. You can use basic serial number processing for informational purposes only. For example, you can add a serial number for an item, and review the number later. For basic serial number processing, valid values are: Y Yes, the system requires a serial number for all transactions pertaining to this item in related inventory, sales, and purchase order programs N No, the system does not require a serial number The system does not use this information if you use advanced serial number processing. Advanced serial number processing lets you track an item through purchasing and sales based on a serial number. To specify serial number requirements, you must use the Lot Process Type field in Item Master Information (P4101). Values 3 through 5 indicate whether lot assignment is required for items with serial numbers. You can require assignment of up to three lot numbers, including Supplier Lot, Memo Lot 1, and Memo Lot 2. To specify lots for items with serial numbers, you must use the following values: 3 Supplier lot number required (purchasing only) 4 Supplier lot number required (purchasing only), and Memo Lot 1 required 5 Supplier lot number required (purchasing only), Memo Lot 1 required, and Memo Lot 2 required

118

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Lot Information

Entering Information for Lots

G41 Inventory Management Choose Lot Control

G4113

Lot Control Choose Lot Master Revisions

After you assign a new lot number to an item, the system creates a lot. You can enter information for the new lot on Lot Master Revisions. You might create a lot for items that you expect to receive in the future. You can create a lot manually by entering the lot number and specifying lot information on Lot Master Revisions. Lot information can include the expiration date, grade and potency values, supplier information, and so forth. You can also assign up to ten category codes to each lot for reporting purposes. The system maintains separate lot information for each type of item in a lot. For example, if Lot 1 contains Item A and Item B, you can enter separate lot information for each item. A lot can contain multiple items only if you set up system constants to allow more than one type of item in a lot. Also, you can set up system constants to process a lot that contains only one item, yet whose quantities are located in multiple warehouses. For example, Lot 234 consists of one item, bicycle tires. In addition, Warehouse A represents the bulk warehouse, where the majority of the tires are stored. However, Warehouses B and C receive partial quantities of the same item so that Warehouse A has adequate space. When you receive the tires at Warehouses B and C, you can assign them to Lot 234 and track them through the unique lot number. Complete the following tasks: Create lots Enter lot control information Enter supplier information

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

119

Inventory Management

What You Should Know About

Assigning new lot numbers You can assign new lot numbers to items when you receive to items purchase order receipts, adjust inventory, and complete work orders. You can also assign new lot numbers for items on Item/Location Information. Assigning grades or potencies to lots If you do not specify a grade or potency for items that require this information, the system uses the standard grade or potency from Item Master Information or Item Branch Information. You can track changes to lot status, grade, and potency on the Item/Lot Ledger form.

Item/Lot Ledger

See Also
Working with Item Locations (P41024) for information about adding new lots to item locations Entering Grade/Potency Control Values (P41013) for information about item grades and potencies Locating OnHand Quantity Information (P4111) for information about viewing the Item/Lot Ledger Defining System Constants (P4009W) for information about allowing duplicate lots

1110

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Lot Information

To create a lot

On Lot Master Revisions Complete the following fields: Branch/Plant Lot/SN Item Number Lot Expiration

Field Lot

Explanation A number that identifies a lot or a serial number. A lot is a group of items with similar characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If a lot number has leading zeros, you must type them as part of the lot number.

Lot Expiration Date

The date that a lot of items expires. The system enters this date for you if you have specified the shelf life days for the item on Item Master Information or Item Branch/Plant Information. The system calculates the expiration date by adding the number of shelf life days to the date that you receive the item. You can commit inventory based on the lot expiration date for items. You choose how the system commits inventory for an item on Item Master Information or Item Branch/Plant Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Although you can change this date, the system automatically updates this field based on how you set up the user defined code (system 40, table LD).

To enter lot control information

On Lot Master Revisions Complete the following fields: Lot Description Lot Status Code

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1111

Inventory Management

Lot Potency Lot Grade Status Change Reason Potency Change Reason Grade Change Reason

Field Lot Description Lot Status Code

Explanation A brief description of a specific lot. A user defined code (table 41/L) that indicates the status of the lot. If this field is blank, it indicates that the lot is approved. All other codes indicate that the lot is on hold. You can assign a different status code to each location in which a lot resides on Item/Location Information or Location Lot Status Change. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The default for this field comes from the lot status code you assign to the item on Item Master Information or Item Branch/Plant Information. The code you enter here serves as the lot status default when you create a new item location for the lot.

Lot Potency

A code that indicates the potency of the lot expressed as a percentage of active or useful material (for example, the percentage of alcohol in a solution). The actual potency of a lot is defined in the Lot Master table (F4108). This field contains the grade of a lot expressed as an alphanumeric code. The grade is used to indicate the quality of the lot. For example: A1 premium grade A2 secondary grade The grade for a lot is stored in Lot Master table (F4108).

Lot Grade

Status Change Reason

A code (system 42, type RC) that indicates the reason for a change in the status of a lot, such as goods damaged in shipment or goods placed in quarantine. A code (system 42, type RC) that indicates the reason for a potency change to a lot. For example, you might change the lot potency because the actual potency of the items was lower than expected or because the potency was affected by evaporation. A code (system 42, type RC) that indicates the reason for a grade change to a lot. For example, you might change the grade because the actual grade was lower than expected or because the lot was downgraded due to aging.

Potency Change Reason

Grade Change Reason

1112

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Enter Lot Information

To enter supplier information

On Lot Master Revisions Complete the following fields: Supplier Supplier Lot Order Number

Field Supplier

Explanation The address book number of the preferred provider of this item. You can enter the number for the supplier or you can have the system enter it each time that you receive the item from a supplier. You specify whether the system enters the supplier using processing options for Enter Receipts.

Supplier Lot Order Number

The suppliers lot number for the item. A number that identifies a document, such as a purchase order, invoice, or sales order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The purchase order number for the lot item. The system enters the purchase order number when you enter a receipt for the item in Purchase Order Management.

Processing Options for Lot Master Revisions

Process Control: 1. Enter a 1 to update the lot status for all lot locations when updating the lot status or a 2 to display all lot locations and indicate for which locations the lot status needs to be updated. If left blank, only the lot master lot status will be updated. 2. Enter a 1 to protect the lot status from being updated. 3. Enter a 1 to protect the lot grade from being updated. 4. Enter a 1 to protect the lot potency from being updated. ____________

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1113

Inventory Management

Default Processing: 5. Enter the document type to be used when updating the lot grade. If left blank, the default document type CG will be used. 6. Enter the document type to be used when updating the lot potency. If left blank, the default document type CP will be used.

____________

1114

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Work with Lot Availability

G41

Inventory Management Choose Lot Control

G4113

Lot Control Choose an option

Working with Lot Availability

You can view the availability of items in a lot, as well as the activity dates, item quantities, and hold statuses that pertain to the lot. Activity dates and item quantities reflect receipts, issues, sales, and so forth for items in a lot. To work with lot availability, you can: - View lot availability - Work with lot quantities - Work with lot activity dates - Work with lot statuses

Viewing Lot Availability

You can view availability for: All items in a lot All lots that contain the item you specify You can choose to display only those items or lots for which there are on-hand balances.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1115

Inventory Management

To view lot availability

On Lot Availability

1. Complete the following fields for the item or lot that you want to view: Branch/Plant History (Y/N) Grade (from) Grade (thru) Potency (From) Potency (Thru) Lot/SN Item Number 2. Review the following fields: Status (Lot Status Code) Rea (Status Change Reason) Expires (Expiration Date) Quantity on Hand/Held Available

1116

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Work with Lot Availability

Field History

Explanation A code that tells the system to display information for all locations and lots or only for those with on-hand balances. Valid codes are: N Display only locations and lots with on-hand balances Y Display all locations and lots A code (system 40, type LG) that indicates the minimum grade acceptable for an item. The system displays a warning message if you try to purchase or issue items that have a grade below the minimum grade acceptable. The system does not allow you to sell items that have a grade below the minimum acceptable level.

From Grade

Thru Grade

From Potency

A number that indicates the minimum potency, or percentage of active ingredients, acceptable for an item. The system displays a warning message if you try to purchase or issue items that fall below the minimum acceptable potency. The system does not allow you to sell items that fall below the minimum acceptable potency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . This is the minimum potency acceptable for items in this lot.

Thru Potency

Quantity on Hand/Held

Available

The quantity available can be on-hand balance minus commitments, reservations, and backorders. Availability is user defined and can be set up on Branch/Plant Constants form.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1117

Inventory Management

What You Should Know About

Viewing the same item or lot multiple times If the same item or lot appears more than once, each item or lot exists in a different location.

See Also
Locating Detailed Quantity Information (P41023) for information on how the system calculates item availability Locating Summary Quantity Information (P41202) for information on viewing detailed item availability by location and lot

Processing Options for Lot Availability

____________

Working with Lot Quantities

You can view the on-hand quantity, the available quantity, and the quantity held for each lot. You can also view up to six other quantity types, which you set up on user defined code table 40/LQ. These quantity types might reflect the quantity of items: Received Issued Adjusted

1118

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Work with Lot Availability

Completed Approved Sold You set up user defined code table 40/LQ to indicate for which document types the system tracks lot quantities. You must associate each document type with one of the quantity type categories that appear on Lot Master Revisions. For example, you specify the Received category for the document type OP (purchase orders). Then, each time you receive items on a purchase order, the system records the quantity to the Received category for the lot. Complete the following tasks: Reviewing lot quantities Setting up the system to track lot quantities To review lot quantities

On Lot Master Revisions

1. To view quantities for a particular lot, complete the following fields: Branch/Plant Lot/SN Item Number

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1119

Inventory Management

2. Review the following fields: Quantity on Hand Available Quantity Held Quantities Received Quantities Issued Quantities Adjusted Quantities Completed Quantities Approved Quantities Sold To set up the system to track lot quantities

On Lot Quantities

1. Complete the following fields for each document type: 02 Character Code Description

1120

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Work with Lot Availability

2. Assign one of the following categories to each document type by entering the number in parentheses in the Description-2 field: Received (1) Issued (2) Adjusted (3) Completed (4) Approved (5) Sold (6)

Field Quantities Received

Explanation A type of quantity. This field represents quantity category 1. You specify the document types that update this category on user defined code table 40/LQ. The system updates user defined quantities when it writes Cardex information (F4111). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The quantity of items received in this lot.

Quantities Issued

A type of quantity. This field represents quantity category 2. You specify the document types that update this category on user defined code table 40/LQ. The system updates user defined quantities when it writes Cardex information (F4111). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The quantity of items issued from this lot.

Quantities Adjusted

A type of quantity. This field represents quantity category 3. You specify the document types that update this category on user defined code table 40/LQ. The system updates user defined quantities when it writes Cardex information (F4111). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The quantity of items adjusted to this lot.

Quantities Completed

A type of quantity. This field represents quantity category 4. You specify the document types that update this category on user defined code table 40/LQ. The system updates user defined quantities when it writes Cardex information (F4111). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The quantity of items completed and assigned to this lot.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1121

Inventory Management

Field Quantities Approved

Explanation A type of quantity. This field represents quantity category 5. You specify the document types that update this category on user defined code table 40/LQ. The system updates user defined quantities when it writes Cardex information (F4111). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The quantity of items approved in this lot.

Quantities Sold

A type of quantity. This field represents quantity category 6. You specify the document types that update this category on user defined code table 40/LQ. The system updates user defined quantities when it writes Cardex information (F4111). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The quantity of items sold from this lot.

Working with Lot Activity Dates

You can view up to six activity dates for a lot. You determine the activity dates that display by setting up user defined code table 40/LD. These activity dates might reflect the last time that an item was: Received/Created Issued Recalibrated Completed Approved Sold You set up user defined code table 40/LQ to indicate for which document types the system tracks lot activity dates. You must associate each document type with one of the date categories above. For example, you specify the Sold category for the document type SO (sales orders). Then, each time you confirm shipments for a sales order, the system records the date to the Sold category for the lot. You can also enter lot activity dates manually instead of having the system track them for you.

1122

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Work with Lot Availability

Complete the following tasks: Change activity dates for a single lot Change activity dates for multiple lots Set up the system to track lot dates To review and change activity dates for a single lot

On Lot Master Revisions

1. To view dates for a specific lot, complete the following fields: Branch/Plant Lot/SN Item Number 2. Change the following dates for the appropriate lots, if necessary: Date Received/Created Date Issued Date Recalibrated Date Completed Date Approved Date Sold

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1123

Inventory Management

To change activity dates for multiple lots

On Speed Lot Update

1. Complete the following fields: Branch/Plant History (Y/N) Item Number Supplier Lot 2. Change the following dates for the appropriate lots, if necessary: Date Received Date Issued Date Tested (or recalibrated) Date Complete

1124

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Work with Lot Availability

Field Date Received/Created

Explanation The last date that a particular activity occurred. You determine the type of activity that the category represents (for example, receipts). This field represents date category 1. You specify the document types that update this category in user defined codes (system 40, type LD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The last date that items were created or received in the lot. Although you can change this date, the system automatically updates this field based on how you set up the user defined code (system 40, type LD).

Date Issued

The last date that a particular activity occurred. You determine the type of activity that the category represents (for example, issues to work orders). This field represents date category 2. You specify the document types that update this category in user defined codes (system 40, type LD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The last date that items from the lot were issued to work orders. Although you can change this date, the system automatically updates this field based on how you set up the user defined code (system 40, type LD).

Date Recalibrated

The last date that a particular activity occurred. You determine the type of activity that the category represents (for example, recalibration dates). This field represents date category 3. You specify the document types that update this category in user defined codes (system 40, type LD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The last date that inventory adjustments were made to this lot. Although you can change this date, the system automatically updates this field based on how you set up the user defined code (system 40, type LD).

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1125

Inventory Management

Field Date Completed

Explanation The last date that a particular activity occurred. You determine the type of activity that the category represents (for example, inventory completions). This field represents date category 4. You specify the document types that update this category in user defined codes (system 40, type LD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The last date that inventory completions were made to this lot. Although you can change this date, the system automatically updates this field based on how you set up the user defined code (system 40, type LD).

Processing Options for Speed Lot Update

Process Control: 1. Enter a 1 to protect the lot grade from being updated. 2. Enter a 1 to protect the lot potency from being updated. Default Processing: 3. Enter the document type to be used when updating the lot grade. If left blank, the default document type CG will be used. 4. Enter the document type to be used when updating the lot potency. If left blank, the default document type CP will be used. ____________ ____________

____________

1126

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Work with Lot Availability

To set up the system to track lot dates

On Lot Dates

1. Complete the following fields for each document type: 02 Character Code Description 2. Assign one of the following categories to each document type by entering the number in parentheses in the Description-2 field: Date Received/Created (1) Date Issued (2) Date Recalibrated (3) Date Completed (4) Date Approved (5) Date Sold (6)

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1127

Inventory Management

Field Date Approved

Explanation The last date that a particular activity occurred. You determine the type of activity that the category represents (for example, lot status approvals). This field represents date category 5. You specify the document types that update this category in user defined codes (system 40, type LD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The date that the lot was approved. Although you can change this date, the system automatically updates this field based on how you set up the user defined code (system 40, type LD).

Date Sold

The last date that a particular activity occurred. You determine the type of activity that the category represents (for example, sales). This field represents date category 6. You specify the document types that update this category in user defined codes (system 40, type LD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The last date that items were sold from this lot. Although you can change this date, the system automatically updates this field based on how you set up the user defined code (system 40, type LD).

Working with Lot Statuses

You set up lot status codes to identify the reasons that a lot is on hold. After you set up the codes, you can assign them to items and lots on Item Master Information, Branch/Plant Information, Lot Master Revisions, Enter Receipts, and so forth. You cannot process items from lots on hold. You can assign different status codes to a single lot based on the different locations in which the lot resides. Complete the following tasks: Set up lot status codes Assign status codes to different lots You can run the Lot Status Update DREAM Writer program to place expired lots on hold. You can preview a list of all lots that will be placed on hold by running the program in proof mode.

1128

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Work with Lot Availability

41082

J.D. Edwards & Company Hold Expired Lots

Page No. . . . . . . Date . . . . . . . .

3 9/10/98

Branch/Plant . . . . Lot Expiration Date. Mode Processing. . Lot Status Code. . .

30 08/30/98 Proof Q

Item Number V001 V001 12829 V001 V001 V001 V001 I0006I 12845 12845

Description Natureway High Energy Vitamins Natureway High Energy Vitamins Parselenium Natureway High Energy Vitamins Natureway High Energy Vitamins Natureway High Energy Vitamins Natureway High Energy Vitamins Spray Dry Powder 1200 Grams Buffer, inert Buffer, inert

Location . . . .

Lot Number 00000004 00000005 9309150009

Date Expires 05/16/98 08/26/98 08/14/98 08/15/98 08/16/98 08/26/98 08/26/98 02/19/98 01/04/98 01/10/98

. . . .

9310140000 9310140001 9310140002 9310140003 9503120000 9601050000 9601110000

To set up lot status codes

On Lot Status Codes

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1129

Inventory Management

Complete the following fields for each status code: 01 Character Code Description To assign status codes to different lots

On Lot Master Revisions 1. Locate the appropriate lot and item. Location Lot Status Change appears.

2. On Lot Status Change, complete the following fields for each location for which you want to change the status code: New (New Lot Status) Rsn (Reason for Changing Lot Status)

What You Should Know About

Assigning status codes to locations You can assign status codes to locations as well as lots. The system verifies that a lot is on hold before verifying that the location is on hold. The system might process items out of locations on hold depending on the program in which you are working and the way that processing options are set.

1130

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

View Lot Transactions

G41

Inventory Management Choose Lot Control

G4113

Lot Control Choose an option

Viewing Lot Transactions

You might want to view the transactions that have affected a lot, such as: The receipts, inventory issues, and so on, that were generated as a result of assiging items to the lot The inventory issues, work order completions, sales, and so on, that were generated as a result of removing items from the lot Use Lot Tracing to view the transactions in which items were assigned to the lot. If the lot contains kit or assembled items, you can identify the parts that were used to assemble items in the lot and the lots from which the parts came.

LOT C

LOT A LOT D

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1131

Inventory Management

You use lot tracking to view the transactions in which items were removed from the lot. You can identify items that have been assembled using parts from the lot, and the lots to which the assembled items were assigned.

LOT A

LOT D LOT B

You provide information about how you want the system to trace and track lots. For example, you specify the document types that the system monitors to trace and track lots. You also specify whether you want to view transactions for assembled items or non-assembled items by specifying a trace/track mode. Complete the following tasks: - Print trace and track reports - Review trace and track information - Set up trace and track inclusion rules - Define a trace and track mode

1132

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

View Lot Transactions

Print Trace and Track Reports

You can print a DREAM Writer report that provides trace and track information, such as the level by which the system traces or tracks lots.

41505

Idaho Power Lot Tracing Report

Page Date

2 8/08/98

Parent Lot Lot Number Item Number Branch Level Trans Qty Date 13363 TELEPHONE 10 Lot Grade Lot Potency 51013827 TELEPHONE UNIT 10 1 10 03/08/98 Lot Grade Lot Potency 51013827 TELEPHONE UNIT 10 .2 100 03/08/98 Lot Grade Lot Potency 51013828 TELEPHONE CORD 10 1 10 03/08/98 Lot Grade Lot Potency 51013828 TELEPHONE CORD 10 .2 100 03/08/98 Lot Grade Lot Potency 51013829 TELEPHONE RECEIVER 10 1 10 03/08/98 Lot Grade Lot Potency 51013829 TELEPHONE RECEIVER 10 .2 100 03/08/98 Lot Grade Lot Potency

Trans Description Order No Ty Customer/Vendor Inventory Issue Inventory Receipt Inventory Issue Inventory Receipt Inventory Issue Inventory Receipt 13363 IM 34 OV Edwards, J.D. & Co 13363 IM 34 OV Edwards, J.D. & Co 13363 IM 34 OV Edwards, J.D. & Co

41505

Idaho Power Lot Tracking Report

Page Date

2 8/08/98

Lot Number Parent Lot Item Number Branch Level Trans Qty Date Trans Description Order No Ty Customer/Vendor 13363 TELEPHONE 10 Lot Grade Lot Potency 13363 TELEPHONE 10 1 10 03/08/98 Inventory Complet 13363 IC Lot Grade Lot Potency

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1133

Inventory Management

Reviewing Trace and Track Information

You can review trace and track information online. You determine whether the report diplays tracing or tracking information by using processing options for the Trace/Track Inquiry program. To review trace and track lot items

On Lot Tracing or Lot Tracking

1. Complete the following fields for the lot that you want to trace or track: Mode Lot/SN Depending on how you have set the Allow Duplicate Lots field in system constants, you might have to enter an item number and branch/plant. 2. Review the following fields, as necessary: Level Serial Number Item Number Quantity Trn Date (Transaction Date) Explanation (Transaction Explanation)

1134

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

View Lot Transactions

3. Access the fold area.

4. Review the following fields, as necessary: Order Branch/Plant Lot Grade Lot Potency Sup Lot (Supplier Lot) Cust/Supp. (Supplier)

Field Mode

Explanation A code that indicates how you want the system to display lot trace and track information. Valid codes are: 1 Single level trace/track 2 No intermediate levels (displays only top or bottom levels) 3 Multi-level trace/track 4 Multi-level indented trace/track The number indicating the level of the component item relative to its parent. Components are direct components of the parent item at level 1 and sub-assemblies at level 2, level 3, and so on. The date that the transaction occurred. This text identifies the reason that a transaction occurred.

Level

Trn Date Explanation

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1135

Inventory Management

Processing Options for Lot Tracing Inquiry

Enter a 1 to track lot usage. is to trace lot usage. Default ____________

Setting up Trace and Track Inclusion Rules

Before you use lot tracing and lot tracking, you must set up trace and track inclusion rules. These rules let you specify the document types that the system monitors to trace and track lots. You must specify whether each document type applies to lot tracing, lot tracking, or both. For example, if you use the Purchase Management system, you would specify that document type OP (purchase orders) applies to lot tracing. Then, each time you receive a lot item, the receipt transaction displays on Lot Tracing. To set up trace/track inclusion rules

On Trace/Track Inclusion Rules

1. Complete the following fields for each document type: 02 Character Code Description

1136

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

View Lot Transactions

2. Assign one of the following values to each document type in the Description-2 field: B (for bottom level, or tracing transactions) C (for completion level, or tracking transactions) Blank (for intermediate level transactions, which apply to both tracing and tracking) I (for issue transactions)

What You Should Know About

Issue transactions You must include the issues document type (IM) in inclusion rules if you perform multi-level tracing and tracking. You must also assign the issues document type a value of I (issue transactions). Receipt and adjustment transactions cannot have a value of C (completion) on Trace/Track Inclusion rules. Sales transactions cannot have a value of B (bottom level). A sale is the last transaction that can occur for lot tracking. The system traces and tracks a lot by associating together corresponding transactions, such as a receipt, an issue, a completion, and a sales order. If the association is terminated, the system stops tracing and tracking. For example, if you do not include the completion document type in inclusion rules, the system stops tracking at the completion transaction.

Receipt, adjustment, and sales transactions

How the system traces and tracks lot transactions

Defining a Trace and Track Mode

You determine the types of lot transactions that display on Lot Tracing and Lot Tracking by defining a mode: Mode 1 - Single level transactions Mode 2 - Only origination and completion transactions Mode 3 - Multilevel transactions for kit, parent, or manufacturing assembly items Mode 4 - Multilevel transactions for kit, parent, or manufacturing assembly items that are displayed in a hierarchical format

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1137

Inventory Management

You use mode 1 and mode 2 for non-assembled items. For tracing, you can review the transactions that resulted in items that were assigned to the lot, such as receipts. For tracking, you can see the transactions that resulted in items that were distributed, such as sales. Mode 2 does not display intermediate level transactions, which are transactions that apply to both tracing and tracking. You use modes 3 and 4 for items that are made up of several components. You can see all transactions that affect the lot, including receipts, issues, completions, and sales. To define a trace and track mode

On Lot Tracing or Lot Tracking Complete the following field: Mode

Field Mode

1138

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Reclassify Lots

G41

Inventory Management Choose Inventory Master/ Transactions

G4111

Inventory Master/Transactions Choose Reclassifications

Reclassifying Lots
You can reclassify an item and any associated lot when the items properties change. When you reclassify, you create new item numbers, lots, and combine or split existing lots within locations. For example, property changes that occur over time in technical grade sulphuric acid can result in a less potent grade of acid. You can create a new lot from this acid by specifying a different potency and grade. In a similar example, if you blend several lots of sulphuric acid together and dilute them with water, you can create a new lot with a new potency and grade. You can change a lot and any of the associated items as follows: Change the item number, location, lot, and lot status Create a new lot from an existing lot Combine several lots into a single lot Split one lot into several lots Combine several lots and create several new lots

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1139

Inventory Management

Example: Types of Reclassifications

The following graphic illustrates how you can combine, blend, and split lots.

Lot Blending Lot A Lot B Lot C

Combining Lots Lot A Lot B Lot 1 Lot 2 Reclassifications

Lot Splitting Lot C Lot A Lot B

After you reclassify an item and lot, the system adjusts inventory balances and performs related tracking and accounting tasks. The system updates the following tables with item and lot change information: Item Ledger (F4111) Account Ledger (F0911) Item Location (F41021) Warehouse Location (F4602)(only if you are using the Advanced Warehouse Management system with the Inventory Management system) You can view detailed or summarized journal entries for these transactions on the Journal Entries and the Item Ledger Inquiry forms.

Before You Begin

- Verify that you have set up the general ledger accounts in the Account Master table (F0901) - Verify that you have set up the automatic accounting instructions (AAIs) for distribution - Review uncommitted quantity information for the item and related lot that you are reclassifying on Item Availability Use the Item/Lot Change Transactions program only for reclassifying items and lots. Using any of these programs to reclassify items or lots can adversely affect information throughout the Sales Order Management and Purchase Management systems.

1140

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Reclassify Lots

To reclassify items and lots

On Reclassifications

1. Complete the following fields to enter reclassification information: From Branch/Plant To Branch/Plant (BU for Account Duplication) Trans. Date (Date - Order Transaction) Document Number (Document) Document Type Explanation G/L Date 2. Access the fold area.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1141

Inventory Management

3. Complete the following fields for each branch/plant in which the item is stored: F/T (From/To) Item Number Quantity UM Location Reason Code Unit Cost Extended Cost Trans. Line (Transaction Line Number) 4. To create a new location and record for the lot, complete the following fields: Lot Grade Potency Lot Desc Lot Expires Lot Status The system processes the transaction and displays a document number, document type, and the batch number for the transaction.

1142

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Reclassify Lots

Field To Branch/Plant

Explanation The destination business unit that you want to copy accounts to. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Form-specific information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The destination branch/plant that you want to move inventory to.

From/To

Indicates whether this line in the transaction is a From line or a To line. This field allows you to combine multiple existing products/locations into a single product/location, for example, three From lines and one To line. You can also split one existing product/location into several new products/locations, for example, one From line and two To lines. The information in a From transaction line is always existing item location information. The transaction line number keeps the different From and To lines for one transaction (for example, combining multiple lots into one or splitting one lot into several new ones) together by giving them the same transaction line number. The number of the last voucher that was entered. It is used to keep you from losing your place during data entry.

Transaction Line Number

Voucher Number Previous

What You Should Know About

Correcting errors You can correct a reclassification made in error by entering a reversing entry. Because the system stores records of each reclassification for accounting purposes, you cannot delete the record. The system reverses the item in the same document number and batch as the original reclassification. After you enter a reclassification, the system displays the document type, batch number, and document number for the transaction. Record the document number for locating the transaction. After you enter several reclassifications, you can group them together for processing. After you group transactions, the system assigns the same number to each transaction in the group and processes all of the From and To lines with the same transaction number. Depending on how the processing options are set, the system validates that the From and To quantities balance.

Recording document numbers

Grouping reclassifications

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1143

Inventory Management

Reclassifying uncommitted You can reclassify only uncommitted quantities of items and quantities of items lots. See Item and Quantity Information for information about how to determine uncommitted quantities for an item. Reclassifying bulk inventory You cannot use the Item/Lot Change Transactions program to reclassify bulk inventory. Instead, use the Bulk Stock Movement program to reclassify bulk inventory.

Processing Options for Item/Lot Change Transactions

Default Values : 1. Document type for item change. Process Control : 2. Method for assigning expiration date to newly created lots. (If left blank, method 1 will be used.) 1 2 3 4 = = = = Assign manually. Newest From Expiration Date. Oldest From Expiration Date. Transaction date + shelf life. ____________ ____________

Dream Writer Versions Enter the version of each program to be used. If left blank, ZJDE0001 will be used. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Journal Entries G/L Functional Server Item Search Item Ledger Warehouse Requests (P09101) (XT0911Z1) (P41200) (P4111) (P46100) ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________

Processing Control : 8. Enter a 1 to protect costs or a 2 to make costs non-display. If left blank, the update of costs is allowed. 9. Enter a 1 to run in summary mode. G/L accounts will be summarized within each document number. If run in detail, G/L accounts will be produced for each line. 10. Enter a 1 to allow transfers from held lots. 11. Enter a 1 to allow transfers greater than quantity available.

____________

____________ ____________

1144

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Reclassify Lots

12. Method of quantity validation for from and to quantities within a transaction. No validation performed. 1 Warning if out of balance. 2 Error if out of balance. 13. Enter which item search screen is to be used to return items. 1 = Item Search Window allowing the return of multiple items. 2 = Full item search screen with query capability. (If left blank the item search screen allowing the return of multiple items will be used.)

____________

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1145

Inventory Management

1146

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Advanced & Technical

Inventory Management

Update Item Search Information

G41

Inventory Management Enter 27

G4131

Inventory Advanced & Technical Ops Choose Global Updates & Purges

G41311

Global Updates & Purges Choose Rebuild Item Search

Updating Item Search Information

Run the Rebuild Item Search program to update the Item Search table. When you run a query search by item in Inventory Management, the system accesses the Item Search table (F41200) for item information. When you change item information through item master, item branch/plant, or item cross-reference information, those changes do not update the Item Search table. After you enter or change item master information, you must update the item search information. However, you can access items that have been entered or changed using other search modes. You can run the Rebuild Item Search program as often as necessary.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

123

Inventory Management

124

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Update Item Information

G41

Inventory Management Enter 27

G4131

Inventory Advanced & Technical Operations Choose Global Updates & Purges

G41311

Global Updates & Purges Choose Global Category Code Update

Updating Master Item Information

Changes to item or branch/plant information often require you to make global updates to your system. Complete the following tasks: - Update item master and item branch information - Update category codes and item numbers

Updating Item Master and Branch/Plant Information

Update Item Master Fields and Update Item Branch Fields are DREAM Writer programs that you use to update fields in the Item Master (F4101) and Item Branch (F4102) tables. You can select a version of either program from the version list. Modify the selection criteria by specifying which fields you want to update in the processing options. You also can change the value for the field.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

125

Inventory Management

Processing Options for Item Master Global Update

Enter a Y to run proof mode: (A Y will NOT update the Item Master File) Enter the new value for the following fields. If left blank, the field will retain the current value. If a * is placed by a field then it will be blanked out. Sales Catalog Section Sub Section Sales Category Code 3 Sales Category Code 4 Sales Category Code 5 Commodity Class Commodity Sub Class Vendor Rebate Code Master Planning Family Purchasing Category Code 5 Buyer Number Level Leadtime Planner Number Order Policy Code Issue Type Code ____________

____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________

Processing Options for Item Branch Global Update

Enter a Y to run proof mode: (A Y will NOT update the Item Branch File) Enter the new value for the following fields. If left blank, the field will retain the current value. If a * is placed by a field then it will be blanked out. Sales Catalog Section Sub Section Sales Category Code 3 Sales Category Code 4 Sales Category Code 5 Commodity Class Commodity Sub Class Vendor Rebate Code Master Planning Family Purchasing Category Code 5 Buyer Number Level Leadtime Planner Number Order Policy Code Issue Type Code ____________

____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________

126

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Update Item Information

Updating Category Codes and Item Numbers

You can run the Global Category Code Update program to update: Category codes from the Item Master table (F4101) to the Item Branch table (F4102) Second (product number) and third (catalog number) item numbers from the Item Master table (F4101) to the following tables: Item Branch (F4102) Bill of Materials Master (F3002) Routing Master (F3003) Lot Master (F4108) Cost Ledger (F4105) Through the processing options, you can specify the scope of the update: A single warehouse only A combination of warehouses All except one warehouse Verify your changes on Branch/Plant Item Information. Use caution when using this update. You are changing values that may affect processing and history.

Processing Options for Global Reporting Code Update

Enter a Y to duplicate the following into the Item Balance Record. Update Sales Report Code 1 Update Sales Report Code 2 Update Sales Report Code 3 Update Sales Report Code 4 Update Sales Report Code 5 Update Inventory Pricing Rule Update Reprice Rule Update Order Reprice Rule Update Purchase Report Update Purchase Report Update Purchase Report MPS Planning Family Update Purchase Report Code 1 Code 2 Code 3 Code 5

____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________

Update Buyer Number Update Shipping Condition Code Update Shipping Commodity Class

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

127

Inventory Management

Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update Update

Lifo Pool Category Cycle Count Category General Ledger Class Code Backorders Allowed Print Message Stocking Type ABC ABC ABC ABC Code 1 Code 2 Code 3 Override Indicator

____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________

128

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Revise Location Format

G41

Inventory Management Enter 27

G4131

Inventory Advanced & Technical Operations Choose Global Updates & Purges

G41311

Global Updates & Purges Choose Location Field Update

Revising Location Format

You can change the location formats that are set up in branch/plant constants. Using the Location Field Update program, you can globally update the location format for multiple locations, rather than having to update each locations format on an individual basis. Complete the following tasks: - Set up a model branch - Update the location format

Before You Begin

- Back up all of your files. - Do not allow any other users on the system until the batch job is complete.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

129

Inventory Management

What You Should Know About

Time allotment Correcting errors Be sure to allow enough time for the batch job to complete. When you update the Location field, the system prints a report listing errors. The procedure that you use to correct errors depends on the table where the error occurred. Generally, the procedure is: Restore all files. Correct the problem. Rerun the conversion for all files.

Setting Up a Model Branch

You must set up a model branch with your new location format before you can change the location format in other branch/plants. To set up a model branch

On Location Field Update 1. Locate a branch with the location format you want to use as your model.

1210

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Revise Location Format

2. Complete the following fields: Aisle Bin Location Code 3 (location codes 3 - 10)

Field Aisle

Explanation A code that identifies a location in a warehouse. This code is used in conjunction with a bin and lot identifier, to indicate a specific, tangible storage area within a warehouse or yard. A specific storage location within a warehouse or store. The system uses the bin with an aisle location to identify a storage area whose width, depth, and height can be readily measured.

Bin

Category Code Location 03 A code that the system uses for one of two purposes: To identify a specific location within a Branch/Plant as part of the location identifier. To use as a general reporting code for location information.

What You Should Know About

Length of location elements The New Size column indicates the number of characters you should enter in the adjacent location code field. You define the number of characters for each element in the location format through branch/plant constants.

Updating the Location Format

You run the Location Field Update program after you set up the model branch. You can run the update in proof or final mode. Specify the following in the processing options for the Location Field Update: Whether you want to run the update in proof or final mode Which tables you want to update Always submit the job from Location Field Update. Never submit the job for processing through the DREAM Writer versions list because the system may not include the tables you want to update.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

1211

Inventory Management

What You Should Know About

Update the location format You can update the location format on Branch/Plant Constants Page 2, if necessary.

Processing Options for Location Redefinition

Batch Re-Format Version: 1. Enter the version of the Batch Re-format program to be submited (P41821). If left blank, version ZJDE0001 will be used. ____________

1212

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Purges
Objectives
To understand the different types of purges

About Purges
After data becomes obsolete or you need more disk space, you can use purge programs to remove data from files. Purging data consists of: Specifying the information to delete Running the purge program Running the file reorganization program to rebuild file structure You must know the proper procedures and consequences of purging data to avoid serious damage to your system and data.

Before You Begin

- Back up the files that will be affected prior to running the purge program. - Determine the data that you want to purge

What You Should Know About

Customizing a purge You can create a customized purge by changing the data selection to meet your needs. For example, you could use a range of fiscal years rather than all dates. Custom purges are not available in the Item Deletion program, which has no processing options.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

131

Inventory Management

Processing options

You can set processing options that save tables in a special library and allow you to reorganize the purged tables. These options are very similar in all purge programs except Item Deletion and Supplemental Data.

132

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Purge Data

G41

Inventory Management Enter 27

G4131

Inventory Advanced & Technical Operations Choose Global Updates & Purges

G41311

Global Updates & Purges Choose an option

Purging Data
There are two types of purges within the distribution systems: General purges Special purges General purges include the Item History purge, which is a DREAM Writer version of the general purge program. The general purge program removes data from the Item History file (F4115). You can create DREAM Writer versions of the general purge program to purge data from any J.D. Edwards file, although J.D. Edwards recommends that you do not use general purges for files that have their own special purge programs. General purges are not designed for files that are associated with data in other files. Running a general purge for such files could cause you to lose important data. J.D Edwards provides special purges for removing data from files. Special purges are DREAM Writer programs that allow you to provide more specific information. Special purges have built-in criteria that the system checks before removing any data. For example, you might want to purge an Item Master record that has an associated record in the Item Location file (F41021). The built-in selection criteria prevents the system from purging the Item Location record.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

133

Inventory Management

Each distribution system comes with special purge programs. In Inventory Management, the special purge programs include the following: Item Deletion (all files associated with itemsF4101, F4102, F4111, F4211, and F4311) Item Master (F4101) Item Balance (F4102) Complete the following tasks: - Run the general purge - Run the special purge

Before You Begin

- Verify that no users are working with the data that you want to purge and reorganize

What You Should Know About

Technical considerations The following technical considerations apply to both general and special purges: If File Output Type on the DREAM Writer Additional Parameters form for the DREAM Writer version you are using is set to 1 (for OPNQRYF), you must also set the Open for Delete (Y/N) field to Y. Also, you must specify at least one field in Data Sequencing. If File Output Type on the DREAM Writer Additional Parameters form for the DREAM Writer version you are using is set to 2 (for logical file), the purge will reorganize the purged file based on the logical file that the system builds. This might increase the time the system takes to perform the file reorganization.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Purge Data

Running the General Purge

To perform a general purge, run the Item History Purge. The Item History Purge is a DREAM Writer program that you run when you want to remove a large amount of data and do not need to be concerned with implications for other files. You can use this program to perform either a global or specific purge. To perform a specific purge, specify selection criteria.

Processing Options for Generic Purge Program

Save Purged Records: 1. Enter a 1 to save the purged records to a special purge library. (Default of blanks will NOT save any purged records.) Reorganize File: 2. Enter a 1 to reorganize the purged file. (Default of blanks will NOT reorganize the file.) ____________

____________

Running the Special Purge

Running special purges includes the following tasks: - Running the Item Deletion purge - Running the Item Master purge - Running the Item Balance purge

Running the Item Deletion Purge

Run the Item Deletion Purge to permanently remove an items records from all files in the system except the sales order files (F4211 and F4201). The system deletes any existing sales order detail lines and adjusts the total order amount on the sales order header to account for the deletion. The system also adjusts the on order amount in the Billing Instructions file (F4205). Item Deletion is an RPGSQL program. Therefore, you must run it in an AS/400 environment. The system deletes the item that you specify from the following files:

Field F0018

Explanation Sales/Use/V.A.T. Tax

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

135

Inventory Management

Field F3002 F30026 F3011 F3411 F3412 F3413 F3460 F4008 F41002

Explanation Bill of Materials Master Item Cost Component Information Bill of Materials Change MPS/MRP/DRP Message MPS/MRP/DRP Lower Level Requirements MPS/MRP/DRP Summary Forecast Tax Areas Unit of Measure Conversion Factors Item Master Item Branch Master Item Location Item Cross-Reference Item Cost Ledger Item Price Item Ledger Item History WF Inventory Turn Report Item Cost Components Cycle Count Transactions Tag Inventory Sales Commission Sales Order Header Held Orders Sales Order Detail Sales Order Reprice Serial Number Warranty Sales Summary History Purchase Order Header Purchase Order Detail Purchase Order Receiver Work Order Master

F4101
F4102 F41021 F4104 F4105 F4106 F4111 F4115 F4116 F41291 F4141 F4160 F42005 F4201 F4209 F4211 F4213 F4220 F4229 F4301 F4311 F43121 F4801

136

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Purge Data

To run the Item Deletion purge

On Item Deletion

1. Complete the following field: Item No 2. Delete the item. The system displays a caution message and indicates the amount by which you will need to adjust the general ledger records if you confirm the deletion. 3. Confirm the deletion or return to the first form in Item Deletion.

Field Item Number

Explanation A number that the system assigns to an item. It can be in short, long, or 3rd item number format.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

137

Inventory Management

Running the Item Master Purge

The Item Master purge allows you to select and purge specific information from the Item Master file (F4101). Before purging the records you specify from the Item Master file, the system verifies that the records are not associated with other files. The system will not purge any item information that exists in the following files: Item Location (F41021) Item Branch (F4102) Cost Ledger (F4105) Lot Master (F4108) Item Bill of Material (F3002) Item Routing (F3003)

Processing Options for Item Master (F4101) Purge

Enter a 1 to save the purged records to a special purge library. (Default of blanks will NOT save any purged records.) Enter a 1 to reorganize the purged file. (Default of blanks will NOT reorganize the file.) ____________

____________

Running the Item Balance Purge

The Item Balance purge allows you to select and purge records that you specify from the Item Branch file (F4102). Before purging the specified records from the Item Branch file, the system verifies the records using the following criteria. The system will not purge the records if: Work orders exist in the Work Order Master file (F4801) A parts list exists in the Work Order Parts List file (F3111) A bill of materials exists in the the Bill of Materials Master file (F3002) Any secondary locations exist in the Item Location file There are deleted records from files There is information in any of the following fields for the item location record: On-hand Hard Commitments

138

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Purge Data

Soft Commitments Back Order Quantity On Order Quantity Quantity Outbound (EDI) Quantity Inbound (EDI) The system also checks all quantity fields for primary and secondary locations. After the system determines which Item Balance records are to be purged, the following occurs: The system verifies the records in the Item Branch file. The system verifies that all records in the Item Location file (F41021) with the same item and branch have zero quantities. Next, the system checks the Item Bill of Material, Work Order Parts List, and the Work Order Master files. If it does not use this item and business unit combination in any of these files, the system continues. The system then starts the purge process. The system first purges the Item Branch record. If the cost level for this item is 2, the system purges the cost records for this item and branch. The system then purges the Unit of Measure Conversion records for this item and branch. Finally, the system purges the Item Location records. If the cost level for this item is 3, the system purges the cost records for this item, branch, location, and lot. If you have set the processing option to delete all Item Branch information, the following occurs: The system checks the Item Branch file. The system starts the purge process. The system verifies the Item Location file (F41021) to ensure that records with the same item and branch have zero quantities and are not primary bins. If these conditions exist, the system purges these records. If the cost level for this item is 3, the system purges the cost records for item, branch, location, and lot.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

139

Inventory Management

What You Should Know About

Saved purged records processing option Purges performed on the same file and on the same day will be added to the existing library and file, if you set this processing option to save. If you do not set this processing option to automatically submit the Reorganize Files program, you can run it manually at a later time.

Reorganize file processing option

Processing Options for Item Location (F4102) Purge

1. Enter a 1 records to (Default of any purged to save the purged a special purge library. blanks will NOT save records.) ____________

Enter a 1 to reorganize the purged files. (Default of blanks will NOT reorganize the files.)

____________

Enter a 1 to delete ALL Item Branch information eligible for purging. (If this option is blank only the Item Location records with all quantities zero will be purged). ** See Helps for additional detail on level of detail for purge **.

____________

Convert Display Decimals

G41

Inventory Management Enter 27

G4131

Inventory Advanced & Technical Ops Choose an option under the Data Item Conversions heading

Converting Display Decimals

You can change the number of decimal positions for quantity data items in your system. For example, you can change the Quantity Available field to display four decimal positions instead of two decimal positions. Quantity Available 43.25 Quantity Available 43.2500

You determine the data items to convert by specifying the data dictionary library in which the data items reside. The quantity data items are precoded in the data dictionary. You specify the data items to convert by selecting all quantity data items with the same value in the data dictionary. Complete the following tasks: - Review data items - Run the conversion program

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

143

Inventory Management

Before You Begin

- Verify that the crossreference relationship tables F98001, F98001LA, and F98002LA already exist in your system before you change decimal positions for data items - Verify that you have QSECOFR authority, which is required for changing decimal positions for data items - Verify that no users are signed on to the J.D. Edwards system while you run the batch job

What You Should Know About

Converting display decimals The decimal conversion process is currently set up to work with quantitative fields only. You must convert all quantity fields (as opposed to selecting certain data items to convert). If you are working in a decimal environment, you might need to follow special instructions when you convert new quantity fields. Please call the J.D. Edwards response line.

Upgrading display decimals

Reviewing Data Items

Before running the Data Item Conversion procedure, you can review the data items to convert. The system displays the data items that are available to convert based on the information you specify, including: The data dictionary library in which the data items reside The data item category for the data items The number of decimal positions from which to convert The system displays only those data items that currently have decimal positions other than the number of decimal positions to which you are converting. After you convert display decimals, the system: Updates decimal positions for all data in the data file libraries that you specify in processing options Updates the Display Decimals field in the data dictionary for each data item Builds the crossreference for each data file in each library that you specify in processing options

144

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Convert Display Decimals

After you convert data items, you can view those files that are affected by a data item by accessing the Cross-Reference form. The list of cross-reference files is updated when you run the conversion procedure. To review data items

On Data Item Conversion

1. Complete the following fields: Data Dictionary Library Data Item Class To Data Display Decimals

Field Data Dictionary Library Data Item Class To Data Display Decimals

Explanation The Data File Library Name field designates the library location of the data base files. Data item class. A class defines the essential attributes and characteristics of a data item. Informational only. Use this parameter to designate the number of decimals in the currency, amount, or quantity fields the system displays. For example, U.S. Dollars would be 2 decimals, Japanese Yen would be no decimals, and Cameroon Francs would be 3 decimals.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

145

Inventory Management

To convert data items

On Data Item Conversion 1. Confirm that all data items for which you want to change decimal positions appear in the list. 2. Activate the conversion process. The job that you submit will have the same name as the data item category specified.

Processing Options for Data Item Conversion

Enter ALL data file libraries to have their data items converted. All of the libraries related to the data dictionary library MUST be entered. Library Library Library Library Library Library Library Library Library Library 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________ ____________

146

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Convert Cost Levels

G41

Inventory Management Enter 27

G4131

Inventory Advanced & Technical Ops Choose Item Cost Level Conversion

Converting Cost Levels

To change the level at which you maintain costs for an item, you must run the Item Cost Level Conversion program. For example, if you maintain costs for an item at the branch/plant level and you want to maintain costs at the branch/plant and location level, you must change the items cost level.

What Item Cost Level Conversion Does

When you change an items cost level, the system deletes all existing cost records for the item in the Item Cost Ledger table (F4105) and creates new cost records that correspond to the level. The system uses the Sales/Inventory cost method for the item to create the new cost records. This procedure does not change the cost valuation of items and does not create journal entries. For example if you change an items cost level from branch/plant and location to branch/plant, all existing cost records for the branch/plant and location must contain the same Sales/Inventory cost method and cost. You can run the Item Cost Level Conversion is a program in proof or final mode. When you run the procedure in proof mode, the system provides you a with a report showing errors that need correction. You should always run the procedure in proof mode first to clear any discrepancies.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

147

Inventory Management

41815

J.D. Edwards & Company Item Cost Level Conversion *** Proof Mode ***

Page Date

2 4/10/95

Item Number Branch Location E001 30 E001 30 DAMAGED P002 10 P002 10 1 B 1 P002 20 P002 20 1 B 1 P002 30 P002 30 1 B 1 P002 40 P002 40 D P002 40 R P002 40 1 B 1 P002 40 3 E TS002 10 TS002 10 1 C 1 TS002 20 TS002 20 1 C 1 TS002 30 TS002 30 1 C 1 TS002 40 TS002 40 R TS002 40 1 C 1 TS002 40 2 C 1 V001 10 V001 10 1 A 1 V001 10 1 A 2 V001 20 V001 20 1 A 1 V001 20 1 A 2 V001 30 V001 30 1 A 1 V001 30 1 A 2 V001 40 V001 40 D V001 40 R V001 40 1 A 1 V001 40 1 A 2 V001 40 3 F

Lot L CM Unit Cost 3 01 6.6378 3 01 6.4100 3 01 30.7500 3 02 30.3750 3 01 31.4333 3 02 30.8417 3 01 30.1049 3 02 30.2500 3 02 30.5610 3 02 30.2500 3 02 30.2500 3 02 30.2500 3 02 30.2500 3 01 43.1200 3 02 43.5000 3 01 43.1200 3 02 43.5000 3 01 66.0000 3 01 43.9573 3 02 43.7336 3 02 43.5000 3 02 43.5000 3 02 43.5000 3 01 16.1500 9310140004 3 01 16.0000 9310140002 3 01 16.0000 3 01 16.1500 9310140005 3 01 16.0000 9310140003 3 01 16.0000 3 01 16.1500 00000006 3 01 16.0000 00000005 3 01 16.0000 3 02 16.1455 00000007 3 02 16.0000 00000007 3 02 16.0000 00000007 3 02 16.0000 00000007 3 02 16.0000 00000007 3 02 16.0000

Remark Basing comparison on this record Cost not the same Basing comparison on this record Costing Method/Cost not the same Basing comparison on this record Costing Method/Cost not the same Basing comparison on this record Costing Method/Cost not the same Basing comparison on this record Cost not the same Cost not the same Cost not the same Cost not the same Basing comparison on this record Costing Method/Cost not the same Basing comparison on this record Costing Method/Cost not the same Basing comparison on this record Cost not the same Basing comparison on this record Cost not the same Cost not the same Cost not the same Basing comparison on this record Cost not the same Cost not the same Basing comparison on this record Cost not the same Cost not the same Basing comparison on this record Cost not the same Cost not the same Basing comparison on this record Cost not the same Cost not the same Cost not the same Cost not the same Cost not the same

The report includes the following information: Whether errors occurred or if the update process was successful The number of items successfully updated The number of items in error If an error occurred, the report indicates: The record used for the comparison, if appropriate The specific error, which prints after the comparison line If the cost level changed from a 3 to 2, 3 to 1, or 2 to 1, the report identifies: Cost level Costing method Cost columns 148

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Convert Cost Levels

When you run the procedure in final mode, the system: Updates the Item Master file (F4101) Inventory Cost Level value (CLEV) Updates the Cost Ledger file (F4105)

Before You Begin

- Verify that no users are accessing the Item Master or Cost tables when you are running this program in final mode See Also Defining Cost Levels (P4101) for information about the applicable cost levels for items and what each cost level represents.

Appendix AData Model

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

A2
1
Item Number Item Master F4101

1 M 1 1 1 Item Number
Branch Item Branch F4102

Inventory Management

M 1 1

Branch/Plant Constants F41001 Branch

1 M 1 M
Price Adjustment Detail F4072 Item Branch Lot Location Primary Bin Item Location F41021

1 1
Cost Components F30026

1 M 1
Cost Ledger F4105

Pricing F4106

Item Number Branch Location Lot Adjustment Type Item Number Address No.

M M 1

Item Number Branch Location Lot Ledger Type Cost Method

Item Number Branch Location Lot Ledger Type

1 1
Lot Master F4108 Item mber Bra

M
Location Detail F4602

Location Master F4100 h

Release A7.1 (March 1995)

Item

Appendix B Answers to Test Yourself

Item Entry
1. F4101 2. There are three ways to identify an item: Short item number Product number Catalog number 3. Set up units of measure for an item across all branch/plants or by item/branch/plant combination. 4. You can specify the following locations to allow backorders: Item Master Branch/Plant Information Branch/Plant Constants Customer Billing Instructions 5. There are three ways to set up cost/price information: By item, for all branches and locations By item and branch/plant combination By each item, branch/plant, and location(lot) 6. There are two ways to set up conversion information for units of measure: Specific conversions by item through Item Master Information Standard conversions for units of measure, if applicable to the item 7. Table numbers are: F4102 F41021 F4105 F4106 8. You can set up an unlimited number of cost methods. 9. You can set up an unlimited number of secondary locations.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

10. Use the Branch/Plant Duplication and Branch/Plant Duplication Batch programs.

Inventory Transactions
1. The selected inventory costing method. 2. The transaction date is used for item ledger records (F4111) created, and the G/L date is used for the general ledger transaction records (F0911) created. 3. No, they can only be reversed. 4. Issues program. 5. Immediately. 6. The system automatically creates journal entries to remove the cost, using AAIs.

Item and Quantity Information and Reports

1. You define availability in the branch/plant constants. The system begins with the on-hand quantity and adds or subtracts those quantities that you select. 2. Four quantity fields (buckets) are: Current (includes soft and hard commitments) Future Other Quantity 1 Other Quantity 2 3. Allocate inventory from the primary location first until it is depleted, then allocate inventory from the secondary locations, in order of most quantity available. 4. The Item Ledger (The Cardex) displays any transaction or entry that affects a locations quantity information or cost information. 5. An items on-hand quantity is affected by the following: Adjustments Issues Transfers Reclassifications Sales update Purchase order receipts Positive or negative variances during inventory counts 6. The Running Balance format on Item Ledger Inquiry shows inventory transactions that are based on the G/L date for reconciliation purposes.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Appendix B Answers to Test Yourself

7. Use the Summary Availability form. 8. Use the Buyers Information form. 9. Use the Supply/Demand Inquiry form. 10. Use the Item Cross-Reference program. 11. The benefits of building the As Of file are that: You improve processing time when reviewing the Running Balance format of the Item Ledger screen You can purge the Item Ledger and still have balance forward (BF) records to represent old transactions 12. The number of the As Of table is F41112. 13. Besides the Item Ledger, other programs using the As Of table are: Item Ledger by G/L Class report Both inventory integrity reports Item Ledger Detail report 14. Refresh the As Of table at the end of each accounting period (for example, monthly). 15. Once a transaction has been included in a balance forward (BF) record, it is marked as already summarized. 16. The Price Book report provides a list of items with list prices and discount prices. 17. The Cost Analysis report lists variances of current transaction costs as they compare to the current cost. 18. The Margin Analysis report lets you review your current costs as they compare to the sales price of current transactions. 19. The Inventory Turn report lets you analyze trends in your environment and inventory costs. 20. The Item Ledger/Account Integrity report lists discrepancies between the item ledger amounts and G/L ledger amounts.

Cost Updates
1. The three ways to increase or decrease costs include: Override cost Increase/decrease by amount Increase/decrease by percentage 2. When you change a cost: The system records it in the Cost table (F4105).

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

If the cost that you change reflects the selected inventory costing method: The system records an Item Ledger record (F4111) for the cost change (it revalues existing inventory) The system records General Ledger record (F0922) for the cost change (to account for inventory revaluation)

3. Set the processing option to not allow changes to the standard cost method. 4. Run the Batch Cost Maintenance program with cost information in Proof mode first. The system creates a report as history information or to selectively update costs using the Speed Cost Maintenance program. 5. Calculate a true average cost based on the average costs of all locations by: Automatically calculating the average cost each time a receipt occurs Recording each transaction in the Average Cost Workfile (F41059) that affects an items average cost and running the Average Cost Update program later in a batch mode based on the transactions in the workfile.

Inventory Management

Before You Begin

- Verify that container information and container transactions have been entered and processed through the Purchase Management, Inventory Management, and Sales Order Management systems

See Also
Entering Item Master Information (P4101) Purchase Management Guide for more information about processing purchase orders Sales Order Management Guide for more information about processing sales orders

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Understand Container Management

About Container Management

The sale of products in containers involves a unique inventory process. Container Management extracts information about container transactions from other systems and stores this information in tables specific to Container Management. This allows you to closely track all transactions that involve containers. You loan containers to your customers to store the product that they purchase until the product is depleted. Your customers then return the containers to you, usually in exchange for full containers. You maintain ownership of the containers while they are in the possession of your customer. These outgoing and incoming transactions, in which containers are not sold, present two main issues for your company: The containers are of high value. You retain responsibility for them while they are in your customer's possession. It is imperative that you are always able to track and account for these containers. Your customer pays a deposit fee or rental fee for each container. These fees must be tracked separately from the invoicing for the product. Container Management allows you to address these issues and manage the regular exchange of containers and payment of deposit and rental fees and refunds.

The Container Life Cycle

Purchase containers

Periodic Maintenance Inventory Storage Empty Full Filling

Return

Return Distributor Delivery

Empty/ Used

Scrap

Customer

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

Normally, the supplying company purchases the container and introduces it into the cycle at the filling plant. After you fill and test the container, you either deliver it to the customer or send it to storage for future delivery. You can also send the full container to a distributor who, in turn, delivers it to the customer. The customer and distributor return the empty container to you after the product it contains has been used up. As the container repeats this cycle for a period of time, it eventually requires maintenance. Maintenance is critical for storing the product safely in the container. You need to inspect the container after every cycle through the filling plant. After a number of cycles, you can no longer use the container because it is damaged beyond repair, and you must scrap it. You use Container Management to track the container through the cycles and manage the deposits and refunds that must be generated for these exchanges.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Understand Container Management

System Flow
You use Container Management only after you have processed the container through the Purchase Management and Sales Order Management systems. The following graphic demonstrates how Container Management fits into the overall system flow. System Flow
Systems
Inventory Bulk Product
Increase inventory

Purchase Receipts and Vouchering

Increase inventory

Purchase Management

Decrease inventory Increase inventory

General Stock Movements Filling Trans.

Decrease inventory

Inventory Empty Containers

Inventory Management

Inventory Full Containers

Sales Order Processing

Sales Order Management

Decrease inventory

Load Confirmation

Increase inventory if there is a return of undelivered product

Delivery/Ship Confirmation

Increase inventory if confirm of a credit order

Container Management

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

Container Management
Container Management Extraction Container Transaction F41181
Read transaction processed for the period

Record transactions based on line type

Sales Update

Create deposit/rental sales order lines

Container Deposit Billing Container Reconciliations P41185 Container Deposit F4118

Generate invoices for product and deposits/refunds

Accounts Receivable

Container Reconciliations F41185

You must perform a number of tasks before you can use Container Management, including: Recording the receipt of the container Filling the container Processing sales orders

Recording the Receipt of the Container

You only purchase empty containers in limited quantity as they are needed to replace scrapped containers or to meet increased demand. You enter purchase orders in the Purchase Management system to record the ordering of new containers. When the containers arrive, you record the receipt of the new containers to write a record to the Item Ledger (F4111) table (the Cardex), and to update the general ledger accounts. The Item Ledger table is the central repository of all inventory and cost movements. Each program from all other J.D. Edwards systems that handles inventory writes records to this table whenever inventory and cost are affected. You then compare the receipt for the containers to the purchase order. If the Purchase Management system detects a variance, it writes a new record to the Item Ledger table and updates the general ledger accounts. Usually, you enter the empty container into the Purchase Management system with no cost so that when it is filled with the bulk product, the cost of the full container will equal the cost of the bulk product. You can process the empty container as either an expenditure or a fixed asset. If you choose the latter, you can use the Fixed Asset system to track the empty container.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Understand Container Management

Filling the Container

You record the filling of containers in the Inventory Management system and, optionally, the Bulk Stock Control system. When you fill an empty container with a bulk product, you create a new packaged item, which is the full container. The Inventory Management system does the following when you fill a container: Reduces the inventory of empty containers Reduces the inventory of bulk product Increases the inventory of full containers

Processing Sales Orders

You enter a sales order when you receive the request of a purchase by a customer. You enter the full container on the sales order as the item that is sold to the customer. If the customer is returning empty containers at the same time as taking delivery of full ones, you also enter a credit for the number of empty containers on the sales order. You record the shipping of items to confirm the reduction in inventory or to confirm the return of empty or full, undelivered containers to inventory. You perform this additional task within the Sales Order Management system. If you use the ECS Sales Order Management system, you also need the Load and Delivery Management system to perform this task. When you perform a load and delivery confirmation, the system writes a record to the Item Ledger table to reduce the inventory of full containers. If you have undelivered containers, the system writes a record to the Item Ledger table to increase the inventory of full containers. You must enter a credit order and perform a confirmation on the order to record empty containers that your customers return. The Sales Order Management system processes these credit orders and increases the number of empty containers in the Item Ledger table. At this point Container Management interfaces with the other systems to extract container transaction information and maintain it in tables specific to Container Management.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

Business Considerations
The J.D. Edwards integrated systems provide the flexibility to accommodate the full range of business considerations in distribution industries. Additional features support the unique considerations of the energy and chemical industry. In addition the the inventory management of containers, Container Management addresses the following business considerations: Types of containers Deposit and rental fee accounts Deposit layers Billing methods

Types of Containers
Container Management can be used to track any type of container, such as pallets, metal cylinders, or railroad cars. In the energy and chemical industry, the most common type of container is the metal cylinder. The following two types of products are usually sold in metal cylinders: Liquid Propane Gas (LPG)In some countries, and some remote locations, where there is no piped" natural gas to houses, LPG stored in metal cylinder containers is the main source for cooking and heating. LPG also has common industrial applications, such as for cutting torches or as a propellant for packaged spray products. Environmental GasesThe environmental gases supplied in metal cylinder containers can be oxygen, argon, helium, nitrogen, hydrogen, and carbon dioxide. Because the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) requires specific storage and transportation procedures for these gases, there is an even greater need to track them carefully. These metal cylinder containers do not have significant structural differences. They vary primarily in size and capacity but are typically of the same design. They are built to be portable for the specialized uses required by each customer. Companies usually carry an extremely large inventory of containers, most of which are in constant circulation with customers.

Deposit and Rental Fee Accounts

Your company should set up a separate account to record customer deposit and rental fees. You draw against this account only for container refunds. Deposit, rental fee, and refund invoices should not impact a customers normal revenue and cash accounts. In the case of a bad risk customer who returns containers but does not pay for the product, you can use the refunds issued for the returned containers to pay outstanding invoices.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Understand Container Management

Deposit Layers
The initial payment by the customer, the deposit, limits the customer in the number of containers that you will allow for exchange without charging additional deposits. Container Management stores each deposit received from a customer as a layer. Container Management creates additional deposit layers when the customer takes delivery of containers exceeding the number allowed by the initial deposit. For example, if a customer initially deposits $100,000.00 for 10,000 containers at a rate of $10.00 each and then takes delivery of 11,000 containers, you charge the customer for the 1,000 extra containers at the current deposit rate. When you receive the additional payment for the 1,000 containers, Container Management creates a new layer for the deposit. Container Management uses the First In/First Out (FIFO) method of accounting to calculate refunds. With this method, Container Management depletes the oldest deposit layer first when issuing refunds. If the deposit rate for a customer changes, the rate used to calculate the refund is the rate used in the oldest, undepleted layer. The following example demonstrates how the system depletes deposit layers using the FIFO method. In this case, you refund the deposit for the 3,000 containers from the earliest layer, which is the layer created on 01/01/90. This reduces the balance for that layers deposit to 2,000 containers at $20.00 each.

FIFO Refund ProcessingPeriod Ending 02/28/98

Description Quantity Rate Amount

1-Jan-93 15-Dec-96 10-Feb-98 Opening Balance Quantity Delivered Quantity Returned Net Delivered/Returned Closing Balance Net Adjusted Deposit 1-Jan-93 15-Dec-96 10-Feb-98 Closing Balance

5,000 3,000 1,000 9,000 5,000 8,000 -3,000 6,000 -3,000 Adjusted Deposit Balance 2,000 3,000 1,000 6,000

$20.00 $30.00 $40.00

$100,000.00 $90,000.00 $40,000.00 $230,000.00

$20.00 $20.00 $30.00 $40.00

($60,000.00) $40,000.00 $90,000.00 $40,000.00 $170,000.00

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

Billing Methods
Container Management uses the following two methods to determine how a customer is billed for deposits and rentals: Summary method Transaction method Summary Method With the summary method, Container Management calculates the net quantity and amount for the transactions that occur in a period and issues an invoice or refund based on the total outcome. In the example below, the first return and delivery is an even exchange for the customer. The second exchange on 01/15/95 is not. The summary method allows the customer to make these exchanges without being charged. The only criteria for being charged an additional deposit is if the delivered quantity nets more than 5,000 containers.

Customer Transaction Record

Description Initial Deposit Returned Delivered Returned Delivered Returned Delivered Balance Date 01/01/98 01/10/95 01/10/95 01/15/95 01/15/95 01/25/95 01/25/95 Quantity 5,000 (500) 500 (1,000) 800 (800) 1,000 5,000 $100,000.00 Rate $20.00 Amount $100,000.00

Transaction Method With the transaction method, Container Management processes each transaction recorded for the customer. You refund for each return and charge for each delivery. This method varies significantly from the summary method when the deposit rate changes. The example below demonstrates the results when the system uses the transaction method in conjunction with the FIFO accounting method. In this case, you charge the customer even though the customer does not surpass the initial number of containers on deposit.

Customer Transaction Record

Description Initial Deposit Returned Date 01/01/95 01/10/95 Quantity 5,000 (500) Rate $20.00 $20.00 Amount $100,000.00 ($10,000.00)

C10

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Understand Container Management

Delivered Returned Delivered Returned Delivered Balance

01/10/95 01/15/95 01/15/95 01/25/95 01/25/95

500 (1,000) 800 (800) 1,000 5,000

Before You Begin

- Verify that the order line types and order activity rules have been set up. See Setting Up Order Line Types and Setting Up Order Activity Rules in the Sales Order Management Guide. - Verify that item crossreferences have been set up for full and empty containers. See Setting Up Container Item CrossReferences. - Verify that the Container Deposit/Rental and Invoice Cycle preferences have been set up. See Setting Up Container Preferences.

Generating the Container Management Extraction Server Report

When you set the appropriate processing option for the Container Management Extraction Server, the program produces a report showing each of the records added to the Container Transaction table.

C14

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Process Container Transactions

41189

J.D. Edwards & Company Container Management Extraction Server

Page . . . 2 Date . . . 14.05.96

The following records were added/updated in the Container Transaction File: Ln Do Trans Scheduled Cust. No Item No. Branch/Plt Co. Order # Line # Ty Ty Key Co XRef It Date Quantity UM Invoice Dt 500 515653 DEPOT1 249 10526 1,000 CT SO 249 515696 14.05.96 1 EA 31.05.96

What You Should Know About

Tracking container invoices When the Container Management Extraction Server reads a record that already exists in the Container Transaction table, it checks the status codes of the record in the Sales Order Detail table to determine if you have processed the record through the Container Billing program. The Container Management Extraction Server updates the record only if you have not already processed it through Container Billing.

The Container Billing program reads the Container Transaction table and, for customers who are scheduled to be invoiced, creates sales order detail lines for deposit charges, rental fees, or refunds. This program creates records in the Container Deposit (F4118) table that correspond to each deposit charge, rental fee, and refund. The program also creates records in the Sales Order Tag (F49211) table. Generating the Container Billing Report When you set the appropriate processing option, the Container Billing program prints a report of the records it has created and updated.

41180

J.D. Edwards & Company Container Management Deposits/Rentals

Page . . . 3 Date . . . 14.05.96

Item Number. . . E100 Branch/Plant . .

DEPOT1

100kg Empty Container LPG Depot 1

Document Customer Name Deposits Refunds UM Rate Amount Number Ty 500 Gas Station 1 EA 39,0000 39,00 207 CD

Processing Options for Container Deposit/Refund/Rental Billing

Document Creation Options: 1. Enter the document type for deposits, refunds, and rentals (required): 2. 3. 4. Enter the line type used for deposits, refunds and rentals: Enter the last status code for deposit, refund and rental lines: Enter the override next status code for deposit, refund and rental lines:

____________

C18

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Process Container Transactions

Dream Writer Version: Enter the version for the appropriate program. If left blank, ZJDE0001 will be used. 5. Preference Profiles 6. (ECS Only) ECS Preference Profiles (P40400) (P40400EC) ____________ ____________

Print Report: 7. Enter 1 to print a report of the created/updated records. Rentals: 8. Enter the rent through date. If left blank the current system date will be used. Address Book Default Value: 9. Enter a 1 to default the branch from the Address Book. If left blank, it will default from the container transaction.

____________

What You Should Know About Processing Options

Line type

You must identify the line type you have set up for deposit and refund sales order lines in the processing options for this program. This line type must be a non-stock line type, that is, it should not interface with the Inventory Mangement system.

Processing Deposit, Rental Fee, and Refund Sales Order Lines

After you have created container deposit charge, rental fee, and refund sales order lines, you can print invoices for customers who are due to be billed and update all applicable records. Sales order lines for deposit charges, rental fees, and refunds flow through the normal invoicing process and customer sales updates in the Sales Order Management system. The customer sales update posts entries to the general ledger and updates the following tables with container transaction information: Sales Order Header (F4201) Sales Order Detail (F4211) Item Location (F41021) Account Ledger (F0911) Accounts Receivable Ledger (F0311) Item Ledger (F4111)

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

C19

Inventory Management

When you process deposit charges, rental fees, or refunds through invoicing, the system will generate either a transaction or summary invoice, depending on whether the Container Billing program created transaction or summary sales order detail lines. The transaction invoice contains separate lines for each container transaction recorded for the customer. The summary invoice summarizes all transactions over a specified period for a single combination of branch/plant, customer, and item. The following is an example of a transaction invoice.

J.D. Edwards & Company I N V O I C E

Page Number Date Customer Brn/Plt Related PO Order Nbr Invoice Gas station 8700 Busy Road Houston TX 77401

1 05/08/96 500 DEPOT1 196 CD

Sold To:

Gas station 8700 Busy Road Houston TX 77401

Ship To:

Tax ID: Tax Cert: Request Date Customer P.O. F.O.B. Ship : 04/30/98 . Inst : Ln/Rq Dt Description Item Number UM Ship/Back/Cance Price Extended Price Tax Extended Cost .100 100 LT Empty Container EC100 EA S 25 40.0000 1,000.00 04/30/98 Per EA * Not Eligible for Discount * .200 100 LT Empty Container EC100 EA S 3 30.0000 90.00 04/30/98 Per EA * Not Eligible for Discount * .300 100 LT Empty Container EC100 EA S 12 35.0000 420.00 04/30/98 Per EA * Not Eligible for Discount * .400 100 LT Empty Container EC100 EA S 4 45.0000 180.00 04/30/98 Per EA * Not Eligible for Discount * .500 200 LT Empty Container EC200 EA S 40 80.0000 3,200.00 04/30/98 Per EA * Not Eligible for Discount *

Pct

100

Sales Tax Total Order Terms Net 30 Days Net Due Date 06/07/96 Tax Rt 3,870.00

C20

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Process Container Transactions

See Also
Processing Orders in the Sales Order Management Guide for more information about processing order lines through invoicing End of Day Processing in the Sales Order Management Guide for more information about customer sales updates

Generating Reports
G4 Distribution/Logistics Systems Choose Container Management

G4118

Container Management Choose an option

To review the container transaction activity for each customer and the number of containers you have on hand, you can do the following: - Generate the Customer/Distributor Balance Statement - Generate the Container Reconciliations Report

Generating the Customer/Distributor Balance Statement

The Customer/Distributor Balance program reads the Container Deposit and Container Transaction tables and prints a report of the customers or distributors deposits and container transactions for a given period. The report includes the deposit balance for the customer or distributor and the deposit and refund amounts by layer. You can use the Customer/Distributor Balance report as a statement of account activity to send to your customer or distributor. You can run this program in proof or final mode. When you run it in final mode, the program updates the Container Deposit and Container Transaction tables. The program prints transaction level or summary level invoice statements, depending on how you set up the preferences for the customer. The transaction level invoice statement displays the deposit charge or refund sales order lines for each container transaction recorded for the customer. The summary level invoice statement summarizes all transactions over a specified period for a single combination of branch/plant, customer, and item.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

C21

Inventory Management

The following is an example of a transaction level invoice statement.

41182

J.D. Edwards & Company Customer/Distributor Balance

Page . . . Date . . .

1 5/15/96

Statement for Period Ending 05/15/96 Customer: Gas station 8700 Busy Road Houston TX 77401 Supplier: Model Energy & Chemical Company 5600 Fuels Road New Jersey NJ 40228

Item Number. . . . . Branch/Plant . . . .

E50 DEPOT1 Depot 1

50 kg Empty Container LPG

Invoice Date/Desc 11/21/95 11/21/95 11/21/95 11/21/95 11/21/95 11/21/95 11/22/95 11/22/95 11/22/95 11/22/95 12/06/95 12/06/95 12/11/95 Total . . . Quantity Delivered: Quantity Returned:

. . . . . Deposit Balance . . . . . . . . Current Period Activity . . . . Quantity Rate Amount Deposits Refunds Amount 379 1.0000 379.00 3 3.00 200 1.0000 200.00 100 1.0000 100.00 56 1.0000 56.00 50 1.0000 50.00 10 1.0000 10.00 63 1.0000 63.00 39 1.0000 39.00 1 1.0000 1.00 1 1.0000 1.00 350 1.0000 350.00 250 1.0000 250.00 10 1.0000 10.00 =============== ===================== =============== =============== ===================== 1509 1,509.00 3 3.00

3 =============== Net Delivery/Returns: 3

Processing Options for Customer/Distributor Balance

Proof Or Final Mode: 1. Enter 1 to run the program in FINAL mode updating the records as processed. Default of blank will execute in PROOF mode (no update). Statement Date: 2. Enter the statement through date. Default = current date. Line Types: 3. Enter the line type for deliveries: 4. Enter the line type for returns:

____________

Generating the Container Reconciliations Report

C22

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Process Container Transactions

The Container Reconciliations program analyzes the transactions for each item with a line type for full containers, finds the cross-referenced empty containers for each of the full containers, and calculates the ending balance of containers in each branch. This report includes the following information: Quantity delivered and returned for each container Quantity on hand by branch for each container Total quantity in the company for each container Grand total of all containers in the company You can also set the appropriate processing option to print the totals for the company only. You can run the Container Reconciliations program in proof or update mode. If you run the program in update mode, it creates records by item and branch/plant in the Container Reconciliation table. It also places a 1 in the reconciliation flag field in the Container Transaction table. The next time you run the Container Reconciliations program, it will not read these transactions. Before You Begin - Verify that the correct item crossreferences have been set up for full and empty containers. See Setting Up Container Item CrossReferences.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

C23

Inventory Management

41185

J.D. Edwards & Company Container Reconcilations

Page . . . Date . . .

5 5/15/96

Last Reconciliation Date . 02/02/96 Reconciliation As Of Date 05/15/96 Branch . . . . . DEPOT1 Depot 1 Item Description/Location Quantity Item Number (Short) 515637 Opening Balance . . . . 500 50 kg Empty Container LPG Quantity Acquired . . . 0 Quantity Disposed . . . 0 Total Opening . . . . . . 500 Opening Qty Delivered . . Quantity Delivered . . . Quantity Returned . . . 1,670 11 45 Net Del/Retd . . . . . . 34 Closing Qty Delivered . . 1,636 Quantity in Stock: ANJF ANJE MAINTENANCE SCRAP Total On Hand . . . . . .

Cross Reference Item 515670 50 kg Full Container LPG

F50 E50 E50 E50

25 464 0 0 489

Total Inventory . . . . . 2,125 Item Description/Location Quantity Item Number (Short) 515653 Opening Balance . . . . 600 100kg Empty Container LPG Quantity Acquired . . . 0 Quantity Disposed . . . 0 Total Opening . . . . . . 600 Opening Qty Delivered . . Quantity Delivered . . . Quantity Returned . . . 367 50,000,427 614 Net Del/Retd . . . . . . 49,999,813 Closing Qty Delivered . . 50,000,180

Cross Reference Item 515696 100kg Full Container LPG

F100 E100 E100 E100

Quantity in Stock: ANJF ANJE MAINTENANCE SCRAP Total On Hand . . . . . .

10,242 414 0 0 10,656

Total Inventory . . . . . 50,010,836

Data Selection The line type must equal the line type for full containers only.

Processing Options for Container Reconcilations Report

1. Enter a 1 to run the program in update mode. If left blank, only the report will print (file will not be updated).

____________

C24

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Process Container Transactions

2. List the User Defined Code the document types for the Acquisitions: System Code . . . Record Type . . . Dispositions: System Code . . . Record Type . . .

containing following: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3. Enter a 1 to print company totals only. A blank option will print both branch details as well as company summaries. 4. Enter the Cross-Reference Type for Item Cross-References. (Required)

____________

Reviewing Container Information

G4 Distribution/Logistics Systems Choose Container Management

G4118

Container Management Choose an option

You can use the inquiry programs in the Container Management system to review the deposit layers for each customer and analyze container transactions. Complete the following tasks: - Review customer container deposits - Review container transactions

Reviewing Customer Container Deposits

Use the Container Deposit Inquiry program to display the container deposit balances for a customer. You can view the deposit layers and the deposit balance as each transaction was processed.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

C25

Inventory Management

To review customer container deposits

On Container Deposit Inquiry

1. Complete the following fields: Customer Number 2. Complete one or more of the following fields to limit the search: Item Number Branch/Plant Deposit Date From Deposit Date Thru 3. Review the following fields: Item Original Quantity Current Quantity Unit of Measure Deposit Rate Current Balance

C26

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Process Container Transactions

4. Access the fold area.

5. Review the following fields: Document Name Invoice Number Item

Field Address Number

Explanation A number that identifies an entry in the Address Book system. Use this number to identify employees, applicants, participants, customers, suppliers, tenants, special mailing addresses, and so on. A number that the system assigns to an item. It can be in short, long, or 3rd item number format. The beginning date for which the transaction or code is applicable. The ending date for which the transaction or code is applicable. The quantity of units affected by this transaction. The current quantity of containers owned by the supplying company the customer possesses. A user defined code (system 00, type UM), that identifies the unit of measure that the system uses to express the quantity of an item, for example, EA (each) or KG (kilogram).

Item Number Date From Date Thru Units Order/Transaction Quantity Quantity Current Unit of Measure

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

C27

Inventory Management

Field Rate Deposit Amount Current

Explanation This is the current rate for the deposits that must be paid by the customer for a container in their possession. The amount the customer needs to pay for the containers in this transaction, determined by multiplying the current quantity by the deposit rate.

What You Should Know About

Viewing different formats You can toggle between refund amount and current balance information on this form. If you complete the Branch/Plant field with an asterisk (*), the Container Deposit Inquiry will also display total deposit amounts for each branch/plant.

Reviewing totals for branch/plants

Reviewing Container Transactions

Use the Container Transaction Inquiry program to review the container transactions and container balances for each customer. You can choose to view only the container transactions that the system has not reconciled or all container transactions.

C28

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Process Container Transactions

To review container transactions

On Container Transaction Inquiry

1. Complete the following fields: Customer Number 2. Complete one or more of the following fields to limit the search: Date From Date Thru Unreconciled Item Number Branch/Plant Invoice Number Invoice Type 3. Review the following fields: Date Document Number Document Type Quantity Unit of Measure Invoice

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

C29

Inventory Management

Type Item 4. Access the fold area.

5. Review the following fields: Line Number Invoice Date Scheduled Invoice Date Branch

Field Reconciled Flag

Explanation A 1 in this field will bring up only the container transactions which have not yet been reconciled. A default of blank will bring up all container transactions.

C30

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Set Up Container Management

Setting Up Container Management

Before you can use Container Management, you must set up a number of features to define the information that the system uses to process container transactions. Setting up Container Management includes the following tasks: - Setting up container item crossreferences - Setting up container preferences - Setting up container pricing In addition to these tasks, you need to set up the following features: Order line types Order activity rules Item types Document types User defined codes Print messages Automatic accounting instructions Invoice cycle calculation

How Do I Set Up Container Order Line Types?

You set up order line types to define how the system will process a sales order detail line. The Container Management Extraction Server extracts information from the sales order by line types that identify containers. For example, the following line types allow for the correct processing of container transactions: CT (Container Transactions) for full containers A (Asset Movements) for empty containers EC (Container Deposit/Refund) for deposit/refund sales order lines In addition, J.D. Edwards recommends that you set up each line type in the following ways to interface accurately with other systems:

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

C31

Inventory Management

Full container line type

You should set up full containers like basic stock items, to interface with the G/L and the Inventory Management, Accounts Receivable, and Accounts Payable systems. You should set up empty containers to interface only with the Inventory Management system, without writing to the G/L, the Accounts Receivable system, or the Accounts Payable system. You should also enter a Y in the Reverse Sign field, since all sales order entries containing empty containers will be credit entries for returns. You should set up the line type for container deposit sales order lines to interface only with the G/L and the Accounts Receivable system.

Empty container line type

Deposit/refund sales order line type

See Also Setting Up Order Line Types (P40205) in the Sales Order Management Guide

How Do I Set Up Container Order Activity Rules?

You set up order activity rules to define a series of status codes that tells the system which processes each type of order must go through. You must create order activity rules for each order type and line type combination you use. If you set up line types and order types for empty and full containers, you must set up order activity rules for the combination of each line type and order type. If you set up a different order type for container deposit sales orders, you use this order type. Otherwise, you use the regular order type for sales orders, such as SO. J.D. Edwards recommends that you set up order activity rules for each line type to be processed in the following ways:

Empty containers

Empty containers should be processed through the following steps: Enter a return order Ship confirm the return order Run extraction Sales journal update

C32

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Set Up Container Management

Full containers

Full containers should be processed through the following steps: The normal steps for processing a sales order An additional step for container extraction following ship confirmation

Container deposit/refund sales order lines

Container deposit/refund sales order lines should be processed through the following steps: Create deposit/refund order Print invoices Sales journal update

See Also Setting Up Order Activity Rules (P40204) in the Sales Order Management Guide

How Do I Set Up Container Item Types?

You perform standard item entry to define the following three items for Container Management: Empty containers Full containers Product, which can be a packaged item or, if you have installed the Bulk Stock Control system, a bulk item You use the Item Master Information program to enter item information, such as the item number and description, price and costing methods, and availability and commitment rules. You also enter the line types for full and empty containers that you set up on the Order Line Type form. When you define container units of measure, you should set up empty containers with a weight close to zero (for example, 1 EA = 0.00002 LT or 0.00002 KG) so the system will not factor in the weight of the container during unit of measure conversion to determine the price of the full container. If you are an Energy and Chemical Solutions customer and have installed the Bulk Stock Control system, you can set up the following: Bulk item Tank Default tank information

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

C33

Inventory Management

You follow the normal procedures for setting up a tank using the Tank Master Maintenance and Default Tank Information forms. You do this to specify structural information about the tanks that are used to store the bulk product. The system retrieves this information when processing transactions to calculate volume.

See Also
Entering Item Master Information (P4101) For ECS customers only, Setting Up a Tank (P415001) and Defining Default Temperature and Density by Tank (P415108) in the Bulk Stock Control Guide

How Do I Set Up Container User Defined Codes?

You can optionally set up user defined codes (UDCs) to customize several features of Container Management, such as the following: Document types Status codes Line types Item crossreference types Each system has its own UDC types. UDCs are referenced by the system number and type. For example, Container Management is coded to system 41, and the UDC type for document types is DT. J.D. Edwards has already set up some codes in the UDC table. When a UDC is referred to as hard-coded, you should not change it. Programming has been defined to work with hard-coded UDCs. If you change the UDC, the programming will not work correctly. You can, however, add UDCs to meet your own specific business needs. You can define the following document types to simplify the tracking of container transactions: Deposit, rental, and refund invoice types Deposit, rental, and refund sales order types You must enter the document types for deposit, rental, and refund sales orders in the 40/IU UDC table so that these orders update inventory when you confirm shipments. See Also Setting Up User Defined Codes (P00051) in the Technical Foundation Guide

C34

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Set Up Container Management

How Do I Set Up Container Print Messages?

You set up print messages to produce customized messages on any documents that you print. For example, you might want to customize your invoice for container deposits and refunds. You can set up a print message to give this invoice a Container Deposit Invoice title. You might also want to set up different print messages for deposit and rental invoices. To set up print messages, you must first add a code for the print message in UDC table 40/PM. You then create the print message and add it to the document on which you want it to appear. If you have both deposit and rental customers and use different print messages for them, the best place to specify the appropriate print message to use is in the Print Message preference. This preference will give you the flexibility of printing different messages for different customers. See Also Defining a Message (P4016) and Defining Print Information for Messages and Item Notes Setting Up Container Preferences (P40300)

How Do I Set Up Container Automatic Accounting Instructions?

Automatic accounting instructions (AAIs) are the user defined bridge between your day-to-day functions, chart of accounts, and financial reports. The system uses AAIs to determine how to distribute G/L entries that it generates. For distribution systems, you must create AAIs for each unique combination of company, document type, and G/L class that you anticipate using. Each AAI points to a specific G/L account consisting of a business unit, an object, and a subsidiary. Once you define AAIs, the system knows how to record the transactions. When you run the Update Customer Sales program, the system creates entries in the appropriate accounts. You should set up the document type you defined for container deposit/refund sales orders in combination with AAI number 4230 (Revenue). You should set up this AAI to create records in a separate liability account for customer deposits and rentals, rather than the revenue account. You draw against this account only for container refunds. See Also Setting Up Automatic Accounting Instructions (P40901)

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

C35

Inventory Management

How Do I Set Up Container Invoice Cycle Calculation?

You set up invoice cycles to control how the Cycle Billing program calculates scheduled invoice dates. When you set up invoice cycles, you apply different invoice rules and schedules to different customer and item combinations. For example, one customer might prefer an invoice at the end of the month for all shipments made during that month, and another customer might want a weekly invoice for specific items. You set up an invoice cycle calculation rule to define the type of calculation that the system uses to compute an invoice date. You can then enter test dates to review the calculated invoice dates and ensure that you have set up the calculation correctly. If the calculation rules are bi-weekly, semi-monthly, or at the end of each month, you must also set up scheduled invoice date ranges. Once you set up invoice cycles, you can assign them to customer and item combinations with the Invoice Cycle preference. You can later revise scheduled invoice dates, if necessary. See Also Setting Up Container Preferences (P40300) Setting Up Invoice Cycles (P49080) in the Sales Order Management Guide

Setting Up Container Item Cross-References

G4118 Container Management Enter 29

G41184

Container Management Setup Choose an option

Container Management tracks only empty container types. You set up item cross-references so the system can track full containers in the same way as empty containers. This allows the Container Management Extraction Server to extract full container transactions along with empty container transactions and write this information to the Container Transaction table. Complete the following tasks: Define item crossreference types Set up item crossreference relationships

C36

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Set Up Container Management

You must first define the item cross-reference types in UDC table 41/DT. You set up the container type with a special handling code. You then use the Item Cross-Reference program to set up item cross-reference relationships. You first locate the item number of a full container, and then you create the cross-reference relationship to the item number of the empty container. The special handling code in the UDC table instructs the system to validate the cross-referenced items against the Item Master (F4101) table. This allows the system to verify that the cross-referenced items exist as valid item numbers.

See Also
Setting Up Item CrossReference (P41040) To define item cross-reference types

On Item Cross Reference Types

1. Complete the following fields: Character Code Description Description 2

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

C37

Inventory Management

2. Access the fold area.

3. Enter 1 in the following field: Special Handling Code

Field Character Code

Explanation This column contains a list of valid codes for a specific user defined code table. The number of characters permitted for a code appears in the column title. Indicates special processing requirements for certain user defined code values. The particular value you enter in this field is unique for each user defined code record type. The system uses the special handling code in many ways. For example, special handling codes defined for Language Preference specify if the language is double-byte or if the language does not have uppercase characters. Programming is required to activate this field.

Special Handling Code User Def Codes

Processing Options for Cross-Reference Type Code

Default Code/Type: 1. Enter the desired install System Code. 2. Enter the desired Record Type. ____________ ____________

C38

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Set Up Container Management

To set up item cross-reference relationships

On Item Cross-Reference

1. Complete the following field: Item Number 2. Access Item X-Reference Revisions.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

C39

Inventory Management

3. Complete the following fields: Cross-Reference Type XRef Item Number XRef Description

Field Type CrossReference Type Code

Explanation A code (UDC table 41\DT) that identifies the type of cross-reference you have set up for this customer. The system contains examples for: 1. Substitutes 2. Replacements 3. Bar Codes 4. Customer Numbers 5. Supplier Numbers The cross-reference item number that the system assigns to an item number. A cross-reference number allows you to use a suppliers item number if it is different from your own item number when you are processing an order or printing.

Item Number Customer/Supplier

What You Should Know About

Empty container cross-references You should ensure that only full containers have cross-references. Do not set up empty containers with cross-reference relationships.

Setting Up Container Preferences

G4118 Container Management Enter 29

G41184

Container Management Setup Choose Preference Profiles

C40

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Set Up Container Management

You use preferences to customize the way sales orders are processed. For Container Management, you set up preferences for customers and customer and item combinations to define the following: The type of container transactions, deposits or rentals, for which you will bill your customer The type of invoice, summary or transaction, you will send your customer for container transactions The billing cycle for the customer and container item combination The pricing unit of measure You must do the following to create preferences: Activate preferences Define the preference hierarchy Create the specific preferences Before you can create a preference, you must make sure it exists on the preference master. If it does not exist, you must add it to the preference master. Once the preferences exist in the preference master, you activate all of the preferences you need to use in Container Management. You then define the preference hierarchy to indicate the order in which you want the system to apply the preferences. You must also set the appropriate processing options for specific programs, such as Sales Order Entry, to use preference information. Complete the following tasks to set up container preferences: - Create a Container Deposit/Rental preference - Create an Invoice Cycle preference - Create a Pricing Unit of Measure preference - Create a Print Messages preference

See Also
Setting Up Preferences and Creating Preferences in the Sales Order Management Guide

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

C41

Inventory Management

Creating a Container Deposit/Rental Preference

In the Container Deposit/Rental preference, you define the following three options for customer and item combinations: Specify whether the customer should be charged deposit or rental fees for the use of containers Specify whether the customer will be sent a summary or transaction type invoice for container deposits or rentals Instruct the system to use the G/L offset defined in the preference rather than the one defined in the Item Master table, so that you can separate potential sales of empty containers from the actual deposits On the Preference Master form, you must instruct the system not to enable the effective quantities fields for the Container Deposit/Rental preferences. If the effective quantities fields are enabled, the system to does not process credit orders. Before You Begin - Verify that the G/L Offset account for container deposits or rentals has been created To create a Container Deposit/Rental preference

On Preference Profiles

C42

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Set Up Container Management

1. Access the preference inquiry for the Container Deposit/Rental preference.

2. On the Container Deposit/Rental preference inquiry form, access the Preference Revisions form.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

C43

Inventory Management

3. On the Container Deposit/Rental preference revisions form, complete one or more of the following fields to define customer and item combinations: Customer Number Customer Group Item Number Item Group 4. Complete the following fields to define specific preference information: Effective From Effective Thru Sequence Number Branch/Plant Deposit/Rental Transaction/Summary G/L Offset

Field Customer Group Deposit/Rental

Explanation User defined code (system 40, type 17) identifying a group to which you can assign customers for the Container Deposit/Rental preference. Do this when the customers are similar and you want to group them together to define preferences quickly and easily. Enter the code that identifies the customer group for which you want to define a preference. You can define the preference for this group alone or for a combination of customer group and item or item group. If you leave both the Customer Number and the Customer Group fields blank, the system applies the preference to all customers.

Item Group Container Deposit/Rental

User defined code (system 40, type 17) identifying a group to which you can assign items for the Container Deposit/Rental preference. Do this when you have a group of similar items and you want to group them together to define preferences quickly and easily. Enter the code that identifies the item group for which you want to define a preference. You can define the preference for this group alone or for a combination of item group and customer or customer group. If you leave both the Item Number and Item Group fields blank, the system applies the preference to all items.

C44

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Set Up Container Management

Field Sequence Number Deposit/Rental

Explanation A sequence or sort number that the system uses to process records in a user defined order. Use this code to designate whether a customer pays a deposit fee or a rental charge for empty containers. Valid values are: 1 Deposit Fee 2 Rental Charge Use this code to indicate whether container deposits are charged/refunded for each transaction or summarized over a billing period. Valid values are: 1 Transaction 2 Summarized When you set this code you do not affect rental transactions.

C47

Inventory Management

Creating a Pricing Unit of Measure Preference

You use the Pricing Unit of Measure preference to override the pricing unit of measure on the sales order. The system determines the pricing unit of measure for a sales order detail line based on the information you have entered on the Item Master and in the Sales Price Retrieval Unit of Measure field on the System Constants. You can use this preference to assign a different pricing unit of measure for customer and item combinations based on the branch/plant. The Pricing Unit of Measure preference also overrides the Sales Price Based On Date in the System Constants. The Sales Price Based On Date determines how the Price Effective Date in the Sales Order Header and Sales Order Detail tables will be updated. You can use the Pricing Unit of Measure preference to determine the daily rental rate for a specific customer and container combination. This allows the system to calculate either a deposit rate or a rental rate for a container. If you create a unit of measure UDC for a rental rate per day in the UDC table 00/UM, you can use this code in the Pricing Unit of Measure preference for a customer and container combination. For example, you can set up an empty container with a deposit price of $30. If customer 502 pays a rental fee for this container, you can set up a unit of measure UDC for a rental rate of $2.00 per day and enter this code in the Pricing Unit of Measure preference for this customer and container combination. The preference will override the pricing unit of measure in the sales order for this customer. Customer 502 is charged $2.00 per day for the use of this container, while another customer is charged the usual deposit rate of $30. Before You Begin - Set up the sales price retrieval unit of measure in System Constants. See Defining System Constants. - Verify that a base price record exists for the pricing unit of measure to be entered in this preference See Also Working with Base Pricing (P4106) in the Sales Order Management Guide

C48

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Set Up Container Management

To create a Pricing Unit of Measure preference

On Preference Profiles 1. Access the preference inquiry for the Pricing Unit of Measure preference.

2. On the Pricing Unit of Measure inquiry form, access the Preference Revisions form.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

C49

Inventory Management

3. On the Pricing Unit of Measure preference revisions form, complete one or more of the following fields to define customer and item combinations: Customer Number Customer Group Item Number Item Group 4. Complete the following fields to define specific preference information: Effective From Effective Thru Quantity From Quantity Thru Unit of Measure

Field Unit of Measure Pricing

Explanation A code (system 00/type UM) that indicates the unit of measure in which you usually price the item.

Creating a Print Messages Preference

Use the Print Messages preference to choose the messages you want to automatically print on documents for a particular customer and item combination. The system applies this preference when a document is printed, not during order entry. The Print Messages preference does not override any other messages you set up in Customer Billing Instructions and Item Branch/Plant information. Leaving any of the key fields blank indicates you want to specify all valid values for that field. For example, a blank in the Business Unit field causes the system to apply the Print Messages (ECS) preference to all business units. Before You Begin - Verify that print messages have been created See Also Defining a Message (P4016)

C50

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Set Up Container Management

To create a Print Messages preference

On Preference Profiles 1. Access the preference inquiry for the Print Messages preference.

2. On the Print Messages preference inquiry form, access the Preference Revisions form.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

C51

Inventory Management

3. On the Print Messages preference revisions form, complete one or more of the following fields to define customer and item combinations: Customer Number Customer Group Item Number Item Group 4. Complete the following fields to define specific preference information: Effective From Effective Thru Quantity From Quantity Thru Branch/Plant Print Message

Field Print Message

Explanation A code that you assign to each print message. Examples of text messages are engineering specifications, hours of operation during holiday periods, and special delivery instructions.

Setting Up Pricing Schedules

You normally set up the deposit and rental rates a customer will pay for the use of containers before the start of business with that customer. You can use the standard method of setting up base pricing in the Sales Order Management system to define the deposit or rental rates for any combination of customers, customer groups, items (containers), or item groups. If it is installed, you can also use the Advanced Pricing system to set up pricing schedules for deposits and rentals. You can set up the base price of the empty container to equal the deposit or rental rate (if you are not using the Advanced Pricing system). The only time the system uses this price is when it processes deposit/refund sales order lines. You can set up the base price of the full container to equal the price of the product. This is the amount for which you invoice the customer for the sale of the product.

See Also
Working with Base Pricing (P4106) in the Sales Order Management Guide Advanced Pricing Guide

C52

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Appendix D Functional Servers

Several J.D. Edwards programs access functional servers. The purpose of functional servers is to provide a central location for standard business rules about entering documents, such as vouchers, invoices, and journal entries. These business rules establish the following: Data dictionary default values Field edits and valid values Error processing Relationships between fields or applications The advantages of a functional server are: It reduces maintenance of entry programs because edit rules reside in one central location. You can standardize documents across all applications because you create them using the same business rules. Generally, the user interface (appearance and interaction) of a screen is now separate from how a program works. The steps for setting up business rules for an entry program are: 1. Create a DREAM Writer version for a specific functional server program (for example, XT0411Z1 for voucher entry). 2. Set the processing options within the version according to your company requirements. 3. Specify the version you want the entry program to use in the processing options for that entry program. You can have all your entry programs use the same DREAM Writer version (and thus, use the same rules) or you can set up different DREAM Writer versions. J.D. Edwards provides DREAM Writer version ZJDE0001 as the default functional server version for your entry programs. Only the person responsible for system-wide setup should make changes to the functional server version. For more information about how to set up DREAM Writer versions, see the Technical Foundation Guide.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

Example: Voucher Processing Functional Server

The following graphic shows the programs that use the voucher processing functional server. J.D. Edwards provides two demo versions of the functional server, ZJDE0001 and ZJDE0002.

Speed Voucher Entry P041015

Standard Voucher Entry P04105

Void Payment Entry P04103

Credit Tied to Debit B.U. P041016

MultiMulti Voucher P041017

Calculate Withholding P04580

XT0411Z1 Versions List ZJDE0001 ZJDE0002

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Glossary

Inventory Management

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Glossary
This glossary defines terms in the context of your use of J. D. Edwards systems and the accompanying user guide. access. To get to the information or functions provided by the system through menus, forms, and reports. alphabetic character. A letter or other symbol (such as *&#) from the keyboard that represents data. Contrast with numeric character. alphanumeric character. A combination of letters, numbers, and other symbols (such as *&#) that represent data. audit trail. The detailed, verifiable history of a processed transaction. The history consists of the original documents, transaction entries, and posting of records, and usually concludes with a report. automatic accounting instruction (AAI). A code that points to an account in the chart of accounts. AAIs define rules for programs that automatically generate journal entries. This includes interfaces between Accounts Payable, Accounts Receivable, and the General Accounting system. Each system that interfaces with the General Accounting system has AAIs. For example, AAIs can direct the Post to General Ledger program to post a debit to a certain expense account and an automatic credit to a certain accounts payable account. backup copy. A copy of original data preserved on a magnetic tape or diskette as protection against destruction or loss. batch. A group of similar records or transactions that the computer treats as a single unit during processing. For identification purposes, the system usually assigns to each batch a unique identifier, known as a batch number. batch header. Information that the computer uses as identification and control for a group of transactions or records in a batch. batch job. A task or group of tasks that you submit for processing. The system treats a batch job as a single unit during processing, for example, printing reports and purging tables. The computer performs these tasks with little or no user interaction. batch processing. A method by which the computer selects jobs from the job queue, processes them, and writes output. Contrast with interactive processing. batch type. A code that designates which J. D. Edwards system the associated transactions pertain to, thus controlling what records the system selects for processing. For example, in the Post General Journal process, the system only selects unposted transaction batches with a batch type of G for General Accounting for posting. Boolean logic operand. In J. D. Edwards DREAM Writer, the parameter of the Relationship field. The Boolean logic operand tells the system to perform a comparison between certain records or parameters. Available operands are: EQ = Equal To LT = Less Than LE = Less Than or Equal To GT = Greater Than GE = Greater Than or Equal To NE = Not Equal To NL = Not Less Than NG = Not Greater Than CAD/CAP. Computer Assisted Design/ Computer Assisted Programming. A set of automated programming tools for designing and developing systems. These tools automate system design, generate source code and

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

documentation, enforce design standards, and help to ensure consistency throughout all J.D. Edwards systems. category code. In user defined codes, a temporary title for an undefined category. For example, if you are entering a code that designates different sales regions, you could change category code 4 to Sales Region, and define E (East), W (West), N (North), and S (South) as the valid codes. Category codes were formerly known as reporting codes. character. Any letter, number, or other symbol that the system can read, write, and store. command. A character, word, phrase, or combination of keys you use to tell the system to perform a defined activity. constants. Parameters or codes that rarely change, unless you change them. The system uses constants to standardize information processing by an associated system. Some examples of constants are allowing or disallowing out-of-balance postings and having the system perform currency conversions on all amounts. Core. The central and foundational systems of J.D. Edwards software, including General Accounting, Accounts Payable, Accounts Receivable, and Address Book. cursor. The blinking underscore or rectangle on a form that indicates where the next keystroke will appear. cursor sensitive help. J.D. Edwards online help function, which allows you to view a description of a field, an explanation of its purpose, and, when applicable, a list of the valid codes that you can enter. To access this information, move the cursor to the field and press F1. data. Numbers, letters, or symbols that represent facts, definitions, conditions, and situations, that the system can read, write, and store.

database. A continuously updated collection of all information that a system uses and stores. Databases make it possible to create, store, index, and cross-reference information online. data dictionary. A database table that consists of the definitions, structures, and guidelines for the use of fields, messages, and help text. The data dictionary table does not contain the actual data itself. default. A code, number, or parameter that the system supplies when you do not enter one. For example, if an input fields default is N and you do not enter something in that field, the system completes the field with N. descriptive title. See user defined code. detail. The individual pieces of information and data that make up a record or transaction. Contrast with summary. display. (1) To cause the computer to show information on a form. (2) A specific set of fields and information that a J.D. Edwards system might show on a form. Some forms can show more than one display when you access certain functions. display field. A field of information on a form that contains a system-provided code or parameter that you cannot change. Contrast with input field. DREAM Writer. Data Record Extraction And Management Writer. A flexible data manipulator and cataloging tool. You use this tool to select and sequence the data that is to appear on a programmed report. edit. (1) To make changes to a table by adding, changing, or removing information. (2) The program function of highlighting fields into which you have entered inadequate or incorrect data. execute. See run.

exit. (1) To interrupt or leave a computer program. (2) An option that the system displays on a form that allows you to access another form.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

facility. A collection of computer language statements or programs that provides a specialized function throughout a system or throughout all integrated systems. Some examples are the DREAM Writer and FASTR facilities. FASTR. Financial Analysis Spreadsheet Tool and Report Writer. A report writer that allows you to design your own report specifications using the general ledger database. field. (1) An area on a form that represents a particular type of information, such as a name, document type, or amount. See input field and display field. (2) A defined area within a record that contains a specific piece of information. For example, a vendor record consists of the fields Vendor Name, Address, and Telephone Number. The Vendor Name field contains just the name of the vendor. fold area. An area of a form, accessed by pressing F4, that displays additional information associated with the records or data items displayed on the form. function. A separate feature within a facility that allows you to perform a specific task, for example, the field help function. function key. A key you press to perform a system operation or action. hard copy. A presentation of the information in the system printed on paper. Synonymous with printout. header. Information at the beginning of a table. This information is used to identify or provide control information for the group of records that follows. help instructions. Online documentation or explanations of fields that you access by pressing the Help key or by pressing F1 with your cursor in a particular field. helps. See help instructions.

Jobs (33), Display User Job Queue (42), and Display User Print Queue (43). The Hidden Selections form displays three categories of selections: user tools, operator tools, and programmer tools. input. Information that you enter in the input fields on a form or that the computer enters from other programs, then edits and stores in tables. input field. An area on a form where you type data, values, or characters. A field represents a specific type of information such as a name, document type, or amount. Contrast with display field. install system code. The code that identifies a J.D. Edwards system. Examples are 01 for the Address Book system, 04 for the Accounts Payable system, and 09 for the General Accounting system. interactive processing. A job that the computer performs in response to commands that you enter from a terminal. During interactive processing, you are in direct communication with the computer, and it might prompt you for additional information during the processing of your request. See online. Contrast with batch processing. interface. A link between two or more J.D. Edwards systems that allows these systems to send and receive information from one another. jargon. A J.D. Edwards term for systemspecific help text. You base your help text on a specific reporting code that you designate in the Data Dictionary Glossary. You can display this text as part of online help. job. A single identifiable set of processing actions that you tell the computer to perform. You start jobs by choosing menu selections, entering commands, or pressing designated keys. An example of a computer job is check printing in the Accounts Payable system. job queue. A form that lists the batch jobs that you and others have told the computer to process. When the computer completes a job, the system removes the jobs identifier from the list.

hidden selections. Menu selections that you cannot see until you enter HS in a menus Selection field. Although you cannot see these selections, they are available from any menu. They include such items as Display Submitted

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

justify. To shift information that you enter in an input field to the right or left side of the field. Many of the facilities within J.D. Edwards systems automatically justify information. The system does this only after you press Enter. key field. A field common to each record in a table. The system uses the key field designated by the program to organize and retrieve information from the table. Key General Ledger Account (Key G/L). See automatic accounting instructions. leading zeros. A series of zeros that certain facilities in J.D. Edwards systems place in front of a value that you enter. This normally occurs when you enter a value that is smaller than the specified length of the field. For example, if you enter 4567 in a field that accommodates eight numbers, the facility places four zeros in front of the four numbers that you enter. The result would look like this: 00004567. level of detail. (1) The degree of difficulty of a menu in J.D. Edwards software. The levels of detail for menus are as follows: A=Major Product Directories B=Product Groups 1=Basic Operations 2=Intermediate Operations 3=Advanced Operations 4=Computer Operations 5=Programmers 6=Advanced Programmers Also known as menu levels. (2) The degree to which the system summarizes account information in the General Accounting system. The highest level of detail is 1 (least detailed) and the lowest level of detail is 9 (most detailed). master file. A computer table that a system uses to store data and information which is permanent and necessary to the systems operation. Master files might contain data or information such as paid tax amounts and vendor names and addresses.

menu. A form that displays numbered selections. Each of these selections represents a program. To access a selection from a menu, enter the selection number. menu levels. See level of detail. menu masking. A security feature of J.D. Edwards systems that lets you prevent individual users from accessing specified menus or menu selections. The system does not display the menus or menu selections to unauthorized users. menu message. Text that appears on a form after you select an option from a menu. It displays a warning, caution, or information about the requested selection. next number facility. A J.D. Edwards software facility that you use to control the automatic numbering of such items as new G/L accounts, vouchers, and addresses. It allows you to specify your desired numbering system and provides a method to increment numbers to reduce transposition and typing errors. numeric character. Represents data that ranges from 0 to 9. Contrast with alphabetic character and alphanumeric character. offline. Computer functions that are not under the continuous control of the system. For example, if you were to run a certain job on a personal computer and then transfer the results to a host computer, that job would be considered an offline function. Contrast with online. online. Computer functions over which the system has continuous control. Each time you work with a J.D. Edwards system-provided form, you are online with the system. Contrast with offline. See interactive processing. online information. Information that the system retrieves, usually at your request, and immediately displays on the form. This information includes items such as database information, documentation, and messages. operand. See Boolean logic operand.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

option. A numbered selection from a J.D. Edwards form that performs a particular function or task. To select an option, you enter its number in the Option field next to the item upon which you want the function performed. When available, for example, option 4 allows you to return to a prior form with a value from the current form. output. Information that the computer transfers from internal storage to an external device, such as a printer or a computer form. output queue. A form that lists the spooled files (reports) that you have told the computer to write to an output device, such as a printer. After the computer writes a file, the system removes that files identifier from the online list. override. The process of entering a code or parameter other than the one provided by the system. Many J.D. Edwards systems offer forms that provide default field values when they appear. By typing a new value over the default code, you can override the default. See default. parameter. A number, code, or character string that you specify in association with a command or program. The computer uses parameters as additional input or to control the actions of the command or program. password. A unique group of characters that you enter when you sign on to the system that the computer uses to identify you as a valid user. printout. A presentation of information in the system printed on paper. Synonymous with hard copy. print queue. An online list (form) of written tables that you have told the system to print. After the system prints the table, the system removes the files identifier from the online list. See output queue. processing options. A feature of the J.D. Edwards DREAM Writer that allows you to supply parameters to direct the functions of a program. For example, processing options

allow you to specify defaults for certain form displays, control the format in which information prints on reports, change the way a form displays information, and enter as of dates. program. A collection of computer statements that tells the computer to perform a specific task or group of tasks. program specific help text. Glossary text that describes the function of a field within the context of the program. prompt. (1) A reminder or request for information displayed by the system. When a prompt appears, you must respond in order to proceed. (2) A list of codes or parameters or a request for information provided by the system as a reminder of the type of information you should enter or action you should take. PTF. Program Temporary Fix. A representation of changes to J.D. Edwards software, which your organization receives on magnetic tapes or diskettes. purge. The process of removing records or data from a system file. record. A collection of related, consecutive fields of data that the system treats as a single unit of information. For example, a vendor record consists of information such as the vendors name, address, and telephone number. reporting code. See category code. reverse image. Form text that displays in the opposite color combination of characters and background from what the form typically displays. run. To cause the computer to perform a routine, process a batch of transactions, or carry out computer program instructions. scroll. To use the roll keys to move form information up or down a form at a time. For example, when you press the Rollup key, the system replaces the currently displayed text with the next form of text if more text is available.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Inventory Management

selection. Found on J.D. Edwards menus, selections represent functions that you can access from a given menu. To make a selection, you enter its associated number in the Selection field. softcoding. A J.D. Edwards term that describes an entire family of features that allows you to customize and adapt J.D. Edwards software to your business environment. These features lessen the need for you to use computer programmers to customize your system. software. The operating system and application programs that tell the computer how and what tasks to perform. special character. Representation of data in symbols that are neither letters nor numbers. Some examples are * & # /. spool. The function by which the system stores output data to be printed and processed. spooled file. A holding table for output data to be printed or input data to be processed. subfile. An area on the form where the system displays detailed information related to the header information at the top of the form. Subfiles might contain more information than the form can display in the subfile area, in which case you use the roll keys to display the next form of information. See scroll. submit. See run.

user defined code. The individual codes that you create and define within a user defined code type. Programs use code types to edit data and allow only defined codes. These codes might consist of a single character or a set of characters that represents a word, phrase, or definition. These characters can be alphabetic, alphanumeric, or numeric. For example, the user defined code type table ST (Search Type) contains such codes as C for Customers, E for Employees, and V for Vendors. user defined code (type). The identifier for a table of codes with a meaning that you define for the system (for example, ST for the Search Type codes table in the Address Book). J.D. Edwards systems provide many of these tables and allow you to create and define tables of your own. User defined codes were formerly known as descriptive titles. user identification (user ID). The unique name that you enter when you sign on to a J.D. Edwards system to identify yourself. This ID can be up to 10 characters long and can consist of alphabetic, alphanumeric, and numeric characters. valid codes. The allowed codes, amounts, or types of data that you can enter in a specific input field. The system checks, or edits, user defined code fields for accuracy against the list of valid codes. video. The display of information on your monitor form. Normally referred to as the form. vocabulary overrides. A J.D. Edwards facility that allows you to override field, row, or column title text on a form-by-form or report-by-report basis.

summary. The presentation of data or information in a cumulative or totaled manner in which most of the details have been removed. Many of the J.D. Edwards systems offer forms and reports that are summaries of the information stored in certain tables. system. A collection of computer programs that allows you to perform specific business tasks. Some examples of applications are Accounts Payable and Inventory Management. Synonymous with application. table. A collection of related data records that the system organizes for a specific use and electronically stored by the computer.

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Index

Inventory Management

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Index
A
AAIs. See Automatic accounting instructions ABC Analysis, processing options, 511 ABC analysis cycle counts, 510 principle, 510 report, 510 setup steps, branch/plant constants, 510 types of
gross margin, 5-10 onhand value, 5-10 total sales, 5-10

ABC Analysis report, sample, 510 ABC Code 1 Sales Inventory, defined, 442 ABC Codes, defined, 212 Account Number, defined, 39 Accounting, for transactions, 33 Accounting Cost Quantity, defined, 229, 261 Address Number, defined, 105, 1044, 1045, C27 Adjustments adjusting inventory, 313 correcting errors, 317 document numbers, 317 form, 314 overview, 313 Adjustments form, sample, 314 Adjustments program (P4114), 314 Aisle, defined, 1211 Allow Duplicate Lots, defined, 108 Amount Current, defined, C28 Amount Extended Cost, defined, 39 Amount Extended Cost/Price, defined, 429 Amount Net Posting 01, defined, 451 Amount Unit Cost, defined, 38 Amount Unit Cost Last Paid, defined, 443 Amount Unit Cost Weighted Average, defined, 443 Amount User Defined, defined, 810 Amount Variance, defined, 612, 628

Amount Title, defined, 86 Amount Type (A _ *), defined, 75 Amount/Percent, defined, 627 And/Or Selection, defined, 813 Application Constants form, sample, 1010 As Of processing creating balance forward records, 446 deleting records from table, 448 Direct As Of Entry form, 450 entering individual transactions, 449 G/L by Object Account, 459 As of processing, defined, 445 Audit information activating the audit process, 1058 creating an audit job, Audit Journal Information form, 1057 setting up audit information, overview, 1047 setting up IBM information for the audit process, 1048
activating the journal physical file, 10-51 creating a data queue, 10-52 creating a job description, 10-53 creating a journal, 10-50 creating a journal receiver, 10-49 creating a user profile, 10-54

setting up the audit process, 1055

creating an audit job, 10-55 creating audit locations, 10-57

Audit process, reports, 532, 534 Automatic accounting instructions Distribution Automatic Account form, 1019 setting up automatic accounting instructions, overview, 1017 setting up standard units of measure, overview, 1035 Availability defining item availability, Item Availability Definition form, 106 detail, viewing, 421 lot quantity, viewing, 424 summary, viewing, 416

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

index1

Inventory Management Available, defined, 1117 Average Cost Update program (P41811), 78 Average costs, updating average costs for items, 78, 79 Branch/Plant Constants form, sample, 104 Branch/Plant Constants Pg 1 form, sample, 105 Branch/Plant Constants Pg 2 form, sample, 1011 Branch/plant information assigning an item to a branch plant, 240 duplication of
form, 2-52 item information across multiple branch/plants, 2-51 primary locations, 2-52

B
Backorders Allowed, defined, 211 Balance forward creating balance forward records, 446 processing options, 448 Balances, reviewing item transactions and balances, 452 Base Price Revisions form (P4106), 267 Basket Reprice Group, defined, 266 Batch control constants, Application Constants form, 109 Batch Control Required (Y/N) Inv, defined, 1010 Batch Cost Maintenance, processing options, 77 Batch Cost Maintenance program (P41802), 76 Batch Management Approval Required Inv, defined, 1010 Batch Number, defined, 454 Bill of Material Revisions, processing options, 914 Bill of Material Revisions program (P3002), 912 Bills of material. See Kits Bin, defined, 1211 Branch/Plant, defined, 240, 620, 810, 98, 105, 1014 Branch/plant constants Application Constants form, 1010 Branch Plant Constants form, 104 Branch/Plant Constants Pg 1 form, 105, 1011 Item Availability Definition form, 107 setting up constants
defining batch control constants, 10-9 defining branch/plant constants, 10-4 defining item availability, 10-6 defining system constants, 10-7 defining the location format, 10-10 overview, 10-3

entering branch/plant information, 237 entering item manufacturing information, 248 entering item reorder quantities, form, 246 entering item tax information, 245 form, 239 item locations
changing primary locations, 2-42, 2-44 deleting primary locations, 2-44 form, 2-41

item manufacturing information

DRP/MPS/MRP, 2-49, 2-50 engineering, 2-50 form, 2-49, 2-50 leadtime, 2-49

locating item sources, 245 overview, 237 taxes, 245 working with item locations, 240 Bulk/Packed Flag, defined, 211 Buyer Number, defined, 215 Buyers Guide, sample, 56 Buyers Information, processing options, 444 Buyers information calculations, 438 form, 438 overview, 431 report, 56 reviewing open purchase orders, 443 reviewing performance information, 437 reviewing sales history, 441 Buyers Information form, sample, 438 Buyers Information program (P4115), 438 Buyers Guide, processing options, 56

System Constants form, 107

index2

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Index

C
Carrier Number, defined, 219 Catalog No, defined, 29 Category G/L, defined, 1021 Category Code, defined, 410 Category Code Location 03, defined, 1211 Category Code 6, defined, 219 Character Code, defined, 810, C38 Check Availability Y/N, defined, 211 Classification Codes form, sample, 217 Classification Codes program (P41011), 217 Code Approval Routing, defined, 1032 Code External (Y/N), defined, 411 Code Title, defined, 85 Commitment Method, defined, 117 Commitments, in Inventory Management system, 44 Commodity Class, defined, 219 Commodity Sub Class, defined, 219 Company, defined, 1020 Component, defined, 225 Constants. See Branch/plant constants Container Deposit/Refund/Rental Billing, processing options, C18 Container Management billing methods, C10
summary, C-10 transaction, C-10

processing container transactions

generating reports, C-21 overview, C-13 processing deposits, rental fees, and refunds, C-16 reviewing container information, C-25 running Container Management Extraction, C-13

processing deposit, rental fee, and refund sales order lines

generating the summary invoice, C-20 generating the transaction invoice, C-20

processing deposits, rental fees, and refunds, C16

creating deposit, rental fee, and refund sales order lines, C-18 generating the Container Billing report, C-18 processing deposit, rental fee, and refund sales order lines, C-19

receipt of container, C6 reviewing container information

Container Deposit Inquiry form, C-26, C-27 Container Transaction Inquiry form, C-29, C-30 reviewing container transactions, C-28 reviewing customer container deposits, C-25

setting up container cross-references, C36

defining item crossreference types, C-37, C-38 Item CrossReference form, C-39 Item CrossReference Revisions form, C-39 setting up item crossreference relationships, C-39 User Defined Code Revisions form, C-37, C-38

business considerations, C8 Container Management Extraction Server, C13

generating the Container Management Extraction Server Report, C-14 report, C-14

deposit and rental fee accounts, C8 deposit layers, C9 generating container transaction reports
generating the Container Reconciliations report, C-22 generating the Customer/Distributor Balance Statement, C-21

setting up Container Management

AAIs, C-35 invoice cycle, C-36 item types, C-33 order activity rules, C-32 order line types, C-31 overview, C-31 print messages, C-35 setting up container item crossreferences, C-36 setting up container preferences, C-40 setting up pricing schedules, C-52 user defined codes, C-34

generating the Container Reconciliations report, C22 generating the Customer/Distributor Balance Statement, C21
Summary Level Invoicing report, C-21 Transaction Level Invoicing report, C-21

setting up container preferences, C40

Container Deposit/Rental form, C-43

overview, C1

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

index3

Inventory Management
creating a container deposit/rental preference, C-42 creating a print messages preference, C-50 creating a unit of measure preference, C-48 creating an invoice cycle preference, C-46, C-47 Invoice Cycle form, C-46, C-47 Invoice Cycle form (preference revisions version), C-47 Preference Profiles form, C-42 Pricing Unit of Measure form, C-49 Pricing Unit of Measure form (preference revisions version), C-49 Print Messages form (preference inquiry version), C-51 Print Messages form (preference revisions version), C-52 Speed Cost Maintenance program (P4105), 7-4

updating costs for multiple items across multiple branch/plants

Batch Cost Maintenance program (P41802), 7-6 report, 7-6

updating current item costs to future costs, report, 79 updating item costs
deleting item costs, 7-3 overview, 7-3

setting up pricing schedules, C52 types of containers, C8 understanding Container Management, C3

container life cycle diagram, C-3 filling the container, C-7 processing sales orders, C-7 recording the receipt of the container, C-6 system flow, C-5

Container Management Extraction Server, processing options, C15 Container Reconcilations Report, processing options, C24 Control Code ECS, defined, 109 Cost Analysis, processing options, 513 Cost Analysis report, sample, 512 Cost Center, defined, 1021 Cost levels, considerations for item update. See Item cost information Cost Method, defined, 75 Cost methods assigning to an item, 258 assigning to items, 73 Cost Revisions form, sample, 258, 74 Cost Revisions program (P4105), 258 Cost Revisions Update report, sample, 78 Cost updates See also Item cost information overview, 71 updating average costs for items
methods, 7-8 report, 7-8

Costs changing unit, 260 entering item, 260 removing methods, 261 selecting methods, 73 updating item, 73 updating unit, 260 Country of Origin, defined, 246 Counts. See Physical inventories Create Audit Jobs form, sample, 1055 Create Audit Locations form, sample, 1057 Create Data Queue form, sample, 1052 Create Job Description form, sample, 1053 Create Journal form, sample, 1051 Create Journal Receiver form, sample, 1050 Create User Profile form, sample, 1055 Creating balance forward records, processing options, 448 Cross-reference. See Container Management; Item cross Cumulative Amount, defined, 451 Cumulative Quantity, defined, 451 Customer Group Deposit/Rental, defined, C44 Customer/Distributor Balance, processing options, C22 Customer/Supplier Name, defined, 434 Cycle count ABC analysis, 510 canceling the cycle count, 610 choosing items for the cycle count, 64, 618 entering the cycle count results, form, 610 printing cycle count sheets, 69
report, 6-9

updating costs for an item across multiple branch/plants

form, 7-4

printing the variance report, 614 processing a cycle count, 63 reviewing the cycle count status, 67

index4

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Index

reviewing the cycle count variances, 611 revising the cycle count quantity, 613 updating the cycle count status, 614 Cycle Count Category, defined, 220 Cycle Count Detail Review form, sample, 67 Cycle Count Detail Review program (P41241), 67 Cycle Count Entry form, sample, 611 Cycle Count Entry program (P4141), 611 Cycle Count Review, processing options, 68 Cycle Count Review form, sample, 67 Cycle Count Review program (P41240), 67

Days Available, defined, 440 DDP/Audit Information, processing options, 1059 Default location information assigning default print queues, 1033
Default Print Queues form, 10-34

D
Data, supplemental. See Supplemental database Data conversions converting cost levels
overview, 14-7 running the Item Cost Level Conversion program, 14-7

converting data, overview, 141 converting display decimals

Data Item Conversion form, 14-5 overview, 14-3 reviewing data items, 14-4

Data Dictionary Library, defined, 145 Data Item Class, defined, 145 Data Item Conversion, processing options, 146 Data Type 1, defined, 813 Data Type Classification, defined, 85 Data types. See Supplemental database Database, supplemental. See Supplemental database Date Effective, defined, 810, 1026, 1044 Date Expired, defined, 1026, 1044 Date For G/L (and Voucher), defined, 39, 454 Date Order/Transaction, defined, 38 Date Approved, defined, 1128 Date Completed, defined, 1126 Date From, defined, 429, 68, C27 Date Issued, defined, 1125 Date Recalibrated, defined, 1125 Date Received/Created, defined, 1125 Date Sold, defined, 1128 Date Thru, defined, 68, C27 Date Thru G/L, defined, 429

defining a default location and approval route code, 1032 setting up default location information, overview, 1031 Default Units of Measure form, sample, 222 Default Units of Measure program (P41012), 222 Demand, defined, 433 Deposit/Rental, defined, C45 Desc, defined, 29 Description, defined, 210, 85, 1026, 1044 Description Line 2, defined, 210 Detail Variance Print report, sample, 614 Detailed availability overview, 421 quantity information, 421 Detailed Availability form, sample, 421 Detailed Availability program (P41023), 421 Detailed quantity information, locating detailed quantity information, 421 Direct As Of entry entering individual transactions, 449 form, 450 Direct As Of Entry form, sample, 450 Direct As Of Entry program (P41112), 450 Display Mode Code or Narrative, defined, 85 Distribution Automatic Account form, sample, 1019 Document (Order No., Invoice, and so on), defined, 38 Document Type, defined, 38, 519, 1020 Document type exceptions. See Print messages Document Type Exceptions form, sample, 1029 Drawing Number, defined, 232 Drawing Size, defined, 232 dummy, C38 Duplicate lot processing. See Lot processing

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

index5

Inventory Management

E
ECO Date, defined, 251 ECO Number, defined, 251 ECO Reason, defined, 251 Economic Order Quantity (EOQ), defined, 441 Effective From, defined, 267 Effective Thru, defined, 268 Elements, location code, 1010 Enter/Change Bill of Material form, sample, 912 Entering individual transactions, form, 450 Equipment, defined, 39 Expires, defined, 426 Explanation, defined, 1135 Explanation Transaction, defined, 38 Extended Cost, defined, 429, 454

F
Fields ABC Code 1 Sales Inventory, 442 ABC Codes, 212 Account Number, 39 Accounting Cost Quantity, 229, 261 Address Number, 105, 1044, 1045, C27 Aisle, 1211 Allow Duplicate Lots, 108 Amount Current, C28 Amount Extended Cost, 39 Amount Extended Cost/Price, 429 Amount Net Posting 01, 451 Amount Unit Cost, 38 Amount Unit Cost Last Paid, 443 Amount Unit Cost Weighted Average, 443 Amount User Defined, 810 Amount Variance, 612, 628 Amount Title, 86 Amount Type (A _ *), 75 Amount/Percent, 627 And/Or Selection, 813 Available, 1117 Backorders Allowed, 211 Basket Reprice Group, 266 Batch Control Required (Y/N) Inv, 1010

Batch Management Approval Required Inv, 1010 Batch Number, 454 Bin, 1211 Branch/Plant, 240, 620, 810, 98, 105, 1014 Bulk/Packed Flag, 211 Buyer Number, 215 Carrier Number, 219 Catalog No, 29 Category G/L, 1021 Category Code, 410 Category Code Location 03, 1211 Category Code 6, 219 Character Code, 810, C38 Check Availability Y/N, 211 Code Approval Routing, 1032 Code External (Y/N), 411 Code Title, 85 Commitment Method, 117 Commodity Class, 219 Commodity Sub Class, 219 Company, 1020 Component, 225 Control Code ECS, 109 Cost Center, 1021 Cost Method, 75 Country of Origin, 246 Cumulative Amount, 451 Cumulative Quantity, 451 Customer Group Deposit/Rental, C44 Customer/Supplier Name, 434 Cycle Count Category, 220 Data Dictionary Library, 145 Data Item Class, 145 Data Type 1, 813 Data Type Classification, 85 Date Effective, 810, 1026, 1044 Date Expired, 1026, 1044 Date For G/L (and Voucher), 39, 454 Date Order/Transaction, 38 Date Approved, 1128 Date Completed, 1126 Date From, 429, 68, C27 Date Issued, 1125 Date Recalibrated, 1125 Date Received/Created, 1125 Date Sold, 1128 Date Thru, 68, C27 Date Thru G/L, 429

index6

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Index

Days Available, 440 Demand, 433 Deposit/Rental, C45 Desc, 29 Description, 210, 85, 1026, 1044 Description Line 2, 210 Display Mode Code or Narrative, 85 Document (Order No., Invoice, and so on), 38 Document Type, 38, 519, 1020 Drawing Number, 232 Drawing Size, 232 ECO Date, 251 ECO Number, 251 ECO Reason, 251 Economic Order Quantity (EOQ), 441 Effective From, 267 Effective Thru, 268 Equipment, 39 Expires, 426 Explanation, 1135 Explanation Transaction, 38 Extended Cost, 429, 454 Fiscal Year, 451 Fixed/Variable, 230 Freeze Fence, 230 From Grade, 234, 418, 1117 From Potency, 233, 418, 1117 From Tag, 621 From/To, 1063, 1069, 1143 G/L Class, 210 G/L Offset, C45 Grade Change Reason, 1112 Grade Control, 234 Grade/Potency Pricing, 233 History, 426, 1117 Increase/Decrease Amount, 75 Interface G/L (Y/N), 105 Inventory Cost Level, 257 Invoice Cycle, C47 Issue Type Code, 232 Item Dimension Group, 220 Item Flash Message, 214 Item Group Container Deposit/Rental, C44 Item Number, 624, 810, 814, 913, 1045, 137, C27 Item Number Customer/Supplier, 1044, 1045, C40 Item Number Short, 29

Item Price Group, 266 Item Revision Level, 251 Journal Entry Line Number, 454 Kit Pricing Method, 264, 97 L/R, 1011 Landed Cost Rule, 220 Language, 410, 1027 Last Revision No., 232 Leadtime Cumulative, 231 Leadtime Level, 231 Leadtime Manufacturing, 231 Leadtime Per Unit, 232 Length, 1011 Level, 1135 Line Type, 211 Location, 243, 624, 1014 Location Level of Detail, 1015 Lot, 243, 624, 1111 Lot Description, 316, 1112 Lot Expiration, 316 Lot Expiration Date, 1111 Lot Grade, 316, 1112 Lot Potency, 316, 1112 Lot Process Type, 116 Lot Status, 244, 422, 426 Lot Status Code, 115, 1112 Master Planning Family, 219 Maximum Reorder Quantity, 247 Message Display Fence, 230 MFG Leadtime Quantity, 230 Minimum Reorder Quantity, 247 Mode, 1135, 1138 Multiple Order Quantity, 247 Name Remark, 624, 810 Net Quantity 01, 451 New Tag Status, 621 Number of Days in Year, 106 Object Account, 1022 On Hand, 440 On Purchase Order, 440 Order Number, 1113 Order Reprice Group, 266 Period Number Current, 105 Phase, 310 Planner Number, 215 Planning Code, 229 Planning Fence, 230 Planning Fence Rule, 229 Potency Change Reason, 1112 Potency Control, 233

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

index7

Inventory Management Pricing, 224 Primary, 224 Primary Location (P/S), 244, 418 Print Before (Y/N), 1026 Print Message, 214, 1026, C52 Print on Report (Y/N), 1028 Print Queue, 1033 Process Group 1, 220 Process Supplemental Data Base by Branch, 108 Process UOM Conversions by Branch, 108 Product No, 29 Production, 224 Program ID, 454 Purchase Price Level, 257, 99 Purchase Price Retrieval UOM, 109 Purchase Rebate Category Code, 109 Purchasing, 224 Purchasing Cost Method, 259 Purchasing Taxable, 245 Purchasing: Preferred Carrier, 216 Quantities Adjusted, 1121 Quantities Approved, 1122 Quantities Completed, 1121 Quantities Issued, 1121 Quantities Received, 1121 Quantities Sold, 1122 Quantity, 226, 1038 Quantity Current, C27 Quantity Hard Committed, 419 Quantity Other Purchasing 1, 422 Quantity Physical Count, 611, 613 Quantity Work Order Hard Commit, 419 Quantity 1 Other primary units, 422 Quantity 2 Other primary units, 422 Quantity Available, 419 Quantity Available On Receipt, 440 Quantity Held, 422 Quantity in Inspection, 422 Quantity in Operation 1, 423 Quantity in Operation 2, 423 Quantity in Transit, 422 Quantity Inbound Warehouse, 423 Quantity on Backorder, 419 Quantity on Future Commit, 419 Quantity on Hand Primary units, 418 Quantity on Hand/Held, 426, 1117 Quantity on Purchase Orderprimary units, 419 Quantity on Work Order Receipt, 419 Quantity Outbound Warehouse, 423 Quantity Per, 913 Quantity Receipts Total, 419 Quantity Soft Committed, 419 Quantity/Amt, 627 Queue Hours, 250 Rate Deposit, C28 Reason Code, 38, 454 Reconciled Flag, C30 Relationship, 612, 628 Reorder Point, 247 Reorder Point Input, 440, 443 Reorder Quantity, 247 Request Date, 434 Round to Whole Number, 230 Safety Stock, 248, 422 Sales Catalog Section, 219 Sales Category Code 3, 219 Sales Price Based On Date, 109 Sales Price Level, 264, 99 Sales Price Retrieval UOM, 108 Sales Taxable, 245 Sales: Preferred Carrier, 215 Sales/Inventory Cost Method, 259 Search Text, 210, 410 Search Value, 813 Secondary, 224 Selection Exits, 615 Separator Location, 1012 Sequence Number, C45 Serial Number Required, 118 Shelf Life Days, 117 Shipping, 224 Shipping Commodity Class, 220 Shipping Conditions Code, 220 Shipping Units Per Container, 248 Shrink Factor, 250 Shrink Factor Method, 250 Skip to Tag, 623 Special Handling Code User Def Codes, C38 Srch, 29 Standard Grade, 234 Standard Potency, 233 Standard Setup Hours, 250 Status Change Reason, 426, 1112 Step By, 1063, 1070 Step Limit Method, 1064, 1070 Stocking Type, 210, 96 Structured Only, 225

index8

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Index

Sub Section, 219 Subledger G/L, 39 Subledger Type, 39 Subsidiary, 1022 Supplier, 246, 410, 1113 Supplier Lot, 1113 Supplier Rebate Code, 219 Supply, 433 Tag Number, 623 Tag Status, 621 Tag Team ID Issued, 621, 625 Tag Team ID Received, 622 Terminal Identification, 454, 1032 Thru Date, 433 Thru Grade, 234, 418, 1117 Thru Potency, 234, 418, 1117 Time Basis Code, 250 To Branch/Plant, 1143 To Data Display Decimals, 145 To Tag, 621 Transaction Line Number, 1143 Transaction Reference, 454 Transaction Type, 518 Transaction/Summary, C45 Trn Date, 1135 Type CrossReference Type Code, 411, 1044, 1045, C40 Type Variance, 612 Type Variance Amount or Percent, 612 Type Data, 85, 815 UM, 225, 226 Unit Cost, 260, 75 Unit of Measure, 211, 624, 913, 1038, C27 Unit of Measure Pricing, C50 Unit of Measure Purchasing, 418, 439 Unit Price, 267 Units in Routing (Primary Units), 419 Units Order/Transaction Quantity, C27 Update Average Cost OnLine, 108 User ID, 454 Value Order Policy, 228 Volume, 225 Voucher Number Previous, 1143 Weight, 225 FIFO refund processing. See Container Management Fiscal Year, defined, 451 Fixed/Variable, defined, 230

Forms Adjustments, 314 Application Constants, 1010 Audit Journal Information, 1057 Base Price Revisions (P4106), 267 Branch/Plant Constants, 104 Branch/Plant Constants Pg 1, 105 Branch/Plant Constants Pg 2, 1011 Buyers Information, 438 Classification Codes, 217 Container Deposit Inquiry, C26, C27 Container Deposit/Rental, C43 Container Transaction Inquiry, C29, C30 Cost Revisions, 258, 74 Create Audit Jobs, 1055 Create Audit Locations, 1057 Create Data Queue, 1052 Create Job Description, 1053 Create Journal, 1051 Create Journal Receiver, 1050 Create User Profile, 1055 Cycle Count Detail Review, 67 Cycle Count Entry, 611 Cycle Count Review, 67 Data Item Conversion, 145 Default Location & Printers, 1032 Default Print Queues, 1034 Default Units of Measure, 222 Detailed Availability, 421 Direct As Of Entry, 450 Distribution Automatic Account, 1019 Document Selection, 1028 Document Type Exceptions, 1029 Enter/Change Bill of Material, 912 General Descriptions Entry, 89 Invoice Cycle, C46, C47 Invoice Cycle (preference revisions version), C47 Issues, 36 Item Alternative Description, 28 Item Availability Definition, 107 Item Branch Quantities, 246 Item Branch/Plant Information, 239 Item Cross-Reference, C39 Item Cross-Reference Revisions, 1043, C39 Item Ledger (The Cardex), 428, 452 Item Ledger Information, 453 Item Master Information, 26, 95, 114 Item Search, 48

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

index9

Inventory Management Item Units of Measure, 223 Item/Branch Duplication, 252 Item/Location Information, 242 Location Field Update, 1210 Location Lot Status Change, 1130 Lot Availability, 425, 1116 Lot Dates, 1127 Lot Master Revisions, 1111 Lot Status Codes, 1129 Lot Tracing, 1134 Manufacturing Values Entry, 226 Plant Manufacturing Data, 249, 250 Preference Profiles, C42 Pricing Unit of Measure, C49 Pricing Unit of Measure (preference revisions version), C49 Primary Location, 241 Print Message Revisions, 1024 Profile Data Entry, 88 Profile Data Types, 84 Profile Multi-Attribute Srch, 813 Reclassifications, 1141 Speed Location Maintenance, 1069 Speed Lot Update, 1124 Standard Units of Measure, 1038 Start Journal Physical File, 1052 Summary Availability, 416 Supply/Demand Inquiry, 432 System Constants, 107 Tag Count Entry, 622 Tag Issues and Receipts, 620 Tag Status Review, 625 Tag Status Summary, 627 Tag Variance Review, 627 Text Messages, 213, 1027 Track/Track Inclusion Rules, 1136 Transaction Family Documents, 518 Transfers, 320 User Defined Code Revisions, C37, C38 Freeze Fence, defined, 230 From Grade, defined, 234, 418, 1117 From Potency, defined, 233, 418, 1117 From Tag, defined, 621 From/To, defined, 1063, 1069, 1143 Future Cost Update, processing options, 712 Future Cost Update program (P41052), 79 Future Cost Update report, sample, 79

G
G/L Class, defined, 210 G/L Offset, defined, C45 General Descriptions Entry form, sample, 89 General Ledger, reports Item Ledger by G/L Class Print report, 458 Item Ledger Detail Print, 456 Period General Ledger by Object Account, 459 General ledger, accounting for transactions, 33 Generic Purge, processing options, 135 Global Reporting Code Update, processing options, 127 Grade Change Reason, defined, 1112 Grade Control, defined, 234 Grade/Potency Pricing, defined, 233 Gross margin, ABC analysis, 510

H
History, defined, 426, 1117 Hold Expired Lots report, sample, 1128

entering Item Master records for kits, Item Master Information form, 95 entering kit information
entering kit pricing information, 9-8 overview, 9-5 setting up locations for kits, 9-7

example, 92 levels, 95 locations, 97 overview, 91 pricing, 98 types, 92

L
L/R, defined, 1011 Landed Cost Rule, defined, 220 Language, defined, 410, 1027 Last Revision No., defined, 232 Leadtime Cumulative, defined, 231 Leadtime Level, defined, 231 Leadtime Manufacturing, defined, 231 Leadtime Per Unit, defined, 232 Length, defined, 1011

Level, defined, 1135 Levels cost, 256 for kits, 913 price, 264 Limits, in speed location maintenance, 1062 Line Type, defined, 211 Locate item information, locating item information, 47 Locate quantity information locating detailed quantity information, 421 locating on-hand quantity information, 427 locating quantity information by lot, 424 locating summary quantity information, 416 overview, 415 Locating item information defining search criteria, 48 form, 48 overview, 47 query mode, 412 wildcard searches, 413 Location, defined, 243, 624, 1014 Location format, revising, 129 Location Level of Detail, defined, 1015 Location Lot Status Change form, sample, 1130 Location Redefinition, processing options, 1212 Locations See also Default location information defining the location format, 1010 primary, 1013 setting up locations for kits, 97 setting up warehouse locations. See Branch/plant constants Lot, defined, 243, 624, 1111 Lot Availability, processing options, 427, 1118 Lot availability overview, 424 quantity information, 424 Lot Availability form, sample, 425, 1116 Lot Availability program (P41280), 425 Lot Dates form, sample, 1127 Lot Dates program (P00051), 1127 Lot Description, defined, 316, 1112 Lot Expiration, defined, 316 Lot Expiration Date, defined, 1111

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

index13

Inventory Management Lot Grade, defined, 316, 1112 Lot Master Revisions, processing options, 1113 Lot Master Revisions form, sample, 1111, 1119 Lot Master Revisions program (P4108), 1111, 1119 Lot Potency, defined, 316, 1112 Lot Process Type, defined, 116 Lot processing assigning lot numbers, 111 duplicate lots, 111 entering lot information
creating a lot, 11-11 duplicate lots, 11-9 entering information for lots, 11-9 entering lot control information, 11-11 entering lot information for items, 11-4 entering supplier information, 11-13 Item Master Information form, 11-4 Lot Master Revisions form, 11-11 overview, 11-3 Lot Master Revisions form, 11-23 Speed Lot Update form, 11-24 tracking lot dates, 11-27

working with lot availability, overview, 1115 working with lot quantities, 1118
Lot Master Revisions form, 11-19 reviewing lot quantities, 11-19 tracking lot quantities, 11-20

working with lot statuses, 1128

assigning status codes to different lot locations, 11-30 Hold Expired Lots report, 11-28 Location Lot Status Change form, 11-30 Lot Status Codes form, 11-29 setting up lot status codes, 11-29

overview, 111 reclassifying lots

bulk inventory, 11-44 correcting errors, 11-43 document numbers, 11-43 example, 11-40 grouping reclassifications, 11-43 overview, 11-39 Reclassifications form, 11-41 uncommitted quantities, 11-44

Lot quantity information, locating quantity information by lot, 424 Lot Status, defined, 244, 422, 426 Lot Status Code, defined, 115, 1112 Lot Status Codes form, sample, 1129 Lot Status Codes program (P00051), 1129 Lot Tracing form, sample, 1134 Lot Tracing Inquiry, processing options, 1136 Lot Tracing report, sample, 1133 Lot Tracing/Tracking program (P41203), 1134 Lot Tracking report, sample, 1133

M
Manufacturing setup costs, 261 Manufacturing Values Entry form, sample, 226 Manufacturing Values Entry program (P41013), 226 Margin Analysis, processing options, 514 Margin Analysis report, sample, 513 Master Planning Family, defined, 219 Maximum Reorder Quantity, defined, 247 Message Display Fence, defined, 230 Messages. See Print messages MFG Leadtime Quantity, defined, 230 Minimum Reorder Quantity, defined, 247 Mode, defined, 1135, 1138 Multiple Order Quantity, defined, 247

viewing lot availability, 1115

Lot Availability form, 11-16

viewing lot transactions

Lot Tracing form, 11-34 Lot Tracing report, 11-33 Lot Tracking report, 11-33 overview, 11-31 printing trace and track reports, 11-33 reviewing trace and track information, 11-34 setting up trace/track inclusions rules, 11-36 specifying a trace/track mode, 11-37 Trace/Track Inclusion Rules form, 11-36

working with lot activity dates, 1122

changing activity dates for a single lot, 11-23 changing activity dates for multiple lots, 11-24 Lot Dates form, 11-27

index14

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Index

N
Name Remark, defined, 624, 810 Net Quantity 01, defined, 451 New Tag Status, defined, 621 Number of Days in Year, defined, 106

processing a tag count

entering the tag count results, 6-22 printing inventory tags, 6-18 recording tag distribution information, 6-19 recording tag receipt information, 6-22 reviewing the tag status, 6-24 running a quantity count comparison, 6-28 running tag count updates, 6-30

O
Object Account, defined, 1022 On Hand, defined, 440 On Purchase Order, defined, 440 On-hand quantity form, 428 locating on-hand quantity information, 427 On-hand value, ABC analysis, 510 Order Number, defined, 1113 Order Reprice Group, defined, 266

P
Performance information, reviewing performance information, 437 Period General Ledger by Object Account report, sample, 459 Period Number Current, defined, 105 Phase, defined, 310 Physical inventories choosing items for the cycle count, header and detail tables, 65 cycle count, 63 overview, 61 process a cycle count, overview, 63 process a tag count, overview, 617 processing a cycle count
AAIs, 6-4 canceling the cycle count, 6-10 choosing items for the cycle count, 6-4, 6-18 entering the cycle count results, 6-10 printing cycle count sheets, 6-9 printing the variance report, 6-14 reviewing the cycle count status, 6-7 reviewing the cycle count variances, 6-11 revising the cycle count quantity, 6-13 updating the cycle count status, 6-14

tag count, 617 Planner Number, defined, 215 Planning Code, defined, 229 Planning Fence, defined, 230 Planning Fence Rule, defined, 229 Plant Manufacturing Data form, sample, 249, 250 Plant Manufacturing Data program (P41027), 249, 250 Potency Change Reason, defined, 1112 Potency Control, defined, 233 Preferences. See Container Management Price Book, sample, 58 Pricing defined, 224 entering kit pricing information, 98 Price Book report, 58 schedules. See Container Management Primary, defined, 224 Primary location, defining in Warehouse Management, 1013 Primary Location (P/S), defined, 244, 418 Primary Location form, sample, 241 Primary Location program (P41021W), 241 Print Before (Y/N), defined, 1026 Print Cycle Count Sheets program (P41410), 69 Print Cycle Count Sheets report, sample, 69 Print Inventory Tags program (P41607), 618 Print Message, defined, 214, 1026, C52 Print Message Revisions form, sample, 1024 Print Message Revisions program (P4016), 1024 Print messages creating document type exceptions, Document Type Exceptions form, 1029 defining a message, 1025
defining a base message in another language, 10-26 Text Detail Revisions form, 10-25 Text Messages form, 10-27 using a base message, 10-25

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

index15

Inventory Management defining document type exceptions, 1028 defining print information for messages and item notes, 1027
Document Selection form, 10-28

deleting messages, 1024 displaying messages, 1024 printing messages, 1024 setting up messages
overview, 10-23 Print Message Revisions form, 10-24 Text Detail Revisions, 10-25

Print on Report (Y/N), defined, 1028 Print Queue, defined, 1033 Print Variance Detail, processing options, 614 Process Group 1, defined, 220 Process Supplemental Data Base by Branch, defined, 108 Process UOM Conversions by Branch, defined, 108 Processing options ABC Analysis, 511 Batch Cost Maintenance, 77 Bill of Material Revisions, 914 Buyers information, 444 Buyers Guide, 56 Container Deposit/Refund/Rental Billing, C18 Container Management Extraction Server, C15 Container Reconcilations Report, C24 Cost Analysis, 513 Customer/Distributor Balance, C22 Cycle Count Review, 68 Data Item Conversion, 146 DDP/Audit Information, 1059 Future Cost Update, 712 Generic Purge, 135 Global Reporting Code Update, 127 Inquiry by Type of Data Items, 815 Inventory Adjustments, 317 Inventory Count Entry and Additions, 611 Inventory Count Sheet, 69 Inventory Issues, 310 Inventory Journal, 58 Inventory Transfers, 322 Inventory Turn Report, 521 Inventory Valuation Analysis, 516 Item Availability Detail, 424 Item Availability Summary, 419 Item Branch Global Update, 126

Item Branch Information Revisions, 253 Item Cost Level Conversion, 149 Item Ledger As Of by G/L Class Code, 458 Item Ledger As Of Record Generation, 448 Item Ledger Inquiry, 455 Item Ledger to Item Balance Integrity Report, 530 Item Ledger/Account Integrity, 526 Item Location (F4102) Purge, 1310 Item Master (F4101) Purge, 138 Item Master Directory, 55 Item Master Global Update, 126 Item Master Information Revisions, 235 Item Profile Report, 817 Item Search, 413 Item/Branch Duplication, 253 Item/Branch Duplication Batch Selection, 254 Item/Lot Change Transactions, 1144 Items by Data Type Report, 818 Location Redefinition, 1212 Lot Availability, 427, 1118 Lot Master Revisions, 1113 Lot Tracing Inquiry, 1136 Margin Analysis, 514 Print Variance Detail, 614 Select Items for Cycle Count, 66 Speed Cost Maintenance, 76 Speed Lot Update, 1126 Stock Status, 55 Stock Tags, 524 Supply/Demand Inquiry, 434 Supply/Demand Report, 522 Tag Inventory Count Entry, 624 Tag Inventory Update, 630 Tag Print, 619 Text Messages Review, 1029 Update Cycle Count, 615 Product No, defined, 29 Production, defined, 224 Profile Data Entry form, sample, 88 Profile Data Entry program (P41091), 88 Profile Data Types form, sample, 84 Profile Data Types program (P41090), 84 Profile Multi-Attribute Search program (P410220), 813 Profile Multi-Attribute Srch form, sample, 813

index16

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Index

Program ID, defined, 454 Programs and IDs P00051 (lot dates), 1127 P00051 (lot status codes), 1129 P00051 (trace/track inclusion rules), 1136 P00051 (user defined code revisions), C37, C38 P0016 (text messages), 213, 1027 P3002 (bill of material revisions), 912 P4007 (preference profiles), C42 P400951 (default location & printers), 1032 P40096 (default print queues), 1034 P4009W (system constants), 107 P4016 (print message revisions), 1024 P4016W (text detail revisions), 1025 P4017 (document selection), 1028 P4017W (document type exceptions), 1029 P40200 (container deposit/rental), C43 P40200 (invoice cycle preference), C46 P40200 (pricing unit of measure), C49 P40200 (print messages/preference inquiry), C51 P4021 (supply/demand inquiry), 432 P40300 (container deposit/rental), C43 P40300 (invoice cycle preference revisions), C47 P40300 (invoice cycle preference), C47 P40300 (pricing unit of measure), C49 P40300 (print messages/preference inquiry), C51 P40300 (print messages/preference revisions), C52 P40950 (distribution automatic account), 1019 P40CVT (data item conversion), 145 P41001 (branch/plant constants page 1), 105 P410011 (item availability), 107 P410012 (branch/plant constants page 2), 1011 P41001S (application constants), 1010 P41002 (item units of measure), 223 P41003 (standard units of measure), 1038 P4100A (speed location maintenance), 1069 P4101 (item master information), 26, 114 P41011 (classification codes), 217 P41012 (default units of measure), 222 P41013 (manufacturing values entry), 226

P41015 (item/branch duplication), 252 P41016W (item alternative description), 28 P41021W (primary location), 241 P41022 (item branch quantities), 246 P410220 (profile multi-attribute search), 813 P41023 (detailed availability), 421 P41024 (item/location information), 242 P41026 (item branch/plant information), 239 P41027 (plant manufacturing data), 249, 250 P41040 (item cross-reference), C39 P41041 (item cross-reference revisions), 1043, C39 P4105 (cost revisions), 258 P4105 (speed cost maintenance), 74 P41052 (future cost update), 79 P4106 (base price revisions), 267 P4108 (lot master revisions), 1111, 1119, 1123 P41080 (speed lot update), 1124 P4108S (location lot status change), 1130 P41090 (profile data types), 84 P41091 (profile data entry), 88 P4111 (item ledger the cardex), 428 P41112 (direct as of entry), 450 P41118 (container transaction inquiry), C29, C30 P4111W (item ledger information), 453 P4112 (issues), 36 P4113 (transfers), 320 P4114 (adjustments), 314 P4115 (buyers information), 438 P4116 (reclassifications), 1141 P4118 (container deposit inquiry), C26 P41180 (Container Management deposits/rentals), C18 P41182 (customer/distributor balance), C21 P41189 (Container Management Extraction Server), C14 P41200 (item search), 48 P41202 (summary availability), 416 P41203 (lot tracing), 1134 P41204 (branch/plant constants), 104 P41240 (cycle count review), 67 P41241 (cycle count detail review), 67 P41280 (lot availability), 425, 1116 P4141 (cycle count entry), 611 P41410 (print cycle count sheets), 69

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

index17

Inventory Management P41601 (tag issues and receipts), 619, 622 P41602 (tag count entry), 622 P41603 (tag status summary), 627 P41604 (tag status review), 624 P41605 (tag variance review), 627 P41607 (print inventory tags), 618 P41610 (tag count update), 630 P41802 (batch cost maintenance), 76 P41811 (average cost update), 78 P41815 (item cost level conversion), 147 P41822 (location field update), 1210 P42565 (print invoices), C20 P43115 (transaction family documents), 518 P84820J (audit journal information), 1057 P84821 (create audit jobs), 1055 P84825 (create audit locations), 1057 Purchase orders, buyers information, 443 Purchase Price Level, defined, 257, 99 Purchase Price Retrieval UOM, defined, 109 Purchase Rebate Category Code, defined, 109 Purchasing, defined, 224 Purchasing Cost Method, defined, 259 Purchasing Taxable, defined, 245 Purchasing: Preferred Carrier, defined, 216 Purges overview, 131 processing options for, 139 purging data
general purges, 13-3 overview, 13-3 running the general purge, 13-5 running the special purge, 13-5 special purges, 13-3 technical considerations, 13-4

special purges
running the Item Balance purge, 13-8 running the Item Deletion purge, 13-5 running the Item Master purge, 13-8

Quantity Current, defined, C27 Quantity Hard Committed, defined, 419 Quantity Other Purchasing 1, defined, 422 Quantity Physical Count, defined, 611, 613 Quantity Work Order Hard Commit, defined, 419 Quantity 1 Other primary units, defined, 422 Quantity 2 Other primary units, defined, 422 Quantity Available, defined, 419 Quantity Available On Receipt, defined, 440 Quantity Count Comparison report, sample, 630 Quantity Held, defined, 422 Quantity in Inspection, defined, 422 Quantity in Operation 1, defined, 423 Quantity in Operation 2, defined, 423 Quantity in Transit, defined, 422 Quantity Inbound Warehouse, defined, 423 Quantity information, overview, 415 Quantity on Backorder, defined, 419 Quantity on Future Commit, defined, 419 Quantity on Hand Primary units, defined, 418 Quantity on Hand/Held, defined, 426, 1117 Quantity on Purchase Orderprimary units, defined, 419 Quantity on Work Order Receipt, defined, 419 Quantity Outbound Warehouse, defined, 423 Quantity Per, defined, 913 Quantity Receipts Total, defined, 419 Quantity Soft Committed, defined, 419 Quantity/Amt, defined, 627 Queue Hours, defined, 250

R
Ranking items, ABC analysis, 510 Rate Deposit, defined, C28 Reason Code, defined, 38, 454 Reclassifications. See Lot processing; Reclassifying inventory Reclassifications form, sample, 1141 Reclassifying inventory, overview, 1139 Reconciled Flag, defined, C30 Relationship, defined, 612, 628

Q
Quantities Adjusted, defined, 1121 Quantities Approved, defined, 1122 Quantities Completed, defined, 1121 Quantities Issued, defined, 1121 Quantities Received, defined, 1121 Quantities Sold, defined, 1122 Quantity, defined, 226, 1038

index18

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Index

Reorder Point, defined, 247 Reorder Point Input, defined, 440, 443 Reorder Quantity, defined, 247 Reports ABC Analysis, 510 analysis
ABC, 5-10 cost, 5-12 margin, 5-13 stock tags, 5-23 supply and demand, 5-21 turnover, 5-17 valuation, 5-15

Quantity Count Comparison, 630 reviewing inventory analysis reports

overview, 5-9 printing stock tags, 5-23 reviewing the ABC Analysis, 5-10 reviewing the Cost Analysis, 5-12 reviewing the Inventory Turn report, 5-17 reviewing the Margin Analysis, 5-13 reviewing the Supply and Demand report, 5-21 reviewing the Valuation Analysis, 5-15

analysis reports, 59 audit reports, 531 Buyers Guide, 56 Container Billing, C18 Container Management Extraction Server, C14 Cost Analysis, 512 Cost Revisions Update, 78 Detail Variance Print, 614 Future Cost Update, 79 Hold Expried Lots, 1128 integrity
Item Balance/Ledger, 5-27 Item Ledger/Account, 5-25

reviewing inventory audit reports, overview, 531 reviewing inventory integrity reports
overview, 5-25 reviewing the Item Balance/Ledger Integrity report, 5-27 reviewing the Item Ledger/Account Integrity report, 5-25

reviewing inventory status reports

overview, 5-3 reviewing the Buyer's Guide, 5-6 reviewing the Inventory Journal, 5-7 reviewing the Item Master Directory, 5-5 reviewing the Price Book, 5-8 reviewing the Stock Status report, 5-4

integrity reports, 525 Inventory Journal, 57 Inventory Turn, 517 Item Balance/Ledger Integrity, 527 Item Branch Audit, overview, 534 Item Cost Level Conversion, 147 Item Ledger by G/L Class Print, 458 Item Ledger Detail Print, 456 Item Ledger/Account Integrity, 525 Item Master Audit, overview, 532 Item Master Directory, 55 Item Profile, 816 Items by Data Type, 817 Lot Tracing, 1133 Lot Tracking, 1133 Margin Analysis, 513 overview, 51 Period General Ledger by Object Account, 459 Price Book, 58 Print Cycle Count Sheets, 69 Print Inventory Tags, 618 printing stock tags, 523

reviewing the ABC Analysis, 510 reviewing the Buyers Guide, 56 reviewing the Cost Analysis, 512 reviewing the Inventory Journal, 57 reviewing the Inventory Turn report, 517
grouping transaction types, 5-17 running the Inventory Turn report, 5-19

reviewing the Item Balance/Ledger Integrity report, 527 reviewing the Item Ledger/Account Integrity report, 525 reviewing the Item Master Directory, 55 reviewing the Margin Analysis, 513 reviewing the Price Book, 58 reviewing the Stock Status report, 54 reviewing the Supply and Demand report, 521 reviewing the Valuation Analysis, 515 Select Items for Count, 65 status, Stock Status, 54 status reports, 53 Stock Status, 54 stock tags, 523 Summary Invoice, C20 Summary Level Invoicing, C21 Supply and Demand, 521

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

index19

Inventory Management Transaction Invoice, C20 Transaction Level Invoicing, C21 Trial Balance by Object Account, 461 Valuation Analysis, 515 Request Date, defined, 434 Review performance information, 437 form, 438 overview, 437 reviewing inventory quantities, calculations, 438 reviewing open purchase orders, 443 reviewing sales history, 441 Review supply and demand information, overview, 431 Reviewing transactions on general ledger reports Item Ledger by G/L Class Print report, 458 Item Ledger Detail Print report, 456 Period General Ledger by Object Account report, 459 Trial Balance by Object Account report, 461 Round to Whole Number, defined, 230 Searching for items search text, 411 wildcard search, 413 Secondary, defined, 224 Select Items for Count, report, 65 Select Items for Count program (P41411), 64, 65, 618 Select Items for Cycle Count, processing options, 66 Selection Exits, defined, 615 Separator Location, defined, 1012 Separator character, location code, 1010 Sequence Number, defined, C45 Serial Number Required, defined, 118 setting up automatic accounting instructions, procedure, 1019 Setting up items, overview, 21 Setup. See System setup Shelf Life Days, defined, 117 Shipping, defined, 224 Shipping Commodity Class, defined, 220 Shipping Conditions Code, defined, 220 Shipping Units Per Container, defined, 248 Shrink Factor, defined, 250 Shrink Factor Method, defined, 250 Skip to Tag, defined, 623 Special Handling Code User Def Codes, defined, C38 Speed Cost Maintenance See also Cost updates processing options, 76 Speed Cost Maintenance program (P4105), 74 Speed location maintenance entering new location information, deleting locations, 1071 examples, 1064 setting up locations using, overview, 1061 working with speed location maintenance
limits, 10-62 Speed Location Maintenance form, 10-69 steps, 10-62

S
Safety Stock, defined, 248, 422 Sales Catalog Section, defined, 219 Sales Category Code 3, defined, 219 Sales Price Based On Date, defined, 109 Sales price information assigning price groups to an item, 265 assigning price levels to an item, 264 entering item prices, 267 entering sales price information, 263 form, 267 overview, 263 price groups, 265 price levels, 264 prices, 267 Sales Price Level, defined, 264, 99 Sales Price Retrieval UOM, defined, 108 Sales Taxable, defined, 245 Sales: Preferred Carrier, defined, 215 Sales/Inventory Cost Method, defined, 259 Search Text, defined, 210, 410 Search Value, defined, 813 Searches, wildcard, 413

Speed Lot Update, processing options, 1126 Speed Lot Update form, sample, 1124 Speed Lot Update program (P41080), 1124 Srch, defined, 29 Standard Grade, defined, 234 Standard Potency, defined, 233 Standard Setup Hours, defined, 250 Standard units of measure, Standard Units of Measure form, 1038

index20

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Index

Start Journal Physical File form, sample, 1052 Status Change Reason, defined, 426, 1112 Step By, defined, 1063, 1070 Step Limit Method, defined, 1064, 1070 Steps, in speed location maintenance, 1062 Stock Status, processing options, 55 Stock Status report, 54 sample, 54 Stock Tags, processing options, 524 Stock tags bar codes, requirements for printing, 523 sample, 523 Stocking Type, defined, 210, 96 Structured Only, defined, 225 Sub Section, defined, 219 Subledger G/L, defined, 39 Subledger Type, defined, 39 Subsidiary, defined, 1022 Summary availability overview, 416 quantity information, 416 Summary Availability form, sample, 416 Summary Availability program (P41202), 416 Summary quantity information, locating summary quantity information, 416 Supplemental database defining data types
form, 8-4 modes, 8-3 overview, 8-3

report, 521 reviewing supply and demand information, 431 Supply/Demand Inquiry, processing options, 434 Supply/Demand Inquiry form, sample, 432 Supply/Demand Inquiry program (P4021), 432 Supply/Demand Report, processing options, 522 System constants. See Branch/plant constants System Constants form, sample, 107 System setup defining batch control constants, Application Constants form, 1010 defining branch/plant constants
Branch/Plant Constants form, 10-4 Branch/Plant Constants-Pg 1 form, 10-5 Branch/Plant Constants-Pg 2 form, 10-11 System Constants form, 10-7

defining item availability, Item Availability Definition form, 107 overview, 101 setting up audit information
activating the audit process, 10-58 Create Data Queue form, 10-52 Create Job Description form, 10-53 Create Journal form, 10-51 Create Journal Receiver form, 10-50 Create User Profile form, 10-55 overview, 10-47 setting up IBM information for the audit process, 10-48 setting up the audit process, 10-55 Start Journal Physical File form, 10-52

entering supplemental data, 87

code mode, 8-8 narrative mode, 8-11

overview, 81 reviewing supplemental data, 812

by item, 8-14 form, 8-13 with multiple criteria, 8-13

setting up automatic accounting instructions

Distribution Automatic Account form, 10-19 overview, 10-17

running supplemental data reports

Item Profile, 8-16 Items by Data Type, 8-16

setting up constants
defining batch control constants, 10-9 defining branch/plant constants, 10-4 defining item availability, 10-6 defining system constants, 10-7 defining the location format, 10-10 overview, 10-3

updating, 82 working with supplemental data, overview, 87 Supplier, defined, 246, 410, 1113 Supplier Lot, defined, 1113 Supplier Rebate Code, defined, 219 Supply, defined, 433 Supply and demand overview, 431

setting up default location information

assigning default print queues, 10-33 Default Location & Printers form, 10-32 Default Print Queues form, 10-34 defining a default location and approval route code, 10-32

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

index21

Inventory Management
overview, 10-31

setting up item cross-reference

entering crossreferences, 10-42 Item CrossReference Revisions form, 10-43 locating crossreferences, 10-45 overview, 10-41

updating item search information, overview, 123

T
Tag count entering the tag count results, 622 printing inventory tags, 618 processing a tag count, 617 recording tag distribution information, 619 recording tag receipt information, 622 reviewing the tag status, 624 running a quantity count comparison, 628 running tag count updates, 630 Tag Count Entry form, sample, 622 Tag Count Entry program (P41602), 622 Tag Count Update program (P41610), 630 Tag Inventory Count Entry, processing options, 624 Tag Inventory Update, processing options, 630 Tag Issues and Receipts form, sample, 620 Tag Issues and Receipts program (P41601), 619, 622 Tag Number, defined, 623 Tag Print, processing options, 619 Tag Status, defined, 621 Tag Status Review form, sample, 625 Tag Status Review program (P41604), 624 Tag Status Summary form, sample, 627 Tag Status Summary program (P41603), 627 Tag Team ID Issued, defined, 621, 625 Tag Team ID Received, defined, 622 Tag Variance Review form, sample, 627 Tag Variance Review program (P41605), 627 Tags, for tag count, 618 Terminal Identification, defined, 454, 1032 Text messages, defining documents on which to print, 1027 Text Messages form, sample, 213, 1027 Text Messages program (P0016), 213 Text Messages Review, processing options, 1029 Thru Date, defined, 433 Thru Grade, defined, 234, 418, 1117 Thru Potency, defined, 234, 418, 1117 Time Basis Code, defined, 250 To Branch/Plant, defined, 1143

setting up messages
defining a base message in another language, 10-26 defining a message, 10-25 defining document type exceptions, 10-28 defining print information for messages and item notes, 10-27 Document Selection form, 10-28 Document Type Exceptions form, 10-29 overview, 10-23 Print Message Revisions form, 10-24 Text Detail Revisions form, 10-25 Text Messages form, 10-27 using a base message, 10-25

setting up standard units of measure

conversion factors, 10-36 overview, 10-35 Standard Units of Measure form, 10-38

setting up the audit process

Audit Journal Information form, 10-57 creating an audit job, 10-55 creating audit locations, 10-57

setting up warehouse locations, overview, 1013 work with speed location maintenance, 1061 working with speed location maintenance
deleting locations, 10-71 examples, 10-64 limits, 10-62 Speed Location Maintenance form, 10-69 steps, 10-62

System updates overview, 121 revising location format

correcting errors, 12-10 Location Field Update form, 12-10 overview, 12-9 setting up a model branch, 12-10 updating, 12-11

updating item information

overview, 12-5 updating category codes and item numbers, 12-7 updating item master and branch/plant information, 12-5

index22

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Index

To Data Display Decimals, defined, 145 To Tag, defined, 621 Total sales, ABC analysis, 510 Trace/Track Inclusion Rules form, sample, 1136 Tracing, lots, 1134 inclusion rules, 1136 mode, 1137 Tracking, lots, 1134 inclusion rules, 1136 mode, 1137 Transaction Line Number, defined, 1143 Transaction Reference, defined, 454 Transaction Type, defined, 518 Transaction/Summary, defined, C45 Transactions accounting for, 33 adjustments, 313 creating balance forward records, 446 file updates, 33 issues, 35 on general ledger reports, 455 overview, 31 reclassifications, 1139 reviewing multiple transactions and balances, 452 transfers, 319 working with transaction records, 445 Transfers correcting errors, 322 document numbers, 322 example, 319 form, 320 overview, 319 Transfers form, sample, 320 Transfers program (P4113), 320 Trial Balance by Object Account report, sample, 461 Trn Date, defined, 1135 Turnover (of inventory), report, 517 Type CrossReference Type Code, defined, 411, 1044, 1045, C40 Type Variance, defined, 612 Type Variance Amount or Percent, defined, 612 Type Data, defined, 85, 815

U
UM, defined, 225, 226 Unit Cost, defined, 260, 75 Unit of Measure, defined, 211, 624, 913, 1038, C27 Unit of Measure Pricing, defined, C50 Unit of Measure Purchasing, defined, 418, 439 Unit Price, defined, 267 Units in Routing (Primary Units), defined, 419 Units Order/Transaction Quantity, defined, C27 Units of measure. See Standard units of measure Update Average Cost OnLine, defined, 108 Update Cycle Count, processing options, 615 User defined codes, tables, 40/OR, 1028 User ID, defined, 454

V
Valuation analysis, report, 515 Valuation Analysis report, sample, 515 Value Order Policy, defined, 228 Variance, in cycle count, 611 report, 614 Volume, defined, 225 Voucher Number Previous, defined, 1143

W
Warehouse locations. See System setup Weight, defined, 225 Work with transaction records, 445 creating balance forward records, 446 entering individual transactions, 449 overview, 445 reviewing multiple transactions and balances, 452 reviewing transactions on general ledger reports, 455

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

index23

Inventory Management

index24

Release A7.3 (June 1996)

Intrusion Detection Honeypots
From Everand
Intrusion Detection Honeypots
Chris Sanders
3/5 (2)
Accellos - Guide - Handheld - Manual PDF
0% (1)
Accellos - Guide - Handheld - Manual PDF
416 pages
Aquaponic Design Plans Everything You Needs to Know: Everything You Need to Know from Backyard to Profitable Business
From Everand
Aquaponic Design Plans Everything You Needs to Know: Everything You Need to Know from Backyard to Profitable Business
David H Dudley
No ratings yet
Cuentas Por Cobrar - Manual
No ratings yet
Cuentas Por Cobrar - Manual
840 pages
Accellos - Guide - V60WebDispatch PDF
100% (1)
Accellos - Guide - V60WebDispatch PDF
112 pages
How to Sell on Amazon and Product Research: Product Research Tips and Practical Guide on How to Find a Winning Product to Sell on Amazon Fba
From Everand
How to Sell on Amazon and Product Research: Product Research Tips and Practical Guide on How to Find a Winning Product to Sell on Amazon Fba
David L. Ross
No ratings yet
Erp Full MCQ
100% (1)
Erp Full MCQ
44 pages
TOC Goldratt
100% (5)
TOC Goldratt
12 pages
Chapter 12: Decision-Support Systems For Supply Chain Management
No ratings yet
Chapter 12: Decision-Support Systems For Supply Chain Management
21 pages
Oracle Inventory User's Guide: Release 11I
No ratings yet
Oracle Inventory User's Guide: Release 11I
1,018 pages
Oracle Inventory: R User's Guide Release 11i
No ratings yet
Oracle Inventory: R User's Guide Release 11i
1,072 pages
MasterData UG v2012EE PDF
No ratings yet
MasterData UG v2012EE PDF
314 pages
11.5.10 Inventory
No ratings yet
11.5.10 Inventory
682 pages
B 7331 Ceapo
No ratings yet
B 7331 Ceapo
608 pages
M02 InitialSetup - TG - v2016EE
No ratings yet
M02 InitialSetup - TG - v2016EE
85 pages
Warehousing UG v2014EE
No ratings yet
Warehousing UG v2014EE
520 pages
Supply Chain Management - Jerry
100% (2)
Supply Chain Management - Jerry
212 pages
Peachtree by Sage Quantum Advanced Self-Study Guide
No ratings yet
Peachtree by Sage Quantum Advanced Self-Study Guide
230 pages
Magaya Operations Manual PDF
No ratings yet
Magaya Operations Manual PDF
507 pages
ChatGPT for Business: Strategies for Success
From Everand
ChatGPT for Business: Strategies for Success
Matthew C. Smith
No ratings yet
AcumaticaERP InvMgmt
No ratings yet
AcumaticaERP InvMgmt
247 pages
Purchasing Guide
No ratings yet
Purchasing Guide
206 pages
Manual Ventas JDE
No ratings yet
Manual Ventas JDE
742 pages
Oracle® Bills of Material: User's Guide Release 11i
No ratings yet
Oracle® Bills of Material: User's Guide Release 11i
228 pages
What's New in SAP S4HANA 1909 FPS02 WN - OP1909 - FPS02 - EN
100% (1)
What's New in SAP S4HANA 1909 FPS02 WN - OP1909 - FPS02 - EN
98 pages
RP02
No ratings yet
RP02
3 pages
Mapics - Pur
No ratings yet
Mapics - Pur
1,224 pages
Openerp Book
No ratings yet
Openerp Book
478 pages
Ito5 Openerp Book
No ratings yet
Ito5 Openerp Book
9 pages
MFG Pro - Po
100% (1)
MFG Pro - Po
232 pages
Accounts Payable
No ratings yet
Accounts Payable
708 pages
SalesOrders TG v2012SE EE PDF
No ratings yet
SalesOrders TG v2012SE EE PDF
296 pages
Certification Guide 71
No ratings yet
Certification Guide 71
254 pages
Securing ChatGPT: Best Practices for Protecting Sensitive Data in AI Language Models
From Everand
Securing ChatGPT: Best Practices for Protecting Sensitive Data in AI Language Models
Matthew C. Smith
No ratings yet
Magaya Cargo System User Manual
No ratings yet
Magaya Cargo System User Manual
283 pages
SQL Ledger User Guidev306
No ratings yet
SQL Ledger User Guidev306
231 pages
ProductData BA En-Sales Product Kit
No ratings yet
ProductData BA En-Sales Product Kit
107 pages
Business Process Master List & Business Process Procedure
No ratings yet
Business Process Master List & Business Process Procedure
11 pages
Odoo PDF
100% (2)
Odoo PDF
588 pages
Ariba Network Order Guide PDF
No ratings yet
Ariba Network Order Guide PDF
37 pages
115 Cstug
No ratings yet
115 Cstug
674 pages
Gray Hat Hacking the Ethical Hacker's
From Everand
Gray Hat Hacking the Ethical Hacker's
Çağatay Şanlı
5/5 (1)
Qad User Guide
No ratings yet
Qad User Guide
748 pages
PlanSchedWorkbench UG v0325
No ratings yet
PlanSchedWorkbench UG v0325
152 pages
Sap Bydesign 1702 Product Info Product Data
No ratings yet
Sap Bydesign 1702 Product Info Product Data
116 pages
RP01
No ratings yet
RP01
3 pages
OMS User Guide 05-11-2011
100% (1)
OMS User Guide 05-11-2011
880 pages
Costing UG v2022EE
No ratings yet
Costing UG v2022EE
96 pages
Costing UG v2012EE PDF
No ratings yet
Costing UG v2012EE PDF
124 pages
Aps Ig R9 1 022013
No ratings yet
Aps Ig R9 1 022013
92 pages
Accounts Receivable
No ratings yet
Accounts Receivable
840 pages
Software Patterns Made Easy
From Everand
Software Patterns Made Easy
Justice Nanhou
No ratings yet
10K Blueprint
From Everand
10K Blueprint
Cian O Farrell
5/5 (2)
Unlocking Statistics for the Social Sciences
From Everand
Unlocking Statistics for the Social Sciences
Norma Sinclair
No ratings yet
Cybersecurity for Executives: A Guide to Protecting Your Business
From Everand
Cybersecurity for Executives: A Guide to Protecting Your Business
Matthew C. Smith
No ratings yet
Blog Smarter, Not Harder: SEO, Blogging, and AI Strategies to Skyrocket Your Traffic
From Everand
Blog Smarter, Not Harder: SEO, Blogging, and AI Strategies to Skyrocket Your Traffic
Jay Nans
No ratings yet
Web Video Business
From Everand
Web Video Business
MUHAMMAD NUR WAHID ANUAR
No ratings yet
Aquaponics for Profit
From Everand
Aquaponics for Profit
David H Dudley
No ratings yet
Content Creation Revolution with chatGPT
From Everand
Content Creation Revolution with chatGPT
Maria Cowen
No ratings yet
Aquaponics Design Plans, Construction, Operation, and Income: Organic Food
From Everand
Aquaponics Design Plans, Construction, Operation, and Income: Organic Food
David H Dudley
No ratings yet
Aquaponics How to do Everything from Backyard to Profitable Business: from BACKYARD to PROFITABLE BUSINESS
From Everand
Aquaponics How to do Everything from Backyard to Profitable Business: from BACKYARD to PROFITABLE BUSINESS
David H Dudley
No ratings yet
AI-Powered Productivity
From Everand
AI-Powered Productivity
Asma Asfour
No ratings yet
The Linux Terminal for Advanced Users - The Command Line Made Easy: First Edition
From Everand
The Linux Terminal for Advanced Users - The Command Line Made Easy: First Edition
Michael Basler
No ratings yet
SAP Demand Driven MRP
No ratings yet
SAP Demand Driven MRP
28 pages
SD Scenarios PDF
100% (1)
SD Scenarios PDF
150 pages
Supply Chain Management DRP and SCM: Vaisagh. R. Nath
No ratings yet
Supply Chain Management DRP and SCM: Vaisagh. R. Nath
10 pages
Chapter 1: Production and Operation Management Self Assessment Questions
No ratings yet
Chapter 1: Production and Operation Management Self Assessment Questions
31 pages
All SCM
No ratings yet
All SCM
23 pages
Group 9 - Nichols Company
100% (3)
Group 9 - Nichols Company
8 pages
Vision Mission: Principal: Dr. N. V. Raghavendra, Professor, Mech. Dept
No ratings yet
Vision Mission: Principal: Dr. N. V. Raghavendra, Professor, Mech. Dept
77 pages
Creating Level Pull_ a Lean Production-System Improvement -- Art Smalley; Lean Enterprise Institute -- Verison 1_0, Brookline, Mass_ _, 2004 -- 9780974322506 -- 3c27584fc28cb69ec2be587d10c1a8ed -- Anna’s Archive
No ratings yet
Creating Level Pull_ a Lean Production-System Improvement -- Art Smalley; Lean Enterprise Institute -- Verison 1_0, Brookline, Mass_ _, 2004 -- 9780974322506 -- 3c27584fc28cb69ec2be587d10c1a8ed -- Anna’s Archive
142 pages
ERP-Manufacturing Module: Presented by
No ratings yet
ERP-Manufacturing Module: Presented by
16 pages
PP Training Presentation M&M
No ratings yet
PP Training Presentation M&M
49 pages
Module-3-Production and Supply Chain Management
No ratings yet
Module-3-Production and Supply Chain Management
73 pages
ERP Systems: Production and Materials Management: Enterprise Resource Planning, 1 Edition by Mary Sumner
No ratings yet
ERP Systems: Production and Materials Management: Enterprise Resource Planning, 1 Edition by Mary Sumner
21 pages
MQP GE Aviation Inventory Management
No ratings yet
MQP GE Aviation Inventory Management
58 pages
Management Questions
No ratings yet
Management Questions
397 pages
Master Planning of Resources (MPR) Practice Questions - APICS CPIM
No ratings yet
Master Planning of Resources (MPR) Practice Questions - APICS CPIM
17 pages
MRP Excel
No ratings yet
MRP Excel
38 pages
S4HANA Innovation in Supply Chain Processes EWM AATP - V1
No ratings yet
S4HANA Innovation in Supply Chain Processes EWM AATP - V1
33 pages
IGNOU MBA MS-05 Solved Assignment
No ratings yet
IGNOU MBA MS-05 Solved Assignment
16 pages
Om MRP PDF
No ratings yet
Om MRP PDF
6 pages
Cie Exam Reviewer 100 Questions
100% (1)
Cie Exam Reviewer 100 Questions
13 pages
(eBook PDF) Operations And Supply Chain Management The Core 3th download
100% (2)
(eBook PDF) Operations And Supply Chain Management The Core 3th download
54 pages
Case_Study_Write_up.docx%20%281%29
No ratings yet
Case_Study_Write_up.docx%20%281%29
22 pages
Material Requirements Planning &amp ERP PPT at BEC DOMS
No ratings yet
Material Requirements Planning &amp ERP PPT at BEC DOMS
44 pages
ITI Documents
100% (1)
ITI Documents
64 pages
Sap PP Sample
100% (1)
Sap PP Sample
17 pages
Airbus-Daher Readness Review V2 0
No ratings yet
Airbus-Daher Readness Review V2 0
115 pages
Unit 1 Introduction To Cim: Structure
No ratings yet
Unit 1 Introduction To Cim: Structure
22 pages